Home

GOT2000 Connection Manual (Microcomputer, MODBUS, Peripherals)

1. Item Message format format 14 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection format 1 T sTX COT station No Address 9 1 2 0 0 0 0 4 02 41 31H 35 32H 30H 30H 30 30H 34H ODH 9 0 Request massage fi t 15 GOT F900 Seri i t tion f t2 host GOT format 15 eries microcomputer connection format 2 Com i Number of Sum pu pyies ETX Check A 1 5 2 0 0 0 0 4 0 02H 41H 31H 35H 32H 30H 30H 30 30 4 03 44H 30H H L H L H L 4 gt Sum check is performed in this range format 14 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection format 1 Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 ST M15 to 8 M23 to 16 M31 to 24 CR 0 1 0 0 0 0 8 0 02H 30H 31H 30H 30H 30 38H D H L 48 L H D 00000001000000000000000010000000 76543210111111982222111133222222 543210 3210987610987654 Response message during normal format 15 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection format 2 communication GOT host Sum check is performed in this range 4 T T T Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 Sum
2. 3 8 XD01 1 Oo XD02 1 o o XD03 m A XD04 3 1 Oo o XD05 1 o XD06 1 0 0 XD07 1 o XD08 1 o o XD09 1 o XDOA 1 o XDOB 1 0 0 XDOC 1 oO o XDOD 1 070 XDOE XDOF XSCNOO XSCNO1 XSCNO2 XSCNO3 XSCNO4 XSCNO05 XSCNO6 XSCNO7 For 128 point input 1 X070 X060 X050 X040 X030 020 X010 000 O 0 0 O4 O 0 XD00 1 1 1 X001 9 OF 9 OF 9 OF OF OF OF 0 OF XD01 1 1 1 1 1_ X002 cO O1 0 OF pO OF OF pO OF pO OF jo OF XD02 1 i 1 1 1_ X003 9 O1 pO OF 9 OF 9 OF H 0 0 XD03 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 X004 Ot O OF 0 Of pO OF O OF o OF XD04 1 1 1 1 1_ X005 9 H 0 OF 9 OF 9 OF OF 9 OF 9 OF XD05 1 1 1 1 1 X006 OF 9 OF OF OF OF OF 9 OF OF XD06 1 1 1 X007 9 01 9 OF 9 OF 9 OF 9 OF 9 OF 9 010 OF XD07 551 oo O O4 Ot OOF 564 O 04 55 Xo08 XD08 L L L L L L L L X009 9 O1 9 OF 9 OF OF OF 9 9119 9119 OF 09 00 004 004 00 004 004 004 00 XDOA 1 1 1 1 1 X00B 9 09 9 OF OF OF 9 OF OF 9 OF 9 OF XDOB 1 1 1 1 X00C XDOC 1 1 1 9 04 0 0 OF 9 OF OF OF OF
3. d tem 15 5 REVISIONS WARRANTY List of Manuals for Works3 For the manuals related to this product install the manuals with the drawing software If you need a printed manual consult your local Mitsubishi representative or branch office List of Manuals for GT Designer3 GOT2000 1 Screen drawing software manuals Manual name GT Works3 Version1 Installation Procedure Manual Manual number Model code GT Designer3 GOT2000 Help GT Converter2 Version3 Operating Manual for GT Works3 SH 080862ENG 1D7MB2 GOT2000 Series MES Interface Function Manual for GT Works3 Version1 2 Connection manuals SH 081228ENG Manual name GOT2000 Series Connection Manual Mitsubishi Products for GT Works3 Version1 Manual number Model code SH 081197ENG 1D7MJ8 GOT2000 Series Connection Manual Non Mitsubishi Products 1 for GT Works3 Version1 SH 081198ENG GOT2000 Series Connection Manual Non Mitsubishi Products 2 for GT Works3 Version1 SH 081199ENG GOT2000 Series Connection Manual Microcomputer MODBUS Products Peripherals for GT Works3 Version1 SH 081200ENG 3 SoftGOT2000 manuals Manual name GT SoftGOT2000 Version1 Operating Manual 4 GOT2000 manuals Manual number Model code SH 081201ENG Manual name GOT2000 Series User s
4. Item Sum 22222 FTX Check Request message R R 0 1 0 0 8 3 2 0 3 5 host GOT 02H 52H 52 30H 31H 30H 38H 33H 32 30 03 33H 35H 0 H D Sum check is performed in this range Sum check is performed in this range 4 gt 7 Sum STX Data 1 D100 Data 2 M15 to 0 Check 0 0 6 4 0 0 0 1 8 during normal 02H 30H 30H 36H 34H 30H 30H 30H 31H 03 38H 45H communication 0 0 ER H D GOT host i 8 0000000000000001 1111119876543210 543210 during faulty communication host format 1 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection format 1 format 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection format 2 Error NAK code 15H The above is a case where the sum check error 06H has occurred 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 5 Message Formats 2 31 l lt rd o 2 E 2 2 E 2 a D 4 Random write in word units RW command The following shows an example of writing 0064H and 1 to virtual devices D100 and MO respectively Item Message format Request message host gt
5. Address Address specification value Format3 4 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 po Format When GS580 b8 When GS580 b8 Format Format 1 2 GS581 b8 GS582 b8 GS581 b8 GS582 b8 5 6109 or GS583 b8 is ON or GS583 b8 is OFF 5 7 SM6 SM5 SM4 SM3 SM2 SM1 SMO 2200H 2201H 8464 2110H 5 15 SM14 SM13 5 12 5 11 5 10 SM9 SM8 2201 2200 E SM23 SM22 5 21 5 20 5 19 SM18 SM17 SM16 2202 2203 8465 2111 Z SM31 SM30 SM29 SM28 SM27 SM26 SM25 SM24 2203H 2202H c 23 5 39 5 38 5 37 SM36 SM35 SM34 SM33 SM32 2204 2205 8466 2112 5 47 5 46 5 45 SM44 SM43 SM42 5 41 5 40 2205 2204 Unused SM52 5 51 5 50 5 49 5 48 8467 2206 2207 2 2113 O Unused 1 For the address specification method for each data format refer to the following a 3 4 Message Formats 5 Formats 1 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection Formats 3 4 GOT F900 series microcomputer connection Formats 5 Digital Electronics Corporation s memory link method c Formats 6 7 4E frame Formats 8 9 QnA compatible 3E frame 2 2 In formats 6 7 values are specified within a range of SMO to 52 3 For reading or writing data in word units specify the addresses 16 point units Example SMO SM16 SM32 etc o O a 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 15 3 3 Device Data Area 3 4 Message Formats This section describes t
6. 11 9 11 5 Precautions 2 e dit n edo p ud 11 9 12 PRINTER CONNECTION 12 4 Connectable Model lere Eo e 12 2 12 2 System Configuration annes eden dead 12 2 12 2 1 Connecting to PictBridge compatible 12 2 12 2 2 Connecting to serial n nnn 12 3 12 9 GOT Side Settligs ODER dedit 12 4 12 31 Setting communication 12 4 12 32 Communication detail settings srein EEA EA AEE EEOAE nene 12 5 12 4 Precautions snn erinnere ede AA d dde dade ned dd AA dde edd dd AA E AAA 12 6 13 MULTIMEDIA CONNECTION 13 1 Corinectable Model List tnit ci aa 13 2 13 2 System 13 2 13 2 1 Saving video image and displaying it ON 13 2 13 2 2 Sending video image to personal 13 3 19 3 Connection e eto eA a RE e ee Re 13 4 13 31 Coaxial eria PEPPER 13 4 ASA GOT Side SUN GS 025 oie rne omnim ttai mni n n ROI 13 5 13 4 1 Setting communication
7. 2 gt a lt Z E x E 2 E O 2 2 o Dx A a 3 o UJ ES peo 9 1 801 peo 201 0201 o a e 41601 4 1601 t lt Load Lam 7 CONNECTION TO EXTERNAL I O DEVICE 7 9 7 3 Connection Diagram Connection diagram 6 When using A6TBY54 E connector terminal block module User created original operation panel XDOO XD01 XDO2 4 XDO5 XDOG6 XD07 70 71 1 72 1 73 74 75 1 76 77 1 8205 0 429 32993 4009 d 214720 5 07 ES quos 95 9 2099 IE os XSCNO6 50 56 9 1poo 500 6 50060 0 3 05 56 05 9 00 XSCN05 AD no s o 4lpoo 42 0 0 o 4 65 4 46 poo 441 5 04 30 55 4 Si noo 32 3 05 65 39 pioo e 30 of pO O 5 noo 2105 22555 23400 2 boo 2 pioo e 427 phoo0 e XSCN02 10 50 9 5 15 05 16 noo
8. D 1 During processing of read commands Data Response message during normal communication GOT host 2 During processing of write commands ACK 06H Response message NAK during faulty communication GOT host 15 Output value During interrupt fm output 1 2 4 bytes 1 Set the number of interrupt data bytes at Detail setting in GT Designer3 For the setting of the number of interrupt data bytes refer to the following 3 5 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 31 3 4 Message Formats LE 2 a I LE E z E o 2 2 O 14 E 2 O o x Details of data items in message format Data code during communication Communication of the format 3 is performed in ASCII code excluding interrupt output Communication of the format 4 is performed in Binary code 1 2 Control codes Symbol ASCII code Description EOT 04H End of Transmission ENQ 05H Enquiry start of enquiry NAK 15 Negative ACK error response ACK 06 Acknowledge write completion response LF Line Feed CL 0 Clear CR Carriage Return Command Specifies the contents to access from the host to GOT The command is converted to a 1 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted For details of the commands that can be used refer to the followin
9. 11 6 11 4 GOT Side 11 8 11 5 PrecaullOns zd ES HESS Shaw n ROCA 11 9 2 E 2 2 e U a 11 VIDEO RGB CONNECTION 11 1 Connectable Model List The following GOT models support the Video RGB connection GOT model GT 27 For the type of the video camera that can be connected refer to the following Technical News gt List of valid devices applicable for GOT2000 series GOT A 0064 11 2 11 VIDEO RGB CONNECTION 11 1 Connectable Model List 11 2 System Configuration 11 2 1 Displaying video image GOT Extended function OS Video RGB input Connection cable Connection cable GOT Notere umber Signal type Video RGB equipment Cable model connectable Connection diagram Option device Model equipment number 27 Equipment including video cameras and vision 1 s NTSC PAL B Coaxial connection GT27 V4 Z 4 video equipment sensors that outputs images using the or diagram 1 GT27 V4R1 Z for 1 GOT PAL signal GT 27 4 2 RGB equipment GITARRE for 1 GOT x GT15 C50VG 5m Equipment including video cameras 1 vision 2 2 sensors and personal computers that outputs 8 Analog RGB images by using the RGB signal 1 27 connection diagram 1 1 RGB equipment GT27 V4R1 Z for 1 GOT
10. 1 3 1 1 2 communication 1 7 LPrecautiofis cete te cee IE tei 1 9 1 2 Writing the Package Data onto the 1 10 1 2 1 Writing the Package Data onto the 1 10 1 2 2 Checking the package data writing on emen 1 11 1 3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection 1 12 1 3 4 Communication 1 12 1 3 2 Option unity wich chen ae Re ueteri de en aed ie Due re Pe Rd dd La cd 1 13 1 39 9 Conversion cables iie detto ed 1 13 1 3 4 Serial Multi Drop Connection 1 13 1 3 5 Installing a unit on another unit Checking the unit installation position 1 14 1 4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection 1 17 1 4 1 connector 1 17 1 4 2 Coaxial cableconnector connection 1 18 1 4 8 Terminating resistors of GOT 1 19 1 5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected 1 20 1 6 Checking for Normal 1 22 1 631 Check on the
11. Item Message format 1 When Interrupt Data Byte in Communication Detail Settings is set to 1 byte Output value 1 2 When Interrupt Data Byte in Communication Detail Settings is set to 2 byte Output Output Interrupt output value 1 value 2 GOT gt host 3 When Interrupt Data Byte in Communication Detail Settings is set to 4 byte Output Output Output Output value value2 value3 value4 Interrupt output To disable the interrupt output turn ON 5 52 interrupt code output disable flag 3 3 6 SM devices 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 4 Message Formats 3 29 LE 2 12 I E u z E o 2 2 O 14 E 2 O o a Error code list The error contents error code are appended to the response message during faulty communication The following shows error code error contents cause and measures Error code Description Action Review the contents of the message to transmit 10H Command error Check the commands in the message An unsupported command was used 2 2 3 42 List of commands Message length error 11H The upper limit of the data length that can be received by the GOT has been exceeded Review the contents of the message to transmit Check the data length of the message data length of the data section etc Clock data set
12. 05288 05308 65328 65348 128 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 For details on the GS Device refer to the following manual gt GT Designer3 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals Appendix 2 3 GOT special register GS 3 Network No station No notification The network No and station No of the GOT in Ethernet connection are stored at GOT startup If connected by other than Ethernet 0 is stored Device Description CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 GS376 GS378 GS380 GS382 Network No 1 to 239 GS377 GS379 GS381 GS383 Station No 1 to 64 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 27 1 6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 1 6 4 Check on the PLC Read IC tag For RFID connection Read IC tag with a RFID reader writer and check that the read data are written into the PLC CPU Detailed settings including sequence programs device settings and other settings required for monitoring refer to the following manual gt GT Designer3 GOT2000 Help 1 28 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 6 Checking for Normal Monitoring MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 1 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 1 9 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 7 2 8 2 9 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL Microcomputer Connection 2 2 System Config
13. 1 For connectable video camera types refer to the following Technical News xx List of valid devices applicable for GOT1000 series GOT A 0010 2 must select a vision sensor or a personal computer to be used 3 cable length differs according to the specifications of the video RGB equipment 4 RGB can be input with two channels For the switching between two channels refer to the following manual 7 3 GT Designer3 GOT2000 Help 2 E 2 2 a 9 amp a 11 VIDEO RGB CONNECTION 11 3 11 2 System Configuration 11 4 1 2 3 4 5 Power supply of video camera Depending on the video camera type noises from the power supply cable of the camera may cause a malfunction on the PLC or the GOT In this case apply the following line filter to the power line of the camera Recommended line filter TDK ZHC2203 11 or equivalent Power supply of vision sensor If a video camera is used via a vision sensor a power supply module may be required depending on the vision sensor to be used Selection of Video signal output source Depending on the video camera or the system to be used both the power supply module and the video camera can output video signals If video signals are output from both the video camera and the power supply module the voltage level of the signals become lower and the video image cannot be correctly displayed In this case use the
14. B host GOT 42H 00 OOH 00 OOH OOH OOH 1 57H OOH 64H OOH 02 OOH 64H T T T T Response message Data length ACK during normal communication GOT host 42H OOH OOH 00 OOH OOH OOH 06 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 47 3 4 Message Formats 3 In the case of interrupt outputs The following shows an example of an interrupt output when data are written to the interrupt output devices D13 Assuming that 31H is written to 013 Example When the number of interrupt data bytes is 1 2 7 282 LP Interrupt Interrupt output Output value 1 Item Message format When Interrupt Data Byte in Communication Detail Settings is set to 1 byte Output Interrupt output value 1 GOT host 31H Interrupt output To disable the interrupt output turn ON 5 52 interrupt code output disable flag 3 3 6 SM devices To enable the interrupt output set 8 bits to the data length at Communication Detail Settings 3 5 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings When 7 bits is set the MSB 8th bit is ignored Example FFH gt 7 3 48 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 4 Message Formats Error code list In the case of format 5 Digital Electronics Corporation
15. File Transfer F Property Value 4 SuQRedundat Net No 1 3 z XD Station No Switch Eu i GOT Ethernet Setting 192 168 3 18 GOT processing balance when VNC server is in operation Standard GOT Communication Port No 5001 Retry Times 3 v Restrict simultaneous operations of PC and GOT Startup Time Sec 3 Timeout Time Sec 3 Display video multimedia Dey Tinali 0 Reset the security level re authenticate the operator when acquiring operational authority Cox Ethernet Setting si 25 Host NetNo Station Unit Type Address 1 1 QnUD P V QnUDEH 192 168 3 39 eme 1 Select Common Peripheral Setting VNC Server from the menu 2 Check the VNC Server of Use VNC Server to set 4 Select Common Controller Setting from the For details on the settings refer to the following men manual gt GT Designer3 GOT2000 Help 2 The Controller Setting window is displayed Select the channel to be used from the list menu 3 Click the OK button when settings are completed 3 Set Manufacturer Controller Type I F and Driver according to the connected equipment to be used 4 The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer Controller Type I F and Driver are set Make the settings according to the usage environment Click the OK button when settings are completed 10 VNC R SERVER CONNECTIO
16. Basic Settings Action No Data tti Acti Screen 2 e Action Next Screen Device 200 Type Value Type Screen Switching Fixed 2 Base Screen No 2 Signed Constant 1 Numerical display D13 1 By setting this with the numerical display the device value of D21 can be monitored 4 ER The device value is incremented only while Sample Screen Switching Fixed Screen 1 is displayed 5 Base Screen 1 B f 8 Signed Constant 2 Switch 1 un Word 813 255 This is the screen switching switch to Sample Screen 2 Touching this changes the base screen to Sample Bit lamp Screen 2 Basic Settings No Device Style Base screen 2 Lamp Type Device Shape Shape Attribute 022 60 Sample Screen 2 O3 4 Semi 15 3 Bit lamp The device status of D22 b0 is displayed as a lamp 4 Switch 2 This is an alternate switch for changing the state of D22 b0 5 Switch 3 This is the screen switching switch to Sample Screen 1 Touching this changes the base screen to Sample Screen 1 2 76 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 7 System Configuration Examples 1 Displays the send packet structure of the screen 1 batch switching Outline of system operation write packet The following describes the processing on the host EN mun Number of pas 1 020 ex sum side display processing t
17. Item Message format 1 When Interrupt Data Byte in Communication Detail Settings is set to 1 byte Output value 1 2 When Interrupt Data Byte in Communication Detail Settings is set to 2 byte Output Output Interrupt output value 1 value 2 GOT LE 2 12 I E u z E o 2 2 O 14 E 2 O o a 3 When Interrupt Data Byte Communication Detail Settings is set to 4 byte Output Output Output Output value 1 value 2 value 3 value 4 Interrupt output To disable the interrupt output turn ON 5 52 interrupt code output disable flag 7 5 3 3 6 SM devices To enable the interrupt output set 8 bits to the data length at Communication Detail Settings 3 5 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings When 7 bits is set the MSB 8th bit is ignored Example FFH 7 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 43 3 4 Message Formats Error code list When faulty the error code is stored in SD2 For details of error code stored in SD2 the error contents cause and measures refer to the following 257 3 3 5 m Details and actions for errors error codes stored into 502 When an error other than those to be stored in SD2 occurs at faulty only the NAK response is executed Precautions 1 Batch reading writing crossing over different devices When
18. Remove the external sheath of the coaxial cable with 555555555 dimensions as shown below A Cable in use A 3C 2V 15mm Cut this portion of the outer sheath 5C 2V 5C 2V CCY 10mm 2 Pass the nut washer gasket and clamp through the coaxial cable as shown on the left and loosen the external conductor Gasket Insulating material 3 Cut the external conductor insulting material and internal Internal conductor conductor with the dimensions as shown below Note that the external conductor should be cut to the same dimension as the tapered section of the clamp and smoothed down to the clamp B Clamp and external Cable in use conductor IE 3C 2V 6 mm 3 mm 5C 2V 5C 2V CCY 7 mm 5 mm Solder here 4 Solder the contact to the internal conductor 5 4 Insert the connector assembly shown in into the plug shell and screw the nut into the plug shell Precautions for soldering Note the following precautions when soldering the internal conductor and contact Make sure that the solder does not bead up at the soldered section Make sure there are no gaps between the connector and cable insulator or they do not cut into each other Perform soldering quickly so the insulation material does not become deformed 1 18 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection 1 4 3 Terminating resistors of GOT The follow
19. 12 12 3 GOT Side 12 124 Precautions ed Rache nm hh ann 443 12 FB N N PRINTER CONNECTION 12 PRINTER CONNECTION 12 1 Connectable Model List For connectable printers and system equipment refer to the following Technical News 57 List of valid devices applicable for GOT2000 series GOT A 0064 12 2 System Configuration 12 2 1 Connecting to PictBridge compatible printer Extended function driver Printer PictBridge 20 Connection cable Varies according to the connection type Printer Connection cable Number of PLC connectable Model name Model name Option device Model equipment For connectable printers and system equipment GT For the system 27 refer to the following Technical News E 9 configuration between 1 printer for acked together wi e 4 the GOT and PLC 1 GOT KE List of valid devices applicable for GOT2000 series GOT A 0064 printer unit refer to each chapter 1 Communication unit between the GOT and the PictBridge compatible printer GOT does not support some PictBridge Compatible Printers For the precautions for printer connection refer to the following Technical News LF List of valid devices applicable for GOT2
20. Examples of station number setting 4 6 Precautions Reading the holding registers The GOT reads the holding registers 400001 for checking whether the GOT can communicate with the controller Therefore if the equipment does not have holding registers 400001 normal communication may not be performed Station No settings of the MODBUS RTU equipment side In the system configuration the MODBUS RTU equipment with the station number set with the host address must be included For details of host address setting refer to the following 257 4 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings GOT clock control The settings of time adjusting or time broadcast made on the GOT will be disabled on the PLC Disconnecting some of multiple connected equipment The GOT can disconnect some of multiple connected equipment by setting GOT internal device For example the faulty station where a communication timeout error occurs can be disconnected from connected equipment For details of GOT internal device setting refer to the following manual gt GT Designer3 GOT2000 Help MODBUS communication control function on the GS device At GOT startup set MODBUS communication control function with project scripts etc If settings are changed after communication start a communication error may occur r Script Projet Screen Script Symbol Y Option
21. length onthe Review the contents of the message to transmit Check whether th istent data is set tting 07 at the day of The start address of the read write device is out of range ock whether the AE RANG the week as clock data Review the contents of the message to transmit Exceeded number of points error Check the devices that can be used and the device ranges The read write range exceeded the device range LL s 24 Device Data Area Message format error Check the settings of Communication Detail Settings The format of the received message has error Review the contents of the message to transmit Timeout error There is no response from the or the station of the specified address does not exist Precautions Check the communication cable and communication module attachment Check the settings of Communication Detail Settings Review the contents of the message to transmit 1 Batch reading writing crossing over different devices When using the batch read R or batch write W command do not batch read write crossing over the different devices This will cause an error response 2 Storage order for 32 bit data To use the program of Digital Electronics Corporation s memory link method with 32bit Order setting to GOT 1000 series set HL Order to 32bit Order for Communication Detail Settings when 32 bit data is set
22. E C 02H 44H 33H 31H 30H 32H 03H 45H 43H D Request message host gt Address1 Bit pattern1 Hd Address2 Bit pattern2 1 2 0 0 3 8 0 0 2 0 4 0 31H 32 30H 33 38H 30 30H 32H 30H 46 45H 34H 30H 72 552 write specification1 1 write specification2 0 Source data 11010110110 Source data 11011 011011 0 bit pattern 110000000 bit pattern 0100000 Result 001010110 Result 1111101101110 33222222 22222222 10987654 00000000 33333333 98765432 Response message ACK duringnormal communication GOT host 06 Response message NAK during faulty fe communication GOT host 15H 2 66 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 5 Message Formats 72 The write specification specifies how the data of the specified address is changed in the bit pattern Writ 5 i Function Description Action example specification Original data 1010 ON 0 Bits set to 1 by the bit pattern are turned ON Bit pattern 1100 specification Result 1110 Original data 1010 OFF 1 VD Bits set to 1 by the bit pattern are turned OFF Bit pattern 1100 specification Result 0010 Original data 1010 Invert 2 AEN Bits set to 1 by the bit pattern are inverte
23. Frame ID Network Request destination Request destination Host NAK No j PLC No modulel O No mesa Address No F 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Following 15H 46H 38 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 0 0 0 Response message during faulty communication M GOT host T Error code 37H 46H 36H 39H 10 The above is the case where parity error 7 69 has occurred When a wrong day of the week has been set by the clock data setting command If a wrong day of the week is set by the clock data setting commands the clock data will differ from the time displayed on the utility Example When June 1 2004 Thursday is set by the clock data setting command the actual day of week is Tuesday Tuesday TUE will be displayed on the utility time display 2 5 Message Formats 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL Error code list The following shows error code error contents cause and measures Error code Description Action Review the contents of the message to transmit 7 40 Gommand error Check the commands in the message An unsupported command or sub command was used L3 2 5 2 List of commands Data length error 41 Specified points exceeding the number of points that can Review the contents of the message to transmit be communicated during random read writ
24. 2 1 101110 ttn nnda 3 71 37 Device Range that Can Set eee E E there dant denen dd do EEE RA 3 72 3 8 Precautions e 3 73 MODBUS CONNECTIONS 4 MODBUS R RTU CONNECTION 41 Connectable Model Lists 252655 0 RD dtum a M DH 4 2 4 2 System Configuration itn ERE e nae a a nda RR ERA RE Rd a c RR RENE ERA 4 3 4 2 1 Connecting to MODBUS RYRTU 4 3 4 3 Connection ee RT haven etenim EE 4 4 4 31 RS 232 cable oO gg e e LE Ra e e ee aede Mere 4 4 4 3 2 9 422 405 cable x det ee ie t eet hee 4 5 44 GOT Side Settings i xn bert 4 8 4 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings 4 8 4 4 2 Communication detail 4 8 4 5 MODBUS R RTU Equipment Side emm 4 10 4 5 1 Communication 4 10 45 2 Stationnumber settlrig ie oe ere a eet i carae base Ra Ra RO 4 13 s AMI 4 13 5 MODBUS R TCP CONNECTION 5 1 Connectable Model ohne 5 2 52 System nenne nennen nes 5 3 5 2 1 Connecting to MODBUS R TCP equipment seen 5 3 5 37 GOT S
25. Request message host GOT format 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection Binary Year Day Hour Second Day of Command data data_ data data data _ meek data T 5 09H OAH 01 12H 2 31H 04 Response message ACK during communication GOT host 06H NAK Error MM code Response message during faulty communication GOT host 15H The above is a case where the sum check error 06H has occurred When a wrong day of the week has been set by the clock data setting command If a wrong day of the week is set by the clock data setting commands the clock data will differ from the time displayed on the utility Example When October 1 2009 Tuesday is set by the clock data setting command the actual day of the week is Thursday Thursday THU will be displayed on the utility time display 3 28 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 4 Message Formats 7 In the case of interrupt outputs The following shows an example of an interrupt output when data are written to the interrupt output devices D13 and D14 Assuming that 3139H is written to D13 and 55 to 014 Example When the number of interrupt data bytes is 2 Interrupt 4 o lt Interrupt output Output Output value 1 value 2
26. D H H D 4 Sum check is pe rformed in this range Response message during normal communication GOT host Response message during faulty communication host 1 Start address end address specification conditions Specify addresses so that the start address is the same or less than the end address Error response occurs in the following cases The address to specify has the start address greater than the end address Either of the start address or end address exceeds the device range that can be specified 2 Address specifying crossing over different devices The start address and end address can be specified crossing over different devices 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 5 Message Formats 5 Read clock data 6 command w out station No read clock data G command w station No The following shows an example of reading the clock data of GOT at station No 27 Assuming that the clock data of GOT has been set to 2004 June 1 18 46 49 Tuesday Time display 2004 06 01 18 46 49 TUE Item Message format format 14 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection format 1 STX CO station CR Request message host GOT format 15 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection format 2 STX CO Station No ETX Sum check is performed
27. Item Set value Read Data Direct Input to Object No Device DO Device Points 6 Header None Terminator CR Writing Byte Order Low High Fills a blank when Imported data is not filled in Writing Points Check Filling Data is available Filling Data Space 020 1 Keep consistency with the bar code reader setting Bar Code of GT Designer3 For the Bar Code setting in GT Designer3 refer to the following manual gt GT Designer3 GOT2000 Help 8 BAR CODE READER CONNECTION 8 4 System Configuration Examples Confirmation on PLC side Connect GX Developer to the QCPU Q mode and check if the data which has been read with the bar code reader are written in DO to D5 For the GX Developer operation method refer to the following manual gt GX Developer Version Operating Manual 1 Confirming the device values of DO to D5 when using GX Developer Version 8 Startup procedure GX Developer Online Monitor Device batch Device batch monitor 1 Device 00 Monitor format word Display 16bit integer Value DEC C Bit 32bit integer C Word Real number ASCII character Device r EDC 7654 0000 000 oooa 2 0011 0100 0011 0011 3433 0011 0110 0011 0101 3635 4 0011 1000 0011 0111 3837 D5 0010 0000 0011 1001 2039 D6 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ASCII codes are hexadecimals Spe
28. SD TXD gt RSB 8 i SD TXD 3 RD RXD CSA 4 i ER DTR 4 i RS RTS SG 5 gt SG ud Eo E 1 5 DR DSR y CS CTS 2 RS RTS 7 CS CTS je 5 POINT 9 RE ER DTR Tt The polarity A and in signal names may be reversed depending on the microcomputer to be used Example of the case where the DTR DSR signal is used Prepare a cable according to the microcomputer to be GOT side Host side used CD 1 ee SD TXD Precautions when preparing a cable SD TXD RD RXD 2 Cable length EDU E DR DSR The distance between the GOT and the PLC of 56 5 gt SG connection diagram 1 2 and 3 must be 1200 m or less ERIDTR The length of the RS 422 connection diagram 4 or RS RS RTS 7 RS RTS 422 connection diagram 5 must be 30m or less CS CTS CS CTS 3 GOT side connector 9 4 For the side connector refer to the following 57 1 4 1 GOT connector specifications Connecting terminating resistors Precautions when preparing a cable 1 GOT side 2 Cable length Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT The length of the RS 232 cable must be 15m or less main unit to Disable For the procedure to set the terminating resistor refer to the following 227
29. manual gt GT Designer3 GOT2000 Help Function Setting Use Video RGE Input Unit Type Name GT27 V4 2 GT27 V4R1 Z Video Window 1 Windows First Device 27770 7 Contents Device Video RGB Input Common Video RGB Transparent Color 0 65535 Clip X Position Y Position Width Height Video Window1 Size X Position Y Position 3 1 Select Common Peripheral Setting Video RGB Input from the menu 2 Set the interface to which the video RGB equipment is connected 3 Checkthe Use Video RGB Input to set the function For details on the function setting refer to the following manual 7 GT Designer3 GOT2000 Help 4 Clicking the detail setting button displays the Communication Detail Settings dialog box for each communication driver Make the settings according to the usage environment 257 11 4 2 Communication detail settings 2 E 2 2 9 a Click the OK button when settings are completed 11 5 Precautions Connecting to PC When connecting to a PC ground the earth wire of the PC 11 VIDEO RGB CONNECTION 11 9 11 5 Precautions 11 10 11 VDEO RGB CONNECTION 11 5 Precautions PRINTER CONNECTION 12 12 1 Connectable Model List 12 12 2 System
30. 13 5 13 4 2 Communication detail settings enm emnes 13 6 13 4 3 Installing and setting multimedia interaction tool onto personal computer 13 7 13 4 4 Setting the multimedia function eem eene 13 7 13 4 5 Set ihe gateway Tunctlon 13 7 13 5 PRECAUTIONS ec 13 8 14 RFID CONNECTION 14 4 Connectable Model 2 2 4 0 0 00000 000000600 a a 14 2 14 2 lt System Configuration cc baies edu 14 2 14 2 1 Gonriecting to etr RD Mr e eoe 14 2 14 3 5146 SOUNS ennn 8 Red 14 4 14 3 1 Setting communication 14 4 14 3 2 Communication detail 14 5 14 4 Precautions 14 6 12 15 WIRELESS LAN CONNECTION 15 4 System Configuration 15 2 15 1 1 Connecting to wireless nnn nennen 15 2 15 25 lt GOT Side Settlngs s erem tne been tei en b tede ad ende mtis 15 3 15 2 1 Setting communication interface Communication 15 3 15 2 2 Communication detail 0 15 3 15 2 3 wireless LAN I F 15 4 15 3
31. m 0000H 4 Before execution Sum check is performed in this range T T STX Command UO R Following 5 02 52H 57 03 43H 35 After execution 1 1 T T Address 1 0 1 0 0 0 31H 30H 30 30H Hy 9 n Data 1 0100 0 6 4 8 30H 36H 34H 38H Dj H Address 2 Data 2 M15 to 0 3 2 0 0 0 0 1 33H 32 30H 30H 30H 31H 0 9 0000000000000001 MMMMMMMMMMMMMMMM 1111119876543210 543210 Response message during normal communication host during faulty communication GOT host format 1 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection format 1 format 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection format 2 The above is a case where the sum check error 06H has occurred 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 5 Message Formats 5 Read clock data TR command The following shows an example of reading the clock data of GOT Assuming that the clock data of GOT has been set to 2004 June 1 18 46 49 Tuesday Time display 2004 06 01 18 46 49 TUE l
32. Error NAK code Response message during fault 9 y 15H 06H communication host The above is case where the sum check error 06H has occurred 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 21 3 4 Message Formats b When reading a bit device The following shows an example of reading the two points of the virtual devices MO to M31 Assuming 0 1 and 31 1 are stored M15 to 0 M31 to 6 Item Message format format 1 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection ASCII T T T Number of 2111 22 85 points R D 8 3 2 0 0 2 52H 44 38H 33H 32H 0 30H 32H Request message H L CH 10 0 host GOT format 2 GOT A900 Series microcomput er connection Binary Command Address bc R D 83H 20 02H Response message during normal communication GOT host format 1 GOT A900 Series microcompu er connection ASCII Data 1 M15 to 0 Data 2 M31 to 16 0 0 0 1 8 0 0 0 30H 30H 31H 38H 30H 30H Hy 20 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 MMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMM
33. Oe Request message host gt Data length target data format 9 QnA compatible 3E frame Binary Request T PLC Request Request monitoring Sub Subheader Network destination module No isis no data length timer command LE 2 12 I E u z E o 2 2 O 14 E 2 O o a 50 OOH 01 01H OOH OOH OOH OOH OOH OOH 01 19 OOH OOH Data length target data Continued to next page 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 63 3 4 Message Formats Item Message format From previous page Response message during normal communication GOT host format 8 QnA compatible 3E frame ASCII T T T T T Network Request destination im Subheader PHONO module VO No ___ ediestatonn Response data length D o 6 115911 olo o 1 2 e 44H 30H 30H 30 30H 31H 30H 31H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 31H 32H Q 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D Character B section 4 End code Year data Month data Day data Hour data Minute data second Bays 22444244444444444444444 4444444441444444444
34. module 1 No module station No 44H 30H 30H 30H 308 31 30H 31 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H H 1 10100 010 0 1 Response data length End code Response message i mr dde a pP during 30H 30H 30H 34 30H 30H 30H 30H communication W gt host gt Data length target data format 9 QnA compatible 3E frame Binary End code T Request T T PLC Request ination Ri Subheader Network No destination ena dala length No module I O No station No 2918 ENGIN DOH 00H 01H 01H OOH OOH OOH 02H OOH OOH OOH gt Data length target data Continued to next page LE 2 12 I E u z E o 2 2 O E 2 O o a 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 67 3 4 Message Formats From previous page Item Message format format 8 QnA compatible 3E frame ASCII T T T T n r Request T T Network Request destination Subheader No PECN module 10 No Response data length Following 44H 30H 30H 30 30H 31 30H 3148 30H 30H 30 30H 30H 30H 31H 36H 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 T T T T 1 1 Request Netw
35. XSCNO1 0 0 0065 9 055 055 02 55 0455 0310 S 06 oo 05 5 00 C OV 24V B20 XD00 A20 XD01 B19 XD02 A19 XD03 B18 XD04 18 XD05 B17 XD06 17 XD07 B16 XSCNO A16 XSCN1 B15 XSCN2 A15 XSCN3 B14 XSCN4 A14 XSCN5 B13 XSCN6 A13 XSCN7 Bi2 YDOO 54 12 1 B11 YDO2 A11 YDO3 B10 YD04 A10 YDO05 B9 YDO6 A9 YDO7 B8 YD08 A8 YDO9 B7 YDOA A7 YDOB B6 YDOC A6 YDOD B5 YDOE A5 YDOF B4 24V A4 24V B3 24V OV B2 OV A2 B1 A1 i o 1 1 O 11 C 13 15 F RAV 001 E 5 poo 5 peo peo peo1 HPT HPT HPT
36. eene 6 3 E aires EE 6 4 7 CONNECTION TO EXTERNAL I O DEVICE 7 1 Connectable Model 5 essen esent nennen 7 2 7 2 System Configuration n 24 8 edicere eta de dese cha dee d ede de ded 7 3 7 2 1 Connecting to the external 1 device enm eem rne 7 3 7 3 Connection Diagrami nes cete eee ecce ee tee Lande suey Le de vedo d 7 5 7 3 1 Connection cable between external I O unit and connector terminal block converter module iac mots iem iterat mmis rea 7 5 7 3 2 Connection diagram between connector terminal block converter module and user created original operation 2 1 01000000000 7 7 7 3 3 Connection cable between external I O unit and operation 7 11 TA GOT SIde Settings m rei eee te Cre reae eeu alter 7 14 7 4 1 Setting communication interface nnne nnns 7 14 7 5 Precautions nei dede eed es dived E o A eod E anid e a ee 7 15 8 BAR CODE READER CONNECTION 8 1 Conriectable Model List rine eres 8 2 8 2 System Configuration decet dete sade dete e aa Le de xe de bade dea teen 8 2 8 2 1
37. Data item name Format 8 Format 9 Device points Specifies the number of device data to be read written Setting range 1 to 40 When using random read write command When setting multiple bit accesses word accesses or double word accesses limit the total number of access points to within 64 points When using multiple block batch read write commands When setting multiple blocks limit the total number of points of all blocks to within 64 points Transmit the data notated in decimal converted to a 4 digit Transmit the data converted to a 4 digit binary code from the lower ASCII code from the upper digit two digits Year month day hour minute second and day of the week data Specifies year month day hour minute second and day of the week to be read set to the GOT clock data m Message format 1 Read clock data 1901 command Message format 2 Set clock data 0901 command Transmit the data notated in decimal converted to a 2 digit code from the upper digit Transmit the data converted to a 2 digit binary code End code Microcomputer side Appended to the response message from the microcomputer side If an error occurs at the microcomputer side the error code is displayed E m Error code list Transmit the data notated in hexadecimal converted to a 4 digit Transmit the data converted to a 4 digit binary code from the lower ASCII code from the uppe
38. E 2 a O Command lists for formats 7 to 10 QnA compatible 3C 4C frame Sub Max ber of point Command 3 Command name Description d SRL command processed Batch d 0401 00017 n Reads bit devices in 1 point units 64 points in bit units Reads bit devices in 16 point units 64 words 1024 points 0401 Batch sum ward units Reads word devices in 1 point units 64 points 1401 Bateh write Writes to bit devices in 1 point units 64 points in bit units i Writes to bit devices in 16 point units 64 words 1024 points 1401 Batch in worcyunits Writes to word devices in 1 point units 64 points Random read Reads multiple different bit devices in 16 point and 32 point units 64 words 1024 points 0403 0000 in word units Reads multiple different word devices in 1 point and 2 point units 64 points Random write A 1402 0001 Writes to multiple different bit devices in 1 point units 64 points in bit units Random write Writes to multiple different bit devices in 16 point and 32 point 3 64 words 1024 points 1402 0000 2 in word units Writes to multiple different word devices in 1 point and 2 point units 64 points Multiple block Reads multiple blocks A bit device 16 bits for 1 point or a word device 0406 0000 y M 27 64 points batch read 1 word for 1 point
39. Transmit the 2 digit ASCII code corresponding to the following device codes Device name Device code M M SM SM L 50 50 R R 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET Transmit the 2 digit binary code corresponding to the following device codes Device name Device code M 90H SM 91H L 92H A8H SD AQH R AFH Continued to next page 3 51 3 4 Message Formats LE 2 14 I E z E 2 2 O 14 E 2 O o a From previous page Contents Data item name Format 6 Format 7 Head device Specifies the head No of the device data to be read written For details of the device range that can be accessed refer to the following 3 3 Device Data Area Transmit the data notated in decimal converted to a 6 digit Transmit the data converted to a 6 digit binary code from the lower ASCII code from the upper digit two digits Device points Specifies the number of device data to be read written Setting range 1 to 40H When using random read write command When setting multiple bit accesses word accesses or double word accesses limit the total number of access points to within 64 points When using multiple block batch read write commands When setting multiple blocks limit the total number of points of all blocks to within 64 points Transmit the data notated in decimal converted to a 4 d
40. XSCNO1 005 0265 4 02 65 05 DO 0 9 gt 00 6 9 5 00 24V 20 XD00 A20 1 19 2 19 XD03 B18 XD04 18 5 B17 XD06 17 07 B16 XSCNO A16 XSCN1 B15 XSCN2 15 XSCN3 B14 XSCN4 14 XSCN5 B13 XSCN6 13 XSCN7 12 YDOO A6TBY54 E 12 YDO1 B11 YD02 11 YDO3 B10 YD04 A10 YDO5 B9 YDO6 A9 YDO7 B8 YD08 A8 09 B7 YDOA A7 YDOB B6 YDOC A6 YDOD B5 YDOE A5 YDOF B4 24V A4 24V re B3 24V OV B2 OV 2 zx N Az zx o 1 O C A 5 LC 1 zx zx 1 peo O 0
41. 1 The power supply of 24VDC must be applied for the external I O unit When the power supply of the external I O unit is stopped in the operation the operation panel becomes nonfunctional For using the operation panel again reset the GOT after supplying the power to the external 1 unit 2 When starting turn on the external power supply to the external I O unit and turn on the GOT When turning off the external power supply a system alarm occurs When a system alarm is generated input output cannot be performed In this case turn on the main power of the GOT or reset the GOT When bus connection is used the reset switch on the GOT does not function 7 4 7 CONNECTION EXTERNAL DEVICE 7 2 System Configuration 7 3 Connection Diagram 7 3 1 Connection cable between external I O unit and For GT15 DIOR connector terminal block Connection diagram 2 converter module External I O unit side Terminal block converter side 18 B20 XD00 The connection cable between the external I O unit and the XDO1 43 A20 XD01 connector terminal block converter module must be 19 B19 XD02 prepared by the user referring to the followings XDUS 44 A19 XD03 XD04 20 B1
42. 7 3 GOT2000 Series User s Manual Hardware When using a bus connection unit The installation position varies depending on the bus connection unit to be used 1 Wide bus units GT15 75QBUS 2 L GT15 75ABUS 2 L GT15 QBUS2 GT15 ABUS2 Install a bus connection unit in the 1st stage of the extension interface If a bus connection unit is installed in the 2nd stage or above the unit cannot be used Example Installing a bus connection unit and serial communication units Serial communication unit Bus connection unit Serial communication unit 2 Standard size bus connection unit GT15 QBUS and GT15 ABUS A bus connection unit can be installed in any position 1st to 3rd stage of the extension interface Example Installing a bus connection unit and serial communication units sS communication unit ue 1 14 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection When using MELSECNET H communication unit CC Link IE Controller Network communication unit or CC Link communication unit GT15 J61BT13 Install a MELSECNET H communication unit CC Link IE Controller Network communication unit or CC Link communication unit in the 1st stage of an extension interface If a bus connection unit is installed in the 2nd stage or above the unit cannot be used Example When installing a MELSECNET H communication unit and a serial communication unit Serial communication unit M
43. interrupt from device display write 6 Displays the receive packet structure of the interrupt receive packet GOT D21 packet When Output value receiving an Touch touch Sets the Interrupt data interrupt switch 1 to value of D13 requesting Intern upt switch to base the base screen 2 Notify to base 6 Screen the host by an 222 Screen 2 Switching interrupt from 1 to 2 When receiving Sets the Touch touch interrupt Interrupt switch 3 to state of the requesting receive Switch to base base screen the base packet 6 screen 1 Notify to base Screen the host by obs screen 1 switching interrupt from 2 to 1 End processing only when Close the port receiving an error response 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 77 2 7 System Configuration Examples 2 8 Device Range that Can Be Set The device ranges of controller that can be used for GOT are as follows Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the maximum values that can be set in GT Designer3 The device specifications of controllers may differ depending on the models even though belonging to the same series Please make the setting according to the specifications of the controller actually used When non existent device or a device number outside the range is set other objects with correct device settings may not be monitored Setting item r Bit CH1 Computer
44. o a 22 5 52 a GOT main part connector see from the front 1 5 6 9 9 pin D sub male RS 422 485 interface Use the following as the RS 422 485 interface and the RS 422 485 communication unit connector on the GOT For the GOT side of the connection cable use a connector and connector cover applicable to the GOT connector 1 Connector model GOT Connector type Connector model Manufacturer GT27 9 pin D sub female GT23 2 6 millimeter screw 17LE 13090 27 D2AC DDK Ltd fixed type GT15 RS4 9S 9 pin D sub female M2 6 millimeter screw 17LE 13090 27 D3AC DDK Ltd GT01 RS4 M fixed type GT15 RS4 TE SL SMT3 5 10 90F BOX 2 Connector pin arrangement GT27 GT15 RS4 9P GT01 RS4 M GOT main part connector see from the front 5 1 o 9 6 9 pin D sub female 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 41 1 4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection 1 4 2 Coaxial cableconnector connection method The following describes the method for connecting the BNC connector connector plug for coaxial cable and the cable NCAUTION Solder the coaxial cable connectors properly Insufficient soldering may result in malfunctions Components of the BNC connector Structure of the coaxial cable External conductor Outer sheath SY Nut Washer Gasket Insulating material Plug shell T Clamp Contact Internal conductor
45. o x host 06H Error code Response message during fault 9 T 15H communication GOT host The above is a case where the sum check error 06H has occurred 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 23 3 4 Message Formats b When writing to a bit device The following shows an example of writing 1 s to virtual devices MO and M31 Before execution After execution Item Message format format 1 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection ASCII Number Command Address of points Data 1 M15 to 0 Data 2 M31 to 16 8 3 2 0 0 2 0 0 1 8 0 0 0 57H 44H 38H 33H 32 0 30H 32 30H 30H 31 38H 30H 30H 30H 0j0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0000000000000001111000000000000000 MMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMM 11111198765432103322222222221111 543210 1098765432109876 Request message host GOT format 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection Binary T T D T 1 T Number ata Data 2 Command Address M15 to 0 M31 to 16 W D 20H 80 02H OOH 0
46. 010 0 0 A 9 e 05H 46H 38H 30H 30H 30H 30 30H 30H 41H 39H c D W D H L 4 Request message Sum check is performed in this range host host gt Character A section 5 Host o I Address No Command __Subeommand 17 0 0 1 9 0 110 0 0 o 31H 39H 30H 31H 30H 30H 30H 30H H D H D H 10 Example Format 7 QnA compatible 4C frame format 1 Frame ID Network Request destination Request destinati STX No Station No No PLC No medulla OE NO Se Stato Mn ETX Sum check F 010 0 0 Mens E E 02H 46H 38u 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30 30H 30H 03H 43H 43H 0 0 0 0 0 0 H 0 E during normal Sum check is performed in this range communicator Character B section host 4 gt Host Second Day of TN Address No Year data Month Day data Hour data Minute 0818 data week data 0 0 0 4 0 6 0 1 1 8 4 6 4 9 0 2 30 30H 34 30H 36H 30H 31H 31H 8 34H 36H 34H 39H 30H 32H D 1 D 0 D 18 D 0 D 9 D Continued to next page 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2
47. 192 168 8 39 E 2 a O LL 9 2 a o O 2 gt X O a a 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 25 1 6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 1 6 3 Confirming the communication state to each station Station monitoring function The station monitoring function detects the faults communication timeout of the stations monitored by the GOT When detecting the abnormal state it allocates the data for the faulty station to the GOT special register GS 1 No of faulty stations a Ethernet connection Except for Ethernet multiple connection Total No of the faulty CPU is stored Device b15 to b8 b7 to b0 GS230 00H fixed No of faulty stations b Ethernet multiple connection Total No of the faulty connected equipment is stored Channel Device b15 to b8 b7 to 50 Ch1 GS280 00H fixed No of faulty stations Ch2 GS300 00H fixed No of faulty stations Ch3 GS320 00H fixed No of faulty stations Ch4 GS340 00H fixed No of faulty stations When monitoring GS230 on Numerical Display When monitoring GS230 on Numerical Display check mask processing with data operation tab as the following For the data operation refer to the following manual gt GT Designer3 GOT2000 Help Numerical Display Data Operation tab Display Basic Settings Advanced Settings Device f Style Extended Trigger Only the setting of selected Operation T
48. 2 E during faulty No PLONo Rete TON Command Sub command communication ce nic m 221 2227 22 32 7 00 1 0202 0221 3220 4252 0205 8 10615 01203 ee Se 1 gt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 9 0 1 0 0 0 0 GOT host Z 30H 30 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30 30H 30 31H 39H 30H 31H 30H 30H 30H 30H o H 01 D bs format 7 4E frame Binary LLI T Request E Request Network PLC Request destination destination Response 59181 No Fixedvalue No No data length Following 1 04 00 OOH 00 OOH 01 01 OOH OOH OOH OBH OOH 8 x Data length target range 1 4 T Request i Network PLC Request destination destination Sub esit Enacode No No Command command 56H OOH 00 OOH OOH OOH OOH 01 19 OOH OOH 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 55 3 4 Message Formats 2 Set clock data 0901 command The following shows an example of setting the clock data of GOT Assuming the clock data of GOT is to be set to 2009 October 1 18 46 49 Thursday Time display 2009 10 01 18 46 49 THU After execution Item Message format
49. 7 14 122 PL oe wee 7 15 gt o J lt 2 na E gt lt E z E o 2 2 o 7 1 7 CONNECTION EXTERNAL DEVICE 7 1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models Series Clock Connectable GOT Refer to External device 737724 1 Varies with the connected type 7 2 7 CONNECTION EXTERNAL I O DEVICE 7 1 Connectable Model List 7 2 System Configuration 7 2 1 Connecting to the external I O device When inputting and outputting Extended function OS us External I O Operation panel 5009090999 Connection cable 1 5509095899 Connection cable 2 Connection cable 1 DC power supply gt Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 GOT Connector terminal block converter Connection diagram eua Connection diagram Name ud module Option device Model z number number 34 223 Connection A6TBY36 E 4 i Connection diagram 3 General input device diagram 3 ere Connection GT15 DIO m Push button etc 087 6 54 diagram 1 GT diagram 4 Connection diagram 4 27 Operation panel AGTBY36 E Connection diagram 5 General output devi
50. Clock data second o System gt 15 b8 b7 0 v 2d D9 A A Data of seconds 00 to 59 stored as 2 digit BCD gt n Unused Clock data day of week 8 15 b8 b7 bO ra v zx v 510 Day of week data stored 2 digit BCD 00 Sunday 01 Monday 02 Tuesday 03 Wednesday 04 Thursday 05 Friday 06 Saturday Unused D11 D12 Unused Continued to next page 1 If a wrong day of the week is set by the clock data setting commands the clock data will differ from the time displayed on the utility Example When October 1 2009 Tuesday is set by the clock data setting command the actual day of the week is Thursday 02 is stored to D10 although Thursday THU will be displayed on the utility time display 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 5 3 3 Device Data Area From previous page Address Description Set side Interrupt output When data are written to D13 and 014 from a GOT touch switch for example the data of D13 and D14 are transmitted interrupt output to the host side The data amount number of bytes to be interrupt output is set at Interrupt Data Byte in Communication Detail Settings CS 3 5 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings 13 Output value when 1 is set to Interrupt Data Byte in Communication Detail Settings D13 Lower 8 bits 1 byte Output value when 2 is set to Interru
51. Enable d File Nam ER MMR Save To Server Save User Alarm Log Fie to File Server S 1 Select Common Controller Setting from the 5 menu 1 Select Common Peripheral Setting 7 n Multimedia from the menu o 2 The Controller Setting window is displayed Select the channel to be used from the list menu 2 Setthe interface to which the multimedia controller is connected 3 Set Manufacturer Controller Type I F and Driver o according to the connected equipment to be used 3 Checkthe Enable the setting of Multimedia to set the lt 4 The detailed setting l aier function For details on the communication settings refer to the following manual Controller Type I F and Driver are set Make the settings according to the usage 7 GT Designer3 GOT2000 Help z environment 4 Clicking the detail setting button displays the Communication Detail Settings dialog box for each Click the OK button when settings are completed communication driver Make the settings according to the usage environment POINT gt 13 4 2 Communication detail settings The settings of connecting equipment can be set and Click the OK button when settings are completed confirmed in I F Communication Setting For details refer to the following 57 1 1 2 I F communication setting 13 MULTIMEDIA CONNECTION 13 5 13 4 GOT Side
52. The following provides the specifications the connectors and creation method of the coaxial cable to connect the GOT to the video output equipment Connection diagram Coaxial connection diagram 1 Displaying video image on GOT Video camera vision sensor side side 750 drohmcoaxial Cable specification Specifications Applicable cable 3C 2V 5C 2V JIS 3501 compliant Connecting the BNC connector to the coaxial cable For how to connect the BNC connector and coaxial cable refer to the following 1 4 2 Coaxial cableconnector connection method Precautions when preparing a cable 1 Cable length The cable length differs depending on the specification of the video camera or vision sensor to be used Create a cable under the specifications of the video camera vision sensor 2 GOT side connector Use the following as the video input unit connector For the GOT side connector of the coaxial cable use the ones compatible with the GOT connector GOT Connector Connector model type GT27 V4 Z 227161 4 BNC Tyco International Ltd 3 Video camera vision sensor side connector Use a connector compatible with the video camera vision sensor to be used Manufacturer GT27 V4R1 Z 11 6 11 VIDEO RGB CONNECTION 11 3 Connection Diagram __ When the coaxial cable is long When the coaxial cable is long video signals ar
53. o Select Common Peripheral Setting PC ul Ano Remote Operation from the menu 2 Set Connecting of PC Remote Operation to Disconnect 2 2 3 Checkthe Use PC Remote Operation Ethernet of 1 Select Common Controller Setting from the inani PC Remote Operation Ethernet to set For details on the settings refer to the following manual 2 The Controller Setting window is displayed Select the C gt gt GT Designer3 GOT2000 Help channel to be used from the list menu Click the OK button when settings are completed 3 Set Manufacturer Controller Type I F and Driver 9 3 3 Install and setting the required according to the connected equipment to be used software 4 The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer Controller Type I F and Driver are set Make the settings according to the usage environment Install and set the required software according to the system configuration For the settings refer to the following manual 57 GT Designer3 GOT2000 Help COO 9 3 4 Precautions The settings of connecting equipment can be set and Click the OK button when settings are completed confirmed Communication Setting For details Ethernet system driver refer to the following Before using the PC remote operation function 297 1 1 2 I F communication setting Ethernet install an Ethernet system com
54. 57 3 4 2 List of commands LE 2 a I LE z E o 2 2 O 14 E 2 O o x 2 Address Specifies the head No of the device data to be read written The address notated in hexadecimal is converted to a 4 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted from the upper digit For details of the device range that can be accessed refer to the following gt 3 3 Device Data Area 3 Number of points Specifies the number of device data to be read written Setting range 1 to 40H The address notated in hexadecimal is converted to a 4 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted from the upper digit 4 Error code This is the response message at faulty communication appended with error contents The address notated in hexadecimal is converted to a 2 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted from the upper digit For details of error codes generated in format 5 Digital Electronics Corporation s memory link method refer to the following 73 m Error code list 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 45 3 4 Message Formats When connecting a microcomputer etc that uses the protocol of the Digital Electronics Corporation s memory link method with the GOT When connecting a microcomputer etc that uses the protocol of the Digital Electronics Corporation s memory link method with the GOT correct the commands to be used and the device ranges to match the specifications of the GOT 3 MICROCOMPUTER
55. e p201 0201 001 4 1 e peo1 ejr Load Lamp relay etc DC24V 7 8 7 CONNECTION TO EXTERNAL I O DEVICE 7 3 Connection Diagram For GT15 DIOR Connection diagram 5 When using A6TBY36 E connector terminal block module User created original operation panel 00 XD01 XD02 004 XD05 XDO6 XD07 70 50 9 105 60 61 62 63 po o e 00500 9 P poo 56 poo 51 5 Baas 53 5 40 0 0 4 4 3 30 0 33 206 21 1 205 23 10 1 11 1 4 13 1 02 15 03 5 2900 9 4790 790 299 241 ov B20 XD00 20 XD01 B19 XD02 A19 XD03 18 XD04 A18 XD05 B17 XD06 17 07 B16 XSCNO 16 XSCN1 B15 XSCN2 A15 XSCN3 B14 5 4 14 XSCN5 B13 XSCN6 A13 XSCN7 Bi2 YDOO A6TBY36 E 12 1 B11 YDO2 11 YDO3 B10 YD04 10 YD05 B9 YD06 A9 YDO7 B8 YD08 A8 YDO9 B7 YDOA A7 YDOB B6 YDOC A6 YDOD B5 YDOE A5 YDOF B4 24V A4 24V B3 24V OV B2 OV A2 B1 A1
56. lt lt QCPU 0 mode Read data Terminator 1 2 3 4 5 8 7 8 9 CR 318 320 33H 34H 35H 36H 7 38d 39H 1 The and QCPU mode are connected through a bus For bus connection refer to the following manual GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Mitsubishi Products for GT Works3 1 The bar code is read with the bar code reader 57 m Bar code reader setting 2 The receives the data sent from the bar code reader m Setting of Controller Setting of GT Designer3 3 The received data are written to the PLC CPU 57 m Setting of Bar Code of GT Designer3 4 The data read with the bar code reader are written into the PLC CPU devices m Confirmation on PLC side Bar code reader setting The bar code reader shall be configured as shown below Item Set value Transmission Speed 9600bps Data Bit 8bit Stop Bit 1bit Parity Even Header None Terminator CR Bar code reader setting For the bar code reader setting refer to the following manual User s Manual of the bar code reader Setting of Controller Setting of GT Designer3 1 Controller setting I F Communication Setting mcum CH No Driver RS422 485 1 Q L QnA A CPU 07124 27104 _ petai setting JF2 85232 Barcode z Detail Setting USB 9 Host PC Ethemet 0 z None x Detail setting 85232
57. o ca 02H ODH 02 03 Response message H L during normal p gt communication Sum check is performed in this range GOT host 2 During processing of write commands Response message during faulty communication GOT host Output During interrupt output 1 Set the number of interrupt data bytes at Detail setting in GT Designer3 For the setting of the number of interrupt data bytes refer to the following cS 2 6 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 59 2 5 Message Formats Details of data items in message format Data code during communication Communication is performed in ASCII code excluding interrupt output 1 Control codes Symbol ASCII code Description STX 02 Start of Text start marker of message frame ETX 03 End of Text end marker of message frame EOT 04H End of Transmission ENQ 05H Enquiry start of enquiry NAK 15H Negative ACK error response ACK Acknowledge write completion response LF OAH Line Feed CL OCH Clear CR Carriage Return Command Specifies the contents to access from the host to GOT The command is converted to a 1 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted For details of the commands that can be used refer to the following 2 5 2 List of commands Station No Station No is used to identify the GOT with which the host communicates Setting
58. 2 Setthe interface to which the bar code reader is connected 3 Checkthe Use Bar Code to set the function For details on the function setting refer to the following manual GT Designer3 GOT2000 Help 4 Clicking the detail setting button displays the Communication Detail Settings dialog box for each communication driver Make the settings according to the usage environment 57 8 3 2 Communication detail settings Click the OK button when settings are completed 1 Communication interface setting When Channel No 8 is used the following external devices which use Channel No 8 cannot be connected at the same time RFID controller that uses the external authentication RFID controller that requires the power supply When connecting the above mentioned devices at the same time set Bar Code to Channels No 5 to 7 2 Setting for the driver To Channels No 5 to 8 multiple Bar Code cannot be set 8 BAR CODE READER CONNECTION 8 3 8 3 GOT Side Settings z E 2 2 Q Q a 8 3 2 Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment n Detail Setting Item Description Range 4 Set this item when change the 2 224 transmission speed used for PS Transmission 19200bps communication with the connected Speed 38400bps 9600bps adus gi i P 1152
59. 2 2 E 2 a D 2 Set clock data M command The following shows an example of setting the clock data of GOT Assuming the clock data of GOT is to be set to 2004 June 1 18 46 49 Tuesday Time display 2004 06 01 18 46 49 TUE After execution Message format Item Example Format 13 Digital Electronics Corporation s memory link method extended mode ASCII code 1 n Digital compatible signal GS580 to GS583 OFF Partly compatible i Sum ENQ Station No ESC oma Check CR LF 0 0 Following 9 A 5 30H 1 4DH 39H 41H OAH H L H L 4 Sum check is performed in this range Year data Month data Day data Hour data Minute data Second data 06 0 4 0 6 0 1 1 8 4 6 4 9 0 2 34 30H 36H 30H 31H 31H 38H 34H 36H 34H 39H 30H 32H H E H D H D D H L H L H L Request message host gt Digital compatible signal GS580 to GS583 ON Fully compatible Sum Station No ESC Check CR LF 0 0 M Following 9 5 05 30H 30H 1 4DH 39H 35H OAH H L H L 4 gt Sum check is performed in this range 1 T
60. 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 35 2 5 Message Formats Interrupt output e To disable the interrupt output turn ON 5 52 interrupt code output disable flag 7 5 2 4 6 SM devices To enable the interrupt output set 8 bits to the data length at Communication Detail Settings 2 9 2 6 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings When 7 bits is set the MSB 8th bit is ignored Example FFH gt 7 Error code list In the case of format 2 GOT A900 series microcomputer connection format 2 the error contents error code are appended to the response message during faulty communication The following shows error code error contents cause and measures Error code Description Action Sum check error 06H The sum check code created from received data differs Review the contents of the message to transmit from the sum check code in the receive data Review the contents of the message to transmit 10 Command error Check the commands in the message An unsupported command was used Message length error 11H The upper limit of the data length that can be received by the GOT has been exceeded 2 5 2 List of commands Review the contents of the message to transmit Check the data length of the message data length of the data section etc Communication message error 12H EXT was not found within the upper limit of the receive buffer Check the communication cable
61. DS refer to the following i 57 1 1 2 I F communication setting 3 69 LE 2 T E u z E 2 2 O E 2 O o x 3 5 3 Ethernet settings Item Description Range Set whether or not to perform Living Confirmation a living confirmation Yes No Default No Ethernet Setting Living Confirmation Set the sampling to perform 9 GOT Ethernet setting the GOT living confirmation 10 to 100s This setting is shared by other Ethernet driver settings Default 20s 2 For the interrupt output select TCP IP GOT IP Address 192 168 3 18 3 Select Yes only when Protocol is TCP IP 4 setting value can be changed when the Living Confirmation is Yes 1 Special Interrupt Code The following shows the compatibility between the special interrupt codes and the event types Special Interrupt Code Event type Hex Base Screen and Overlap Window 1 Output when the screens are switched according to the change in the switching device values assigned to 1 2 1 Base Screen or Overlap Window 1 2 switches 20H independently without being interlocked Example of output When all the switching device values assigned to the Base Screen and Overlap Window1 2 are changed 3 special interrupt codes are output 21H Output when Numerical ASCII Input is completed 22H Output when Recipe data
62. Station No is used to identify the with which the host communicates Setting range 0 to 31 The address notated in decimal is converted to a 2 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted from the upper digit The GOT processes only commands whose station No matches the Host Address 0 to 31 set at Communication Detail Settings The message of command whose station No does not match is ignored For setting method of Communication Detail Settings refer to the following 257 2 6 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings 3 Command Specifies the contents to access from the host to GOT The command is converted to a 2 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted from the upper digit For details of the commands that can be used refer to the following 57 2 5 2 List of commands 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 37 2 5 Message Formats POINT Address Specifies the head No of the device data to be read written The data annotated in decimal is converted to a 5 or 7 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted from the upper digit For details of the device range that can be accessed refer to the following 57 24 Device Data Area Number of points Specifies the number of device data to be read written Setting range 1 to 40H The address notated in hexadecimal is converted to a 2 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted from the upper digit Year month day hour minute second and day of the wee
63. le Data length target data T T T T T Command Sub command Response message 3 P 4 1 1 9 0 1 0 0 0 0 during faulty communication 31H 39H 30H 31 30H 30H 30H 30H GOT host Dom Data length target data format 9 QnA compatible 3E frame Binary LE 2 12 I E E z E o 2 2 O 14 E 2 O o x 8 ader PLC Bequest ubheader dui 21150 module VO data length Following 1 DOH OOH 01 01H OOH OOH 00H OBH OOH 1 PLC Request Request 5 ib End code destination Sito Command Ho j module siation No command 56H OOH OOH OOH OOH OOH OOH 01H 19H OOH OOH Data length target data 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 65 3 4 Message Formats 2 Set clock data 0901 command The following shows an example of setting the clock data of GOT Assuming the clock data of GOT is to be set to 2009 October 1 18 46 49 Thursday Time display 2009 10 01 18 46 49 THU After execution Item Message format format 8 QnA compatible 3E frame ASCII T T Network Request destination Subheader RECN module O No __ mosie statin No Following 5 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 35H 30 30H 30 30H 31 30H 34 30H
64. of GS570 is 1 the function code OF is not used and therefore the setting of GS575 will be disabled 0 100 Function Code 10 1 to 123 Specify the maximum number GS576 Specification for the max number of Other than above 123 multiple holding register write times When Bit1 of GS570 is 1 the function code 10F is not used and therefore the setting of GS576 will be disabled b When configuring individual communication settings for specific channel numbers The table below shows the settings for the GS device GS device Description Set value Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 0 Using Function Code 1 Not using Function Code OF 0 Using Function Code 10 1 Not using Function Code 10 GS590 GS597 GS604 GS611 Command selection Function Code 01 0 2000 GS591 GS598 GS605 GS612 Specification for the max number of 1 to 2000 Specify the maximum number read times Other than above 2000 Function Code 02 0 2000 65592 65599 GS606 GS613 Specification for the max number of 1 to 2000 Specify the maximum number input relay read times Other than above 2000 Function Code 03 0 125 GS593 GS600 GS607 GS614 Specification for the max number of 1 to 125 Specify the maximum number holding register read times Other than above 125 Function Code 04 0 125 GS594 GS601 GS608 GS615 Specification for the max number of 1 to 1
65. 0 CH2 None Manufacturer MITSUBISHI CH3 None CH4 None Controller Type MELSEC Q QS Q17nD M NC DR CRnD 700 Network Duplex Settir please set the Ethernet Setting of the Controller with a list of lower scree Er Routing Informatio 8 5 Gateway M p Communication Gateway Serve Driver Ethernet MELSEC Q17nNC CRnD 700 Gateway a Cient Detail setting Pod FTP Server Fg File Transfer F iiy Q Redundant 9 Station No Switch GOT Ethernet Setting GOT Ethernet Setting 192 168 3 18 GOT Communication Port No 5001 3 3 3 0 Ethernet Setting se Address 192 168 3 39 Unit Type QnUD P V QnUDEH 4 Item Description Use CH Select this item when setting the channel No 2 to No 4 Manufacturer Select the manufacturer of the equipment to be connected to the GOT Select the type of the equipment to be connected to the GOT For the settings refer to the following e 2 Setting Controller Type UF Select the interface of the GOT to which the equipment is connected For the settings refer to the following CF 3 Setting VF Select the communication driver to be written to the For the settings refer to the following ui 5 1 Setting Driver Detail Setting Make settings for the transmission speed and data length of the
66. 12H 2 31H 04H Continued to next page 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 4 Message Formats From previous page Item Message format format 6 4E frame ASCII T Response type Serial No Fixed value oo PLC No D 4 010 ofo 0 0 1 0 1 Following 44H 34 30H 30H 30 30H 30H 30 30 30H 31 30H 31H D 21 T T T T T Response message getan Response data length Endcode duringnormal 4 5 3 ed e e ee in en communication 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 GOT host 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 34 30H 30H 30H 30H H D D 1 1 0 0 format 7 4 frame Binary Data length target range 4 T T T T T T Request Network PLC Request destination dion Response type Serial No Fixed value wo No module I O No mode data length End code 04 00 OOH OOH OOH 00 01 01 OOH OOH OOH 02H OOH OOH OOH Continued to next page LE 2 12 I E E z E o 2 2 O E 2 O o x 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 57 3 4 Message Formats Item Message format From previous page Response message during faulty communicat
67. 14 RFID CONNECTION suse Ren mnn xx e 14 1 15 WIRELESS LAN 15 1 9 CONNECTION TO SOUND OUTPUT UNIT 6 1 Connectable 51 6 2 6 2 System 6 2 6 3 GOT Side 5 6 3 6 4 Precautions 6 4 Z 2 E 2 n E 2 a 2 2 o E Z E o 2 Z O 6 CONNECTION SOUND OUTPUT UNIT 6 1 Connectable Model List For applicable speakers refer to the following Technical News List of valid devices applicable for GOT2000 series GOT A 0064 6 2 System Configuration 6 2 1 Connecting to sound output unit Communication driver Extended function OS Sound output PME type Connection cable Varies according to Varies according to the speaker s specifications the connection type Speaker GOT Number of Connection cable connectable Model name Option device Model equipment For the system For applicable speakers refer to the following Technical News 27 configuration 1 speaker for 1 GT15 SOUT between the GOT List of valid devices applicable for GOT2000 series GOT A 0064 and PLC referto CO each chapter System configuration between the
68. Default blank MODBUS TCP MODBUS TCP Type fixed fixed Set the IP address of the PLC side IP IP Address connected Ethernet module Default blank Port No 502 fixed 502 fixed Communication TCP fixed format 1 Select MODBUS TCP for Controller Type For the applicable Ethernet module refer to the following 7 5 2 System Configuration 5 MODBUS R TCP CONNECTION 5 3 GOT Side Settings Changing the host with GOT module The host can be changed by the GOT module Utility For details of settings refer to the following gt GOT2000 Series User s Manual Utility Communicat ion 54 MODBUS R TCP Equipment Setting For details of the MODBUS TCP equipment refer to the manual of MODBUS RTU equipment to be used 5 5 Device Range that Can Be Set The device ranges of controller that can be used for GOT are as follows Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the maximum values that can be set in GT Designer3 The device specifications of controllers may differ depending on the models even though belonging to the same series Please make the setting according to the specifications of the controller actually used When a non existent device or a device number outside the range is set other objects with correct device settings may not be monitored Setting item Bit 1 MODBU
69. Device M s s 2 PERE E D E F Information Kind Range Device 0 2047 Cancel Device Set the device name device number and bit number The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit of word device Description Information Displays the device type and setting range which are selected in Device Device name Setting range Device No representation Internal relay M MO to M2047 Special relay SM SMO to SM63 Decimal Latch relay 1 LO to L2047 Word device bit Specified bit of the following word devices 5 Data register D DO to D4095 9 2 Link special register SD SDO to SD15 Decimal 5 File register RO to R4095 Bit device word Converting bit devices into word 2 8 Device Range that Can Be Set 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 9 Precautions GOT clock control The settings of time adjusting or time broadcast made on the GOT will be disabled on the PLC Use the dedicated commands to set or read out the clock data of microcomputer lt mA 12 2 E 2 2 E 5 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 79 2 9 Precautions 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 9 Precautions MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 1 Microcomputer connection Ethe
70. Device 1 CPU monitoring timer Command Sub command cade Start Device Device points 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 1 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 2 30 30 30H 34H 31 30H 30H 30 44H 2 30H 30H 30H 31H 30H 30H 30H 32H H 0 09 0 0 0 0 0 0 Q L Data length target data Format 9 QnA compatible 3E frame Binary T T Request T T T T T T Network PLC Request destination Request CPU Sub Devi Subheader AP No destination inode data length monitoring timer Command 2 02 Start Device 40 Device points 50 00H 01H 01 OOH OOH OOH OOH OOH 00 01H 04 OOH OOH 64 OOH 00 8 02 00H kK Data length target data Details of data items in message format Data code during communication Communication of format 8 is performed in ASCII code Communication of the format 9 is performed in Binary code 3 60 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 4 Message Formats The following table shows the contents of the data items Contents Data item name Format 8 Format 9 Subheader Indicates it is a command message Microcomputer side Command message ASCII 5000 Fixed value Command message 50H Upper digit Fixed value Subheader Indicates it is a response message GOT side Response message ASCII D000 Fixed value Response message DOH Upper digit Fixed value Set the same
71. Hi 9 Metsec o as q17nb M NG DR CRnD 700 Gateway Standard 1 F RS422 485 ti posceret 2 CPU 0271624 1271024 FTP Server E 4 Transfer F Value San P Transmission Speed BPS 115200 Retry Times Timeout Time Sec Set the video input signal Delay Time ms Video Input Signal Default NTSC NTSC PAL 5 Video Resoluti Set the video resolution 2 5 ideo Resolution Default 640 x 480 768 576 z 1 When NTSC format is selected the resolution is fixed to z 640 x 480 e POINT 5 moe 1 Communication interface setting When Channel 8 is used the following external a devices which use Channel No 8 cannot be B 1 Select Common Controller Setting from the connected at the same time RFID controller that uses the external menu dh authentication 2 The Controller Setting window is displayed Select the nd RFID controller thatireguire channel to be used from the list menu When connecting the above mentioned devices at the same time set PC Remote Operation to 2 Set Manufacturer Controller Type I F and Driver Channels No 5 to 7 according to the connected equipment to be used 2 Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be 4 The detailed setting is displayed after Manufac
72. MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL GOT2000 series Connection Manual Microcomputer MODBUS Products Peripherals For GT Works3 Version1 NE 0 C4 2 0 ANNMKRENN CONNECTION aVNC R SERVER CONNECTION aMODBUS RTU CONNECTION aVIDEO RGB CONNECTION ms MODBUS TCP CONNECTION gPRINTER CONNECTION TO SOUND OUTPUT se MULTIMEDIA CONNECTION UNIT aRFID CONNECTION TO EXTERNAL I O aWIRELESS LAN CONNECTION DEVICE CODE READER CONNECTION PERSONAL COMPUTER OPERATION CONNECTION SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Always read these precautions before using this equipment Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this product In this manual the safety precautions are ranked as WARNING and CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions WARNING resulting in death or severe injury j Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions CAUTION resulting in medium or slight personal injury or physical damage Note that the N caution level may lead to a serious accident according to the circumstances Always follow the instructions of both levels because they are important to perso
73. Model name Model Cable model segment P distance Interface 1 Interface 2 9 as 5 equipment length Ethernet Twisted pair cable Interface 10BASE T Built into GOT Shielded twisted 3j pair cable STP or To be 4580 Coaxial 27 unshielded twisted 1 multimedia NTSC 9 33 selected 4 connection 1 GT27 MMR Z pair cable UTP 100m controller for IPAL by the diagram 1 Category 3 4 and 5 1GOT 8 GT27M MMR Z 100 5 user Shielded twisted pair cable STP Category 5 and 5e 1 The cable length differs depending on the specification of the video camera used by the user 2 destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system Connect to the Ethernet module hub transceiver wireless LAN adapter NZ2WL JPA or NZ2WL JPS or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network system Use cables connectors and hubs that meet the IEEE802 3 10BASE T 100BASE TX standards For the controllers that can be connected to the wireless LAN adapters and how to set the wireless LAN adapter refer to the manual of the wireless LAN adapter used 3 For the CF card to be inserted into the multimedia unit refer to the following Type of CF card that can be inserted List of valid devices applicable for GOT2000 series GOT D 0064 Precautions for using the CF card lt gt 134 GOT Side Settings 4
74. Normal 1 Error b15 b8 b7 b6 55 b4 b3 0 Sa 2 NT A A Unused D3 SIO framing error SIO parity error SIO overrun error Communication timeout error Unused b4 to 6 turn ON when an SIO error occurs and turn OFF when an request message from the host is received successfully after the error occurrence b7 turns ON about 3 seconds after the host side DTR becomes OFF and turns OFF when transmission is performed successfully to the host after the error occurrence Clock data year b15 1 b8 b7 50 System 4 Lower 2 digits of calendar year stored as 2 digit BCD Unused Clock data month b15 b8 b7 bO v 5 Data of months 01 to 12 stored as 2 digit BCD Unused Clock data day b15 b8 b7 0 ee 6 Data of days 01 to 31 stored as 2 digit BCD Unused 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 3 Device Data Area Continued to next page From previous page Address Description Set side Clock data hour b15 b8 b7 bO I E 7 of hours 00 to 23 stored as 2 digit BCD Unused Clock data minute m b15 b8 b7 bO z i 08 n X Data of minutes 00 to 59 stored as 2 digit BCD gt Unused
75. OF XDOD 6 04 5594 6 04 6 64 6 6 04 6 4 6 04 lt 00 XDOE 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 9 O1 9 OF 9 OF OF OF 9 9119 04 OF XDOF XSCNOO e a XSCNO01 XSCNO2 XSCNO3 XSCN04 5 05 XSCNO6 XSCNO7 2 L The 128 point input can be executed with using a 16 point input signal 00 to with an 8 point scan signal XSCNOO to XSCNO7 2 When two or more switches are pressed simultaneously be sure to put the diode to each switch Only for 128 point input Connector specifications 24VDC power supply Any connector 3 selected by the user 1 2 4 I I i No Name Model name Manufacturer PCR E50FS GT15 DIO 1 Connector PCS E50FS Honda Tsushin Kogyo GT15 DIOR Co Ltd t 2 PCS E50LA cover UL 2464 AWG28 3 Cable ul 2 equivalent Cable for 4 connecting UL 1007 AWG24 or external input equivalent power supply Precautions when preparing a cable 1 Cable length Maximum cable length differs depending on the cable used Make the cable length within the range that can satisfy the I O specifications of the external I O unit 2 GOT side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following gt 1 4 1 connector specifications gt a lt 2 2 E E z 9 E O 2 2
76. SERIAL 2 4 Device Data Area Formats 3 to 6 Formats 7 to 10 Formats 11 to 13 Formats 14 15 2 When reusing GOT900 Series project data GOT A900 Series virtual devices DO to 2047 Can be used as they are without changing the assignments GOT F900 Series virtual devices Since some of the assigned virtual device values differ as indicated below change the assignment using device batch edit of GT Designer3 Refer to the following manual for device batch edit of GT Designer3 3 GT Designer3 GOT2000 Help GOT 1000 Series virtual devices GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection A compatible 1C frame QnA compatible 3C 4C frame Digital Electronics Corporation s memory link method GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection GOT F900 Series virtual devices DO to 2047 02048 to 4095 RO to 4095 DO to 4095 LO to 2047 MO to 2047 MO to 2047 D8000 to 8015 500 to 15 GDO to 6 SMO to 63 8000 to 8063 3 Access to SD3 to 9 can also be made by the specification of the addresses 3000 to 000 of to 6 on the GOT F900 Series Values of virtual devices inside the GOT When the GOT is turned OFF or reset values are cleared to their defaults bit devices OFF word devices 0 Values are held in the memory when project data are written to the GOT 24 1 D devices The D devices are word devices into which GOT communication errors clock data or other information are
77. T Day of Year data Month data Day data Hour data Minute data Second data week data 0 4 0 6 0 1 1 8 4 6 4 9 0 2 30H 34 30H 36H 30H 31H 31H 38 34H 36H 34H 9 30H 32H H L H L H D H D H L H D Example Format 13 Digital Electronics Corporation s memory link method extended mode ASCII code 1 n Response message ACK Station No CR LF during normal communication 0 0 host 30H 30H OAH H L Continued to next page 2 54 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 5 Message Formats From previous page Item Message format Example Format 13 Digital Electronics Corporation s memory link method extended mode ASCII code 1 n NAK Station No Error code CR LF Response message during faulty 0 0 0 6 communication 15H 30H 30H 30H 36H OAH host H L H L The above is a case where the sum check error 06H has occurred When a wrong day of the week has been set by the clock data setting command If a wrong day of the week is set by the clock data setting commands the clock data will differ from the time displayed on the utility Example When June 1 2004 Thursday is set by the clock data setting command the actual day of week is Tuesday Tuesday TUE will be displayed on the utility t
78. inii dotted Manse ed ah een tae eens 1 22 1 6 2 Confirming the communication state on the GOT side For Ethernet connection 1 24 1 6 3 Confirming the communication state to each station Station monitoring function 1 26 1 6 4 Checkon oet debeo Ee 1 28 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 1 Microcomputer Connection 2 2 2 2 System Configuration oido meteo dee eee e en ee de s 2 4 2 2 1 For the microcomputer connection 1 emm 2 4 2 3 iConnectior ipto b ae D nete cia bas cn e lade 2 5 24 2 5 2 6 2 7 2 8 2 9 2 31 R9 232 cable etd euet 2 5 2 9 2 ROA cable c ot LEE b HAE e fob e 2 5 Device Data Area ied treu c eee ett t aee qb tet tente 2 6 2 4 1 D devieess cdd eres Oe Me EE a 2 7 2 42 Ride VICOS om 2 11 21453 LE AGOVICES LE 2 12 2 4 1 M deVIC6S 2 13 24 52 SB devices s oe ea eed dig tata Gea a 2 14 2 4 6 devices o eed e rie Fe se carte OR 2 17 Message Formats tenca ee EE D E ed 2 19 2 5 1 Data format type and 2 19 2 5 27 Listo commands cine itti
79. refer to each chapter L gt Mitsubishi Products Non Mitsubishi Products 1 Non Mitsubishi Products 2 Microcomputer MODBUS Products Peripherals 9 8 9 PC REMOTE CONNECTION 9 3 Ethernet Connection 9 3 2 Side Settings Settings for the PC remote operation Setting communication interface Communication settings 3 Set the channel of the equipment to be connected to Remote Operation GOT PC Remote Operation Ethernet Setting of the following items are required for the use of PC Remote Operation Ethernet 2 Setting of Ethernet driver Setting of a switch special function License registration in GOT B V Use PC Remote Operation Ethernet CH1 MELSEC Q QS Q 3 pue Manufacturer as system window wil be used for CH4 None Controller Type MELSEC Q QS Q17nD M NC DR CRnD 700 X Mouse Cursor Display GOT and server Routing Informatio 3 d 3 Gok Gateway VF Standard 1 F RS422 485 GOT Only Serve a etal setting FTP Server PC Remote Operation Serial E 4 5 Setting of RGB Input is required for the of PC Remote Operation Serial Delay Time ms 0 Hope Cx 5 2 2 2 1
80. the number of the maximum connectable units on the MODBUS RTU equipment side will apply 4 MODBUS R RTU CONNECTION 4 3 4 2 System Configuration 4 3 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the PLC 4 3 1 RS 232 cable Connection diagram 1 RS 232 connection diagram 1 GOT side MODBUS equipment side RD RXD SD TXD TxD RxD SG 22 0 Oc RO NM 1 Some MODBUS RTU equipment require the control line CS RS etc to be controlled Make sure to connect the cables and wires as described in the MODBUS RTU equipment manual Precautions when preparing a cable 2 Cable length The length of the RS 232 cable must be 15m or less 3 GOT side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following 257 14 1 connector specifications 4 MODBUS equipment side connector Use the connector compatible with the MODBUS RTU equipment side module For details refer to the MODBUS RTU equipment user s manual 4 4 4 MODBUS R RTU CONNECTION 4 3 Connection Diagram 4 3 2 RS 422 485 cable The following shows the connection diagrams and connector specifications of the RS 422 485 cable used for connecting the GOT to a PLC 1 RS 422 485 cable 1 2 pair wiring 1 Some MODBUS RTU equipment doesn t have SG I
81. w out station No Reads word devices in byte units 255bytes 127 points i Batch read Reads bit devices in byte units 255bytes 2040 points w station No Reads word devices in byte units 255bytes 127 points 2s Batch write Writes to bit devices in byte units 255bytes 2040 points w out station No Writes to word devices in byte units 255bytes 127 points 5 Batch write Writes to bit devices in byte units 255bytes 2040 points w station No Writes to word devices in byte units 255bytes 127 points 3 93H Multi point in bit units w out station Writes bit patterns bit ON OFF inversion direct specification in TObytes 560 points Multi point write in bit 1 point units 8 bits for 1 point to a specified device D 44H units w station No 4 Fill w out station No Writes the same value to a range of specified devices Fill command E 45H w station No 5 35H Set clock w out station No Sets the clock data of the GOT 46 Set clock data station 6 36H Read data w out station No Reads the clock data of the GOT Read clock data w station No 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 17 3 4 Message Formats LE 2 14 I E E z E 2 2 O 14 E 2 O o a List of commands for formats 5 Digital Electronics Corporation s m
82. 0 0 0 6 4 8 3 2 0 0 0 0 1 52 57 30H 31H 30H 30H 30H 36H 34 38H 33H 32H 30H 30H 30H 30H 31H 1010 1 10 0000000000000001 1111119876543210 543210 Request message host GOT format 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection Binary Data 1 Data 2 Command Adaress 1 Droo 80015582 18 00 R W OOH 64H OOH 00 20H 80 OOH 01 Door 0000000000000001 1111119876543210 543210 Response message ACK during normal fe communication GOT host 06H NAK Error code Response message during faulty aii 15H 06H communication GOT host The above is a case where the sum check error 06H has occurred 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 4 Message Formats 5 Read clock data TR command The following shows an example of reading the clock data of GOT Assuming that the clock data of GOT has been set to 2009 October 1 18 46 49 Thursday Time display 2009 10 01 18 46 49 THU Item Message format gt Command Request message T R host GOT 54H 52H H D format 1 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection ASCII 5 Second Day of Year data Month data Day data Hour data Minute data data week data 30H 9 31H 3
83. 0002 0002 0003 2 R1 4097 R1 R1 1001H 2 A e 0003 Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits c 2 1FFEH 1 1FFFH R4095 8191 R4095 R4095 1FFFH 2 x 1FFFH Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits 1 For the address specification method for each data format refer to the following 2 x 2 5 Message Formats o Formats 1 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection Formats 3to6 compatible 1C frame Formats 7 to 10 QnA compatible 3C 4C frame Formats 11 to 13 Digital Electronics Corporation s memory link method Formats 14 15 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 11 2 4 Device Data Area 2 4 3 L devices The L devices are bit devices into which user data are stored All of these devices can be used as a user area List of L devices and differences in address specification by data format The following shows the L devices virtual devices inside the GOT The address specification values different depending on the data format are also given below Model Address Address specification value Format Format Format Format Format b7 b 55 54 b3 b2 b1 50 6 1 2 3to6 7 to 10 11 to 13 14 15 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 000 8192 2000H 115 114 113 112 111 110 19 18 001 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 002 8193 Same as address 2001u L31 L30 L29 L28 L27 L26 L25 L24 column on left 003 2 L2039 L2038 L2037 L2036 L2
84. 14 3 Terminating resistors of GOT 3 GOT side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following 57 1 4 1 GOT connector specifications 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 5 2 3 Connection Diagram 2 4 Device Data Area Virtual device Address specification value Device Format Format Format Format Format Refer to type 1 2 306 71010 14 to 13 44 15 decimal um d i D 0 to 4095 Word 0 to 4095 DO to 4095 DO to 4095 0000 to OFFFH 8000 to 9FFFH 2 4 1 R 0 to 4095 Word 4096 to 8191 RO to 4095 RO to 4095 1000 to 1FFFH 0000 to 1FFFH 242 0 to 2047 Bit 8192 to 8319 LO to 2047 LO to 2047 2000 to 207 A000 to AOFFH 243 M 0 to 2047 Bit 8320 to 8447 MO to 2047 MO to 2047 2080 to 20FFH 2000 to 20FFH 24 4 50 Oto 15 Word 8448 to 8463 D9009 to 500 to 15 2100 to 210 ecd Ort H T 9015 3000 to 300Du 24 5 0 to 63 Bit 8464 to 8467 M9000 to 5 0 to 63 2110 to 2113H 2200 to 2207 9063 3 246 The following shows a list of virtual devices inside the GOT available in the microcomputer connection serial and the address specification values for each data format The address specification of the virtual devices differs depending on the data format 1 For the address specification method for each data format refer to the following 2 5 Message Formats Formats 1 2 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION
85. 3 6 SM devices To enable the interrupt output set 8 bits to the data length at Communication Detail Settings L 3 5 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings When 7 bits is set the MSB 8th bit is ignored Example FFH gt 7 3 6 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 3 Device Data Area Differences in address specifications by data format The address specification of devices varies depending on the data format The following shows the address specification values for each data format Address specification value Address Format Format Format Format 1 2 3 4 5 6109 8000 8000 8001 DO 0 AN 2 0000 DO 8001 Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits 8002 8002 8003 D1 1 A 0001H D1 8003H Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits QFFFH D4095 4095 M S OFFFH D4095 9FFFH Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits 1 For the address specification method for each data format refer to the following x 3 4 Message Formats LE 2 124 I E E z E o 2 2 O 14 E 2 O o a Formats 1 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection Formats 3 4 GOT F900 series microcomputer connection Formats 5 Digital Electronics Corporation s memory link method Formats 6 7 4E frame Formats 8 9 QnA compatible 3E frame 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET
86. 30H 30H 30 30H 30H H LE H 0 1 0 8 91 8 0 21 1 Response data length CPU monitoring timer Command 0 0 1 0 0 010 9 0 1 gt 1 30H 31H 41 30H 30H 30 31H 39H 30H 31H H b A 1010 Data length target data Character C section a ________Sub oommand Year data Month data Day data Hour data Minute dataj ig week data Request message 1 0 0 0 0 0 9 1 0 0 1 1 8 4 6 4 9 0 4 host GOT 30H 30H 304 304 9 314 30 30H 31 31H 38 34H 6 34H 394 30H gt Data length target data format 9 QnA compatible frame Binary T Request Network PLC Request destination Request Subheader e module VO No data length Following 1 50H OOH 01 01H OOH OOH OOH ODH OOH monitoring timer 00 00 Year Month command data data 00H OOH Minute Second Day of 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 4 Message Formats Data length target data Continued to next page From previous page Item Message format format 8 QnA compatible 3E frame ASCII Subheader D 0 0 010 110 110 Following a R T Network PLC No Request destination
87. 38 30H 34H 03H 39H 31H D B D L 4 gt Sum check is performed in this range 1 Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 R100 upper R100 lower R101 upper R101 lower Response message ACK during normal communication host 06H Response message NAK during faulty communication host 15 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 5 Message Formats b When writing to a bit device The following shows an example of writing 1 s to virtual devices MO and M31 on the GOT at station No 15 0001H 8000H 4 Before execution After execution T Item Message format c format 14 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection format 1 7 T T gt STX Com Station No Address sf CR B 1 5 2 0 0 0 0 4 Following 02 42 31H 35H 32H 30H 30H 30 30H 34 gt H 09 A LE 8 0 z 9 format 15 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection format 2 B T T 1 yte Sum E STX mana Station No ee Number _ ETX Check gt 1 5 2 0 0 0 0 4 Following 1 5 A 02 4
88. 45 2 5 Message Formats From previous page Message format Item Example Format 7 QnA compatible 4C frame format 1 T T T T T ig T 10 Station No gla PLC No a 4 MT 010 0 0 o olo olo 15H 46H 30H 30H 30H 30 30H 0 during faulty communication GOT host Error code 7 F 6 9 37H 46H 36H 39H The above is the case where a parity error 7 69 has occurred 2 46 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 5 Message Formats 2 Set clock data 0901 command The following shows an example of setting the clock data of GOT Assuming the clock data of GOT is to be set to 2004 June 1 18 46 49 Tuesday Time display 2004 06 01 18 46 49 TUE After execution 12 Item Message format 5 Example Format 7 QnA compatible 4C frame format 1 Frame ID Network Request destination Renues Host 2 i destination S heck ENQ No Staton No No PLC modulel O No __ _ module staton No Address No 2 5 810 0 0 0 0 o 9 7 5 gt 05 46 38 30H 30H 30 30H 30 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 37H 35H z 0 0 0 0
89. 57 M7 to 0 _ M15 to 8 M23 to 16 M31 1024 FTX Check 0 1 0 0 0 0 8 0 8 02 30H 31 30H 30 30H 38 30 38H 43H H D H H L D H L 00000001000000000000000010000000 MMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMM 76543210111111982222111133222222 543210 3210987610987654 Response message NAK during faulty f communication GOT host 15H 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 63 2 5 Message Formats lt 72 2 E 2 2 E 5 a 2 Batch write 1 command w out station No batch write B command w station No a When writing to a word device The following shows an example of writing 0064 and 0065 to virtual devices R100 and R101 on the GOT at station No 15 00644 m 0065H 4 0000H 4 m 0000H 4 Item Before execution After execution Message format Request message host GOT format 14 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection format 1 STX Station No Upes E B 1 5 0 0 8 0 4 Following 02 42H 31H 5 30H 30H 43H 38 30 34 4 format 15 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection format 2 Number Sum Com of bytes _ LET check _ B 1 5 0 0 8 0 4 Following 9 1 02H 42H 31H 35 30H 30H 43H
90. 7 CONNECTION EXTERNAL I O DEVICE 7 13 7 3 Connection Diagram 74 GOT Side Settings 7 4 1 Setting communication interface Controller setting Set the channel of the equipment to be connected to the GOT Controller Setting CH1 MELSEC Q GS 0 2 Manufacturer MITSUBISHI j Controller Type MELSEC Q QS Q17nD M NC DR CRnD 700 3 SEE Routing Informatio 5 56 Gateway Standard 1 F RS422 485 arena serve auawa Gateway Client Ed FTP Server File Transfer F 18 Q Redundant AD Station No Switch Monitor Speed High Normal OK Cancel 1 Select Common Controller Setting from the menu 2 The Controller Setting window is displayed Select the channel to be used from the list menu 3 Set Manufacturer Controller Type I F and Driver according to the connected equipment to be used 4 The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer Controller Type I F and Driver are set Make the settings according to the usage environment Click the OK button when settings are completed The settings of connecting equipment can be set and confirmed in I F Communication Setting For details refer to the following gt 1 1 2 I F communication settin
91. D H D H D 9 L H L H L H L Request message host format 4 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection Binary Com Station Year Month Day Hour Minute Second Day f mand data data data data data data week data F 1 09H OAH 01 12H 2 31H 04 Response message ACK duringnormal communication host Response message NAK during faulty fe communication GOT host 15H When a wrong day of the week has been set by the clock data setting command If a wrong day of the week is set by the clock data setting commands the clock data will differ from the time displayed on the utility Example When October 1 2009 Tuesday is set by the clock data setting command the actual day of the week is Thursday Thursday THU will be displayed on the utility time display 3 42 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 4 Message Formats 7 In the case of interrupt outputs The following shows an example of an interrupt output when data are written to the interrupt output devices D13 and D14 Assuming that 3139H is written to D13 and 55 to 014 Example When the number of interrupt data bytes is 2 4 Interrupt output Output Output value 1 value 2
92. Default 1000 points 1 to 2000 points Input relay read times Set the read points of the input relay Default 1000 points 1 to 2000 points 5 MODBUS R TCP CONNECTION 5 3 GOT Side Settings Holding Set the read points of the holding registor read register 1 to 125 points 5 3 3 GOT Ethernet Setting times Default 125 points Set the read points of the input Input register r dti register 1 to 125 points GOT Ethernet Setting Default 125 points Coil write times Set the write points of the coil 1 to 800 points This setting is shared by other Ethernet driver settings Default 800 points Holding Set the write points of the holding GOT IP Address 192 10 3 18 register write register 1 to 100 points elect f r times Default 100 points POI NT ris Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 1 Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting Peripheral S W Communication Port 5015 rl Transparent Port 5014 after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual L d GOT2000 Series User s Manual Utility Description Range 5 2 Precedence in communication settings GOT Set the IP address of th
93. Driver Set the driver for the device to be connected None Host Personal computer Each communication driver for connected devices Detail Setting Make settings for the transmission speed and data length of the communication driver 2577 Refer to each chapter of the equipment to be connected to the GOT RS232 Setting To validate the 5V power supply function in RS232 mark the Enable the 5V power supply checkbox The RS232 setting is invalid when the CH No of I F 1 RS232 is 9 Extension I F seti ing Set the communication unit attached to the extension interface of the GOT CH No Set the CH No according to the intended purpose The number of channels differs depending on the GOT to be used 0 Not used 1 to 4 Used for connecting a controller of channel No 1 to 4 set in Setting connected equipment Channel setting 5 to 8 Used for barcode function RFID function remote personal computer operation serial A Used for the video RGB display function multimedia function external I O function operation panel function RGB output function report function hard copy function with a printer sound output function gateway function MES interface function and wireless LAN connection 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 1 Setting the Communication Interface Channel No drivers RS232 Setting 1 Channel No 2 to No 4 Use the channel No 2 to No 4 when using the Multi channel
94. Example Format 13 Digital Electronics Corporation s memory link method extended mode ASCII code 1 n 1 When Interrupt Data Byte in Communication Detail Settings is set to 1 byte Output Sum STX Station ESC FTX Check CR LF 0 0 3 9 9 4 02H 30 30H 1BH 49H 33H 39H 03H 39H 44H ODH OAH 21 H D H L H L lt 12 This range Sum check is performed o 2 When Interrupt Data Byte in Communication Detail Settings is set to 2 byte z T T T S 9 Output Output um STX Station No ESC value vale ETX Check CR LF Interrupt inquiry O Tv 0 0 3 1 3 9 9 z GOT host 02H 30H 30 1BH 49 33H 31H 33H 39 03 46H 39H OAH 5 D H L H D H L lt c Sum check is performed in this range um 3 When Interrupt Data Byte in Communication Detail Settings is set to 4 byte a T Com Output Output Output Output Sum LSTX Station ESC mand value 1 value2 vales value4 FTX Check CR HF 0 0 5 5 3 1 3 9 7 2 02 30H 30 1 49 41H 41 35H 35 33 31H 33H 39 45H 37 OAH H L H L H L H L H D H L 4 gt Sum check is performed in
95. Extended function OS DL Multimedia Connection cable GOT Number of connectabl Multimedia controller Signal type Connection cable i 5 distance Option device Model equipment GT 27 User i j connection diagram 1 1 multimedia controller for 1 GOT 3 NTSC PAL 51 GT27M MMR Z 1 The cable length differs depending on the specification of the video camera used by the user 2 For the CF card to be inserted into the multimedia unit refer to the following Type of CF card that can be inserted List of Valid Devices Applicable GOT2000 Series GOT D 0064 Precautions for using the CF card 57 13 4 GOT Side Settings 3 For the type of the video camera that can be connected refer to the following Technical News List of Valid Devices Applicable GOT2000 Series GOT D 0064 13 2 13 MULTIMEDIA CONNECTION 13 1 Connectable Model List 13 2 2 Sending video image to personal computer Communication driver Multimedia Gateway FTP onneton type Connection cable 1 nnection cable 2 interface 1 interface 2 Connection cable 1 GOT 3 Connection cable 2 Number of Multimedia Signal Maximum t connectable Max Option device Option device computer controller type
96. Format Monitor Speed 1 Select Common Controller Setting from the menu 2 The Controller Setting window is displayed Select the channel to be used from the list menu 3 Set Manufacturer Controller Type I F and Driver according to the connected equipment to be used 4 The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer Controller Type I F and Driver set Make the settings according to the usage environment Click the OK button when settings are completed The settings of connecting equipment can be set and confirmed I F Communication Setting For details refer to the following 227 1 1 2 communication setting 12 4 12 PRINTER CONNECTION 12 3 GOT Side Settings Printer setting 2 4 Printer Printer Type PictBridge Serial Destination YF standard 1 F RS232 Select Common Peripheral Setting Printer from the menu Select the printer type Set the interface to which the printer is connected When Serial is selected in Printer type clicking the detail setting button displays the Communication Detail Settings dialog box for the communication driver Make the settings according to the usage environment 72 12 3 2 Communication detail settings Click the OK button when settings are completed 1 Setting the communication interface When Channel No 8 is used for the seri
97. Format 3 A compatible 1C frame format 1 This is the basic format of the dedicated protocols This is the appended format of the A compatible 1C frame format 1 with a Format 4 A compa block No ible 1C frame format 2 This is the enclosed format of the A compatible 1C frame format 1 with 27254 5 Format 5 A compatible 1C frame format 3 This is the appended format of the A compatible 1C frame format 1 with CR and LF Format 6 A compatible 1C frame format 4 3 Formats 7 to 10 QnA compatible 3 4 frame This is the same message format as when a communication is performed using the MC protocol of Q QnA Series serial communication module Type Name Description Refer to Format 7 QnA compatible 3 4 frame format 1 This is the basic format of the MC protocols This is the appended format of the QnA compatible 3C 4C frame format 1 Format 8 QnA compatible 3C AC frame format 2 with block No This is the enclosed format of the QnA compatible 3 4 frame format 1 57255 Format 9 QnA compatible 3 4 frame format 3 with STX and ETX This is the appended format of the QnA compatible 3C 4C frame format 1 Format 10 QnA compatible 3C 4C frame format 4 with CR and LF 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 19 2 5 Message Formats l lt 12 2 E 2 2 E 2 a 4 For
98. Forthe type of the video camera that can be connected refer to the following Technical News 29 List of valid devices applicable for GOT2000 series GOT D 0064 5 Install the multimedia interaction tool before use For details of the multimedia interaction tool refer to the following manual GT Designer3 GOT2000 Help 6 Alength between a hub and a node The maximum distance differs depending on the Ethernet device to be used The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used 10BASE T Max 4 nodes for a cascade connection 500m 100BASE TX Max 2 nodes for a cascade connection 205m When switching hubs are used the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades For the limit contact the switching hub manufacturer MULTIMEDIA CONNECTION Power supply of video camera Depending on the video camera type noises from the power supply cable of the camera may cause a malfunction on the PLC or the GOT In this case apply the following line filter to the power line of the camera Recommended line filter ZHC2203 11 or equivalent 13 MULTIMEDIA CONNECTION 13 3 13 2 System Configuration 13 3 Connection Diagram The coaxial cable used for connecting the GOT to a video camera should be prepared by the user The following shows each cable connection diagram 13 3 1 Coaxial cable The following shows the connection diagram
99. GOT and PLC For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC refer to each chapter Mitsubishi Products gt Non Mitsubishi Products 1 Non Mitsubishi Products 2 Microcomputer MODBUS Products Peripherals 6 2 6 CONNECTION TO SOUND OUTPUT UNIT 6 1 Connectable Model List 6 3 Side Settings 6 3 1 Setting communication interface Sound output unit setting Controller setting Set the channel of the equipment to be connected to the GOT Sound Output Destination I F Extend 1 F 1st MITSUBISHI Controller Type 5 0 05 Q17nD M NC DR CRnD 700 3 Standard 1 F RS232 CPU 0271 24 271024 Gateway Serve 0 BE Gateway Clent 4 E 1 Select Common Peripheral Setting gt at 4 Sound Output from the menu 115200 15 Q Redundant AD Station No Switch 2 Set the interface to which the sound output unit is connected Click the OK button when settings are completed 1 Communication interface setting by the Utility Nes The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data 1 Select Common Controller Setting from the For details on the Utility refer to the following menu manual 227 GOT2000 Series U
100. GOTs 2 xd 100m Hub 100m pe 23 for 1 PLC m Quantum 140 NOE 771 10 Shielded twisted Shielded twisted Series 140 NWM 100 00 pair cable STP pair cable STP or unshielded or unshielded twisted pair twisted pair cable UTP of cable UTP of category 3 or category 3 or higher higher 1 Connect the to the Ethernet module via a hub Use cables connectors and hubs that meet the IEEE802 3 10BASE T 100BASE TX standards 2 When connecting GT2000 to an equipment that meets the 10BASE T 2 5 standard use the switching hub and operate an environment where 10Mbps and 100Mbps can be mixed 3 Alength between a hub and a node The maximum distance differs depending on the Ethernet device to be used The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used 10BASE T Max 4 nodes for a cascade connection 500m 100BASE TX Max 2 nodes for a cascade connection 205m When switching hubs are used the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades For the limit contact the switching hub manufacturer Product manufactured by SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC SA For details of the product contact SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC SA 5 Usethe straight cable Side Setting SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC PLC For details of SCHNEIDER PLC refer to the following manual 57 SCHNEIDER PLC user s Manual 5
101. GS617 Validity of 65579 setting channel number For details of GS devices 65570 to 65576 and GS devices GS590 to GS617 refer to the next page 4 MODBUS R RTU CONNECTION 4 11 4 5 MODBUS R RTU Equipment Side Setting z E 2 2 O o 5 E x 2 e Q o a When sharing communication settings between multiple channel numbers The table below shows the settings for the GS device GS device Description Set value 0 Using Function Code 1 Not using Function Code OF Bit1 0 Using Function Code 10 1 Not using Function Code 10 GS570 Command selection Function Code 01 0 2000 GS571 Specification for the max number of 1 to 2000 Specify the maximum number coil read times Other than above 2000 Function Code 02 0 2000 GS572 Specification for the max number of 1 to 2000 Specify the maximum number input relay read times Other than above 2000 Function Code 03 0 125 GS573 Specification for the max number of 1 to 125 Specify the maximum number holding register read times Other than above 125 Function Code 04 0 125 GS574 Specification for the max number of 1 to 125 Specify the maximum number input register read times Other than above 125 0 800 Function Code OF o 1968 Specify the maximum number GS575 Specification for the max number of Other than above 1968 multiple coil write times When
102. MODBUS R TCP CONNECTION 5 11 5 6 Example of Connection 5 12 Parameter settings 1 Set the parameter settings with programming software for SCHNEIDER PLC a For Modicon Premium series Set for PL7 Pro programming software Item Set value Processors Connected CPU module Memory cards Memory card to be used Module Connected Ethernet module IP Address IP address for Ethernet module Setting for devi int Size of global address mg p ee pours fields Bits Coil Input Words Input register Maintenance register b For Modicon Quantum series Set for Concept programming software Item PLC Selection Set value Connected CPU module TCP IP Ethernet Numbers of unit Module Selection Connected Ethernet module Internet Address IP address for Ethernet module 5 MODBUS R TCP CONNECTION 5 6 Example of Connection 5 6 2 Connecting to YOKOGAWA PLC STARDOM System Configuration Communication driver Loom MODBUS TCP Hub Connection cable Caos Connection cable Connection cable Connection cable Number of controller M connectable ation Type 5 ax device 5 25 Option device COT i Cable model distance Cable model distance Twisted pair cable Twisted pair cable 10BASE T 10BASE T Shielded twisted Shielded twisted pair cable STP o
103. RDB T T d SDA SDA I 1 T SDB SDB 1 T 5 SG 56 6 5 222 RSA 3 i 1 CSA 4 6 i 1 1 CSB 9 lt 1 Some MODBUS RTU equipment doesn t have SG In this case the wiring between GOT and SG is unnecessary 2 Some MODBUS RTU equipment require the control line CS RS etc to be controlled Make sure to connect the cables and wires as described in the MODBUS RTU equipment manual 3 A terminating resistor is required For GT27 set the terminating resistor selector of the main unit to Disable and connect a 3300 terminating resistor C 1 4 3 Terminating resistors of GOT 4 For the terminating resistor of MODBUS RTU equipment refer to the manual of MODBUS RTU equipment to be used 4 6 4 MODBUS R RTU CONNECTION 4 3 Connection Diagram 4 RS 422 485 connection diagram 3 MODBUSS RTU equipment side 17274 MODBUSS RTU equipment side 77274 GOT side terminal block 3 1st 2nd 1 SDA1 C SDB1 RDA1 RDB1 SG SDA2 SDB2 RDA2 RDB2 o Oo A SG FG zx 1 The actual terminal layout on the MODBUSS RTU equipment may differ from the example shown above SDA B and RDA B terminals can be separated from each other Make sure to connect the cables and wires as described i
104. SX CC Link communication unit GT15 J61BT13 Example When installing a video input unit and a MELSECNET H communication unit MELSECNET H Video RGB input unit Video RGB input unit MELSECNET H communication unit 1 16 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection 14 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection To connect the GOT to a device in the respective connection type connection cables between the GOT and a device are necessary For cables needed for each connection refer to each chapter for connection 1 4 1 connector specifications The following shows the connector specifications on the GOT side Refer to the following table when preparing connection cables by the user RS 232 interface Use the following as the RS 232 interface and the RS 232 communication unit connector on the GOT For the GOT side of the connection cable use a connector and connector cover applicable to the GOT connector 1 Connector specifications Hardware GOT Connector model Manufacturer Version GT27 9 pin D sub male 17LE 23090 27 D4C DDK Ltd GT23 inch screw fixed type 2 GT15 RS2 9P 9 pin D sub Spin D sub male 17LE 23090 27 D3CC DDK Ltd GT01 RS4 M inch screw fixed type 2 Connector pin arrangement 27 GT15 RS2 9P GT01 RS4 M t 2 z z o Y 2 a
105. Setting E Enable the 5V power supply CHNo Driver 1st Barcode Detail Setting 2nd 0 x None x Detail Setting 3rd o z None Detail Setting Cancel 2 Communication detail settings Keep consistency with the bar code reader setting Item Setting Use default value Transmission Speed 9600bps Data Bit 8bit Stop Bit 1bit Parity Even Controller Setting of GT Designer3 For the setting method of Controller Setting of GT Designer refer to the following 257 8 3 1Setting communication interface 8 BAR CODE READER CONNECTION 8 5 8 4 System Configuration Examples z E 2 2 O Q q o lt a Setting of Bar Code of GT Designer3 Bar Code Destination VF Standard I F RS232 v Detail Setting Function Setting V Use Bar Code Read Data Direct Input to Object Device Device Points Header Terminator No 2 M Data Writing Order Low High High Lo WI Fil a space when imported data is less than the writing points Filing Data 9 Space 0x20 r Signed BIN16 gt CH1 MELSEC Q QS Q17nD M NC DR CRnD 700 Device Network CPU No 0 a Host Other Switch to the device comment dialog Information Kind WORD Range Device 0 4910079
106. The counter is incremented at 1 second intervals after the GOT is turned ON D2035 1 1 System The time elapsed after GOT is turned ON is stored in 1 second units Data are stored in binary format D2036 to 4095 User area User 1 After writing data the interrupt data is output within a period of 1 to 10ms 2 When data are written to D13 and D14 from the host side interrupt output is not performed 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 9 2 4 Device Data Area 1 2 The side where virtual devices are set Set on the system side System User 2 6 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings When 7 bits is set the MSB 8th bit is ignored Example FFH gt 7 Set on the user side by sending request messages from host or using the touch switches etc on the GOT Interrupt output D13 D14 e To disable the interrupt output turn ON 5 52 interrupt code output disable flag 7 5 2 4 6 SM devices To enable the interrupt output set 8 bits to the data length at Communication Detail Settings Differences in address specifications by data format The address specification of devices varies depending on the data format The following shows the address specification values for each data format Model 1 For the address specification method for each data format refer to the following 37 2 5 Messa
107. Video input unit GT27 V4 Z For video input signal NTSC PAL 4 ch 9 RGB input unit GT27 R2 Z For analog RGB input signal 2 ch Video RGB input unit GT27 V4R1 Z For video input signal NTSC PAL 4 ch for analog RGB mixed input signal 1 ch E RGB output unit GT27 ROUT Z For analog RGB output signal 1 ch 5 Sound output unit GT15 SOUT For sound output a GT15 DIOR For the connection to external I O device or operation panel Negative Common Input Source Type Output External I O unit o For the connection to external I O device or operation panel Positive Common GT15 DIO Input Sink Type Output x a o 1 3 3 Conversion cables a Product name Model Specifications 2 FA LTBGT2RACBL05 o RS 485 terminal block FA LTBGT2R4CBL10 Connector RS 483 Terminal block s conversion modules Supplied connection cable dedicated for the conversion unit FA LTBGT2R4CBL20 a 14 1 3 4 Serial Multi Drop Connection Unit Product name Me Specifications GOT multi drop connection module Mitsubishi Products18 CONNECTION Serial multi drop connection unit GT01 RS4 M 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 13 1 3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection 1 3 5 Installing a unit on another unit Checking the unit installation position This section describes the precautions for installing units on another unit For the installation method of each unit refer to the following manual
108. Writes to multiple different bit devices in 1 point units 64 points in bit units Random write Writes to multiple different bit devices in 16 point and 32 point units 3 64 words 1024 points 1402 0000 5471 in word units Writes to multiple different word devices in 1 point and 2 point units 64 points Multiple block Reads multiple blocks A bit device 16 bits for 1 point or a word device 0406 0000 MEAE E 64 points batch read 1 word for 1 point is regarded as one block Multiple block Writes multiple blocks A bit device 16 bits for 1 point or a word device 1406 0000 DU 64 points batch write 1 word for 1 point is regarded as one block 19012 0000 Read clock data Reads the clock data of the GOT 09012 0000 Set clock data Sets the clock data of the GOT Mixed specification of bit devices and word devices is also possible This is a dedicated command of GOT for the microcomputer connection Specifies the address of bit devices in 16 point units Example MO M16 M32 and others 3 18 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 4 Message Formats 3 4 3 Formats 1 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection Basic format of data communication Item Message format T Command Data Request message J 5555555555555555 55555 55 host gt H D 1 During processing of read commands 2 Data nc UM T Re
109. at the day of the week as clock data 2 15 2 4 Device Data Area lt mA o 2 E 2 2 E 2 a Differences in address specifications by data format The address specification of devices varies depending on the data format The following shows the address specification values for each data format Address specification value Address Formats 1 2 Formats 6 Formats 7 to 10 Formats 11 to 13 Formats 14 152 2100 2100 2101 5 0 8448 D9000 SDO 2100 A 7 ES 2101 8 Lower 8 bits 2102 2102 2103 801 8449 09001 01 2101 2 2103 Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits 2104 2104 2105 02 8450 09002 02 2102 A M 2105 Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits 2106 3000 2106 3000 2107 3001 503 8451 09003 SD3 2103 S 21028 Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits 30011 2108H 30021 21 08 3002 21 09 3003 SD4 8452 D9004 04 2104 1098 Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits 30031 210 3004 210 3004 210 3005 05 8453 09005 SD5 2105H AM gt X 2108B1 Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits 30051 210 30064 210 3006 210 3007 506 8454 09006 06 2106 A 2
110. code list When faulty the error code is stored in SD2 For details of error code stored in SD2 the error contents cause and measures refer to the following L gt 24 5 m Details and actions for errors error codes stored into 502 When an error other than those to be stored in SD2 occurs at faulty only the NAK response is executed Precautions 1 Batch reading writing crossing over different devices When using the batch read 0 A or batch write 1 B command do not batch read write crossing over different devices This will cause an error response 2 72 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 5 Message Formats 2 6 GOT Side Settings 2 6 1 Setting communication j 2 6 2 Communication detail settings interface Communication unicau ing The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer Controller Type I F and Driver are set Make the settings according to the usage environment 57 2 6 2 Communication detail settings Click the OK button when settings are completed The settings of connecting equipment can be set and confirmed in I F Communication Setting For details refer to the following 57 1 1 2 communication setting Default 1 settings Make the settings according to the usage environment Property Value Controller settin T Controller setting Transmission Speed BPS 19200 a Set the chan
111. communication driver Refer to each chapter of the equipment to be connected to the GOT 1 Setting Driver The displayed items for a driver differ according to the settings Manufacturer Controller Type and I F When the driver to be set is not displayed confirm if Manufacturer Controller Type and I F are correct For the settings refer to the following 57 Setting the communication interface section in each chapter 1 4 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 1 Setting the Communication Interface 2 Setting Controller Type The types for the selection differs depending on the PLC to be used For the settings refer to the following Type Model name Manufacturer NFCP100 YOKOGAWA NFJT100 TSX P57 203M TSX P57 253M TSX P57 303M TSX P57 353M TSX P57 453M 140 CPU 311 10 MODBUS 140 CPU 434 12U 140 CPU 534 14U Schneider Electric 140 CPU 651 50 140 CPU 651 60 140 CPU 671 60 140 CPU 113 02 140 CPU 113 03 140 CPU 434 12A 140 CPU 534 14A Microcomputer connection Microcomputer 2 z o X 2 a a 22 5 a t a 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 5 1 1 Setting the Communication Interface 3 Setting The interface differs depending on the GOT to be used Set the I F according to the connection and the position of communication unit t
112. communication state on Windows GT Designer3 1 When using the Command Prompt of Windows9 Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Windows a When normal communication C gt Ping 192 168 3 18 Reply from 192 168 3 18 bytes 32 time lt 1ms TTL 64 b When abnormal communication C gt Ping 192 168 3 18 Request timed out 2 When using the PING Test of GT Designer3 Select Communication Communication configuration Ethernet and Connection Test GOT IP Address 182 168 Timeout Period PING Test 7 Specify the GOT IP Address of the PING Test and click the PING Test button 2 The Test Result is displayed after the PING Test is finished 3 When abnormal communication At abnormal communication check the followings and execute the Ping command again Mounting condition of Ethernet communication unit Cable connecting condition Confirmation of Communication Settings P address of GOT specified by Ping command 1 24 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 6 Checking for Normal Monitoring Confirming the communication state on the GOT The Ping test can be confirmed by the Utility screen of the GOT For the operation method of GOT Utility refer to the following 72 GOT2000 Series User s Manual Utility oO 2 Self check Diagnostics Ethernet status check YX IP address of the other terminal
113. data in word units specify the addresses 16 point units Example MO M16 M32 and others 3 10 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 3 Device Data Area 3 3 5 SD devices The SD devices are word devices into which GOT communication errors error codes clock data and other information are stored List of SD devices The following lists the SD devices virtual devices inside the GOT Address Description Set side 100ms counter 32bits The counter is incremented at 100ms intervals after GOT is turned ON The time elapsed after GOT is turned ON is stored in 100ms units 1 When setting the LH order to 32bit Storage for the communication detail settings The lower and upper bits are stored in 500 and 501 respectively SD1 SDO A SDO na gt 01 Lower word 2 When setting the HL order to 32bit Storage for the communication detail settings The upper and lower bits are stored in 500 and 501 respectively SDO SD1 A A CN Upper word Lower word Communication error status An error data error code occurred during communication is stored Host Address Communication error that occurred on the request destination GOT 0 No error Parity error Framing error Overrun error Communication message error 502 6 Clock data setting error System EE LE 2 a I LE E z E o 2 2
114. error 06H has occurred 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 27 2 5 Message Formats b When reading a bit device The following shows an example of reading the two points of the virtual devices MO to M31 Assuming 0 1 and M31 1 are stored Item Message format T T T T Number of Sum eo 2211 02 ponts ETX Check Request message R D 8 3 2 0 0 2 8 host 02H 52H 44H 38H 33H 32H 30H 30H 32H 03H 43H 38H H L lt gt Sum check is performed in this range Sum check is performed in this range 4 gt Sum STX Data 1 M15 to 0 Data 2 M31 to 16 ETX Check 0 0 0 1 8 0 0 0 8 Response message 02 30H 30 31 38H 30H 30H 30 03 38H 43H during normal communication 0 1 10 D GOT host a 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O MMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMM 11111198765432103322222222221111 543210 1098765432109876 format 1 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection format 1 Response message during faulty communication host format 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection format 2 Error NAK code 15H The above is a case
115. for GOT A900 series With setting LH Order the order of upper bits and lower bits are reversed when the GOT displays and writes 32 bit data 2 5 Message Formats 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 5 7 Formats 14 15 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection Basic format of data communication Item Message format format 14 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection format format 15 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection format 1 2 1 w out station No 1 w out station No Com Com Sum STX Paa CR STX mand Data ETX Check mmm me m mni o 02H 02 03H o H L 2 Request message host GOT Sum check is performed in this range 2 w station No 2 w station No LLI T T T z Com STX Data CR 57 Station No Data Check _ o 4 02 02 03 H L H L H L 5 4 gt Sum check is performed in this range gt 1 During processing of read commands format 14 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection format 1 format 15 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection format 2 44 STX Data CR STX Data Ex Sum Check
116. format 2 The end code is ETX or sum check How to set data format Set the data format at Detail setting GT Designer3 For details of the data format setting method refer to the following 57 2 6 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings 20 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 5 Message Formats 2 5 2 List of commands The following shows the list of commands available in each data format List of commands for formats 1 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection Command Max ber of points ASCII Command name Description CM Symbol processed code Reads bit devices in 16 point units 64 words 1024 points RD saa aga Potent in word units Reads word devices in 1 point units 64 points i Writes to bit devices in 16 point units 64 words 1024 points WD in word units Writes to word devices in 1 point units 64 points Random read Reads multiple different bit devices in 16 point units 64 words 1024 points RR 52 52 word units Reads multiple different word devices in 1 point units 64 points Random write Writes to multiple different word devices in 16 point units 64 words 1024 points RW 52 57 word units Writes to multiple different word devices in 1 point units 64 points TR 54 52H Read clock data Reads the clock data of the GOT TS 54H 53H Set clock data Set
117. format 6 4E frame ASCII ij T T T T ij T Response type Serial No Fixed value Mad PLC No 5 4 010 ojo 010 14 0 Following 35H 34H 30H 30H 30H 30 30H 30 30H 31H 30H 31H H L MH L H L 1 r jj Request deeination ios unii Request data length CPU monitoring timer Command 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 A 0 0 0 0 0 9 0 1 4 30H 30H 30H 30 30H 30 30H 30H 31H 41H 30H 30H 308 31H 39H 30H 31H Hue C H j 140 Character C section gt T 7 ji Request message Sub command Year data Month data Day data Hour data data Second Day of data ___ week data_ host GOT 1 0 0 0 0 0 9 1 0 0 1 1 8 4 6 4 9 0 4 30H 30 30H 39H 31H 30 30H 31 31H 38H 34H 36 34H 39 30H 34H A D format 7 4E frame Binary Request Network PLC Request destination Request Serel No Fixed value No No Sw data length Following 1 54H 00 OOH OOH OOH OOH O1H 01 OOH OOH OOH OOH Data length target range 2 4 gt i CPU monitoring Sub Year Month Day Hour Minute Second Day of 21 timer COMMANG command data data data data data we QOH OOH 01H O9H 00H OOH 09 OAH 01
118. function For details of the Multi channel function refer to the following gt Mitsubishi Products 19 MULTI CHANNEL FUNCTION 2 Drivers The displayed items for a driver differ according to the settings Manufacturer Controller Type and I F When the driver to be set is not displayed confirm if Manufacturer Controller Type and I F are correct 227 Setting the communication interface section in each chapter 1 1 3 Precautions 1 When using the multiple CPU system When using the to monitor the multiple CPU system of other stations select MELSEC Q Multi Q Motion or MELSEC QnU DC Q17nD M NC DR CRnD 700 for the type regardless of the host PLC CPU type QCPU QnACPU ACPU When other models are selected the setting of the CPU No becomes unavailable 2 Precautions for changing model a When devices that cannot be converted are included When setting of Manufacturer or Controller Type is changed GT Designer3 displays the device that cannot be converted no corresponding device type or excessive setting ranges as In this case set the device again 12 z a O o X a O O lt 2 b When the changed Manufacturer or Controller Type does not correspond to the network The network will be set to the host station c When the Manufacturer or Controller Type is changed to None The GT Designer3 displays the devi
119. in this range lt n 2 E 2 2 E 2 a t format 14 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection format 1 Year data Month data Day data Hour data data Second data T Day of week data 02 30H 4 30H 36H 30H 31 31H 38 34H 36 34H 9 30H 32H H D H D H L H L H L H L H L Response message during normal format 15 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection format 2 communication T T T T T GOT host Day of Sum Year data Month data Day data Hour data Minute data Second datal week data ETX check 0 4 0 6 0 1 1 8 4 6 4 9 0 2 0 02 300 34 30H 36H 30H 31H 31H 38H 34H 36H 34H 39H 30H 32H 03 44H 30H H L H L H L A L H L HQ D H L lt Response message NAK during faulty fe communication GOT host 15H 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 69 2 5 Message Formats 6 The following shows example of setting clock data of GOT at station No 27 Assuming the clock data of GOT is to be set to 2004 June 1 18 46 49 Tuesday Item Request message host gt Set clock data 5 command w out stat
120. is converted to a 6 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted from the upper digit For details of the device range that can be accessed refer to the following 24 Device Data Area Device points Specifies the number of device data to be read written Setting range 1 to 40H The address notated in hexadecimal is converted to a 2 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted from the upper digit When specifying multiple devices as follows limit the total device points to within 64 points a When using random read write command When setting multiple bit accesses word accesses or double word accesses limit the total number of access points to within 64 points b When using multiple block batch read write commands When setting multiple blocks limit the total number of points of all blocks to within 64 points 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 43 2 5 Message Formats l lt mA o 2 E 2 2 E 2 a 7 Year month day hour minute second and day of the week data Specifies year month day hour minute second and day of the week to be read set to the GOT clock data The address notated in decimal is converted to a 2 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted from the upper digit 257 m Message format 1 Read clock data 1901 command 227 m Message format 2 Set clock data 0901 command 8 Error code This is the response message at faulty communication a
121. is regarded as one block Multiple block Writes multiple blocks A bit device 16 bits for 1 point or a word device 1406 0000 64 points batch write 1 word for 1 point is regarded as one block 19012 0000 Read clock data Reads the clock data of the GOT 09017 0000 Set clock data Sets the clock data of the GOT 1 Mixed specification of bit devices and word devices is also possible 2 Thisis a dedicated command of GOT for the microcomputer connection 3 Specifies the address of bit devices in 16 point units Example M16 M32 and others List of commands for formats 11 to 13 Digital Electronics Corporation s memory link method Command Max ber of point ASCII Command name Description E Or DOIS Symbol processed code Batch read Reads bit devices in 16 point units 64 words 1024 points in word units Reads word devices in 1 point units 64 points W Bn Batch write Writes to bit devices in 16 point units 64 words 1024 points in word units Writes to word devices in 1 point units 64 points 49H Interrupt inquiry Issues an interrupt inquiry format 13 only 4DH Read clock data Reads the clock data of the GOT 2 4 Set clock data Sets the clock data of the GOT E 4 This is a dedicated command of GOT for the microcomputer connection 2 22 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 5 Message Formats List of commands for for
122. item The following describes the setting items for the standard I F setting and extension I F setting Communication Setting 1 RS422 485 1 2 85232 3 USB 1 4 Ethernet RS232 Setting s Standard F Setting 0 00 0 CH No Driver a Q L QnA A ceu 027124 137124 Detai Setting 0 7 None Detail setting 9 Host 0 x None x Detail Setting 7 Enable the 5V power supply CH No Driver ist 0 x None J Detail Setting 2nd 0 None 3rd 0 x None Wireless LAN 0 x None lt Item Standard setting Description Set channel No and drivers to the GOT standard interfaces CH No Set the CH No according to the intended purpose 0 Not used 1 to 4 Used for connecting a controller of channel No 1 to 4 set in Setting connected equipment Channel setting 5 to 8 Used for barcode function RFID function remote personal computer operation function serial 9 Used for connecting Host PC Ethernet download A Used for the report function with a serial printer hard copy function with a serial printer remote personal computer operation function Ethernet VNC server function gateway function and MES interface function Multi Used for multi channel Ethernet connection VF The communication type of the GOT standard interface is displayed
123. list For the error codes refer to the following 27 3 4 6 Formats 6 7 4E frame mError code list 3 68 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 4 Message Formats 3 5 Side Settings 3 5 1 Setting communication j 3 5 2 Communication detail settings interface Communication unicau ing settings Make the settings according to the usage environment Property Value Set the channel of the equipment to be connected to the GOT Net No 1 GOT GOT Station 1 GOT Ethernet Setting 192 168 3 18 2 GOT Communication Port No 5021 Startup Time Sec 3 Delay Time ms 0 ioe faa 32bit Storage LH Order 3 Protocol UDP IP 328 pM Format 1 mee Interrupt Data Byte 1 5 Special Interrupt Code No AD Station No Switch 9 Livin 4 Confirmation No GOT Station 4 GOT Ethernet Setting 192 168 3 18 GOT Communication Port No 5021 Startup Time Sec Delay Time ms Living Confirmation Cycle Sec 20 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 5 GOT Side Settings Fede Item Description Range Exc YEA Set the network No of the NET No GOT 1 to 239 Default 1 Set the station No of the GOT GOT A Default 4 110 64 0 0 0 0 to Set the IP address of the GOT GOT IP Address Default 192 168 3 18 255 255 255 255 1024 to 5010 Set the GOT port No for
124. material as a pen or driver Doing so can result in a damage or failure of the display section When the GOT is connected to the Ethernet network the available IP address is restricted according to the system configuration When multiple GOTs are connected to the Ethernet network Do not set the IP address 192 168 3 18 for the GOTs and the controllers in the network When a single GOT is connected to the Ethernet network Do not set the IP address 192 168 3 18 for the controllers except the GOT in the network Doing so can cause the IP address duplication The duplication can negatively affect the communication of the device with the IP address 192 168 3 18 The operation at the IP address duplication depends on the devices and the system Turn on the controllers and the network devices to be ready for communication before they communicate with the GOT Failure to do so can cause a communication error on the GOT When the GOT is subject to shock or vibration or some colors appear on the screen of the GOT the screen of the GOT might flicker MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS NWARNING Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or removing the GOT main unit to from the panel Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or removing the option unit onto from the GO
125. number as the network No set in the GOT For setting method of Communication Detail Settings refer to the following Network No 3 5 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings T it the dat rted to a 2 digit ASCII code from th a d poe HE UP Transmit the data converted to a 2 digit binary code Set the same number as the PLC No set in the GOT For setting method of Communication Detail Settings refer to the following PLC No 37 3 5 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings Transmit the data converted to a 2 digit ASCII code from the upper digit Transmit the data converted to a 2 digit binary code Request destination module 1 No Ignore GOT Request destination module station No Ignore GOT Request data length Number of bytes from the start of CPU monitoring timer to the last request data Transmit the data converted to a 4 digit ASCII code from the upper digit Transmit the data converted to a 4 digit binary code from the lower two digits Response data length Appended to the response message from the microcomputer side Number of bytes from the start of end code to the last request data Transmit the data converted to a 4 digit ASCII code from the upper digit Transmit the data converted to a 4 digit binary code from the lower two digits CPU monitoring Ignore timer Specifies the access contents from the
126. of the GOT Specify The request destination module 1 No is 0000 00 is converted to a 2 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted from the upper digit The request destination module 1 No is 4 digit Station No Station No is used to identify the GOT with which the host communicates Setting range 0 to 1FH The address notated in hexadecimal is converted to a 2 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted from the upper digit The GOT processes only commands whose station No matches the Host Address 0 to 31 set at Communication Detail Settings The message of command whose station No does not match is ignored For setting method of Communication Detail Settings refer to the following 57 2 6 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings Command sub command Specifies the contents to access from the host to GOT The command is converted to a 4 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted from the upper digit For details of the commands that can be used refer to the following 5 2 5 2 List of commands Device code Specifies the code by which the device data to be read written is recognized The command is converted to a 2 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted from the upper digit For details of the device range that can be accessed refer to the following 257 24 Device Data Area Head device Specifies the head No of the device data to be read written The address notated in decimal
127. of the virtual devices differs depending on the data format Virtual device Address specification value TEN ae Roe Format Format Format Format Refer to E 2 1 2 3 4 5 609 decimal D 0 to 4095 Word 0 to 4095 8000 to 9FFFH 0000 to OFFFH DO to 4095 3 3 1 R 0 to 4095 Word 4096 to 8191 0000 to 1FFFH 1000 to 1FFFH RO to 4095 3 32 L 0 to 2047 Bit 8192 to 8319 A000 to AOFFH 2000 to 207 LO to 2047 3 3 3 M 0 to 2047 Bit 8320 to 8447 2000 to 20FFH 2080 to 20FFH MO to 2047 3 3 4 50 Oto 15 Word 8448 to 8463 even 2100 to 210F 500 to 15 Ort H 3000 to 00 3 7 335 5 0 to 63 Bit 8464 to 8467 2200 to 2207 2110 to 2113H 5 0 to 63 3 3 6 1 For the address specification method for each data format refer to the following x 3 4 Message Formats Formats 1 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection GOT F900 series microcomputer connection Digital Electronics Corporation s memory link method 4E frame QnA compatible 3E frame Formats 3 4 Formats 5 Formats 6 7 Formats 8 9 2 When reusing GOT900 Series project data GOT A900 Series virtual devices DO to 2047 Can be used as they are without changing the assignments GOT F900 Series virtual devices Since some of the assigned virtual device values differ as indicated below change the assignment using device batch edit of GT Designer3 Refer to the following manual for device
128. settings are completed 9 6 9 PC REMOTE CONNECTION 9 2 Serial Connection Settings for the video RGB equipment 2 4 r Video RGB Input Destination Extend F 1st Setting Unit Name GT27 V4 Z GT27 VARIZZ Video Window Windows First Device 1 1 Contents Device Video RGB Input Common Video RGB Transparent Color 0 65535 Clip X Position Y Position Width Height Video Window1 CH No Sue X Position Y Position 3 1 Select Common Peripheral Setting Video RGB Input from the menu 2 Set the interface to which the video RGB equipment is connected 3 Checkthe Use Video RGB Input to set the function For details on the function setting refer to the following manual gt GT Designer3 GOT2000 Help 4 Clicking the detail setting button displays the Communication Detail Settings dialog box for each communication driver Make the settings according to the usage environment 57 9 2 4 Communication detail settings Click the OK button when settings are completed Setting for the driver To Channels No 5 to 8 multiple PC Remote Operation cannot be set 9 2 5 Installing and setting up computer remote operation driver Install and set up the remote personal computer operation driver to the personal computer For installing and setting up
129. simultaneously the GOT may not receive all the commands Retry sending the commands on the controller to receive them on the GOT again Station monitoring function The microcomputer connection Ethernet does not support the station monitoring function B interrupt output The interrupt output is effective only at TCP IP connection At UDP IP connection the interrupt output is not enabled LE 2 12 I E E z E o 2 2 O 14 E 2 O o x 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 73 3 8 Precautions 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 8 Precautions MODBUS CONNECTIONS 4 MODBUS R RTU 4 1 5 MODBUS RYyTCP 5 1 9 MODBUS R RTU CONNECTION 4 1 Connectable Model List 1 235323 29 en raa un 4 2 5 4 2 System 4 3 4 3 Connection Diagram 4 4 2 44 GOT Side 4 8 4 5 MODBUS R RTU Equipment Side Setting 4 10 72 4 6 Precautions 555545 5355646 REGE 4 13 D m Q 4 1 4 MODBUS R RTU CONNECTION 4 1 Connectable Model List GOT2000 Series products support the master function of MODBUS communication the open FA network Thus the GOT can be connected with each MODBUSS slave For applicable MODBUS
130. stop bit length for Stop Bit communications 1bit 2bits LE Default 1bit o Specify whether or not to 2 perform a parity check how None 5 Parity it is performed during Even communication Odd c um 2 12 Set the time period for a Timeout Time communication to time out 3 to 90sec Default 30sec Set this item to adjust the transmission timing of the Delay Time communication request from the 0 to 300ms GOT Default Oms Set this item when selecting the XON XOFF control for the XON XOFF control method None Default XON XOFF Control Method j When using the hard copy function set to 8bit 12 PRINTER CONNECTION 12 5 12 3 GOT Side Settings 12 4 Precautions Connection disconnection of USB cable during print operation When the USB cable is disconnected during print operation the printer hangs up depending on the model of PictBridge compatible printer In this case turn on the main power of the printer and then restart it When a printer cannot perform print operation While the initialization of the printer is being carried out at boot time some models of PictBridge compatible printers send Print Ready signal to GOT If printing operation is started from GOT an error will occur and the printing operation will be disabled If this occurs restart a printer with the following procedure 1 Disconnect the USB cable from the printer 2 Tumthe power of
131. the OK button when settings are completed Pon MEME The settings of connecting equipment can be set and confirmed in I F Communication Setting For details refer to the following 257 1 1 2 communication setting 11 8 11 VIDEO RGB CONNECTION 11 4 GOT Side Settings 11 4 2 Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment E gt Detail Setting Driver Video RGB Item Description Range Video Input Set the video input signal NTSC PAL Signal Default NTSC Video Set the video resolution an 5 Ps 1 Resolution Default 640 x 480 768x576 51 When NTSC format is selected the resolution is fixed to 640 x 480 2 For GT2710 V and GT2708 V the resolution is fixed to 640 x 480 1 Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual gt GOT2000 Series User s Manual Utility 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 11 4 3 Setting the video RGB function Settings for the video RGB equipment Set the video RGB function 2 4 For the video RGB function setting refer to the following Video RGB Input
132. the printer OFF 3 Disconnectthe power supply cable of the printer and stop the printer completely 4 Connect the power supply cable to the printer 5 Turn the power of the printer ON and wait until the initialization processing of the printer is completed 6 Connect the USB cable to the printer For the handling errors occurred on the printer refer to the following lt Manual for the printer being used 12 6 12 PRINTER CONNECTION 12 4 Precautions 19 MULTIMEDIA CONNECTION 13 1 Connectable Model 16 13 2 13 2 System 13 2 13 3 Connection Diagram 13 4 13 4 GOT Side 13 5 13 5 PrecaullOns se d esscceveddad debe S ans 13 8 MULTIMEDIA CONNECTION 13 MULTIMEDIA CONNECTION 13 1 Connectable Model List For the type of CF card that can be inserted or connectable video camera types refer to the following Technical News gt List of valid devices applicable for GOT2000 series GOT D 0064 Before making the multimedia connection Update the software version of the multimedia unit to the latest version For the version upgrade of the multimedia unit refer to the following manual gt GOT2000 Series User s Manual Utility 13 2 System Configuration 13 2 1 Saving video image and displaying it on
133. the remote personal computer operation driver refer to the following manual 3 GT Designer3 GOT2000 Help 9 2 6 Precautions Personal computer side setting Before using the remote personal computer operation function install the remote personal computer operation driver on the personal computer After the driver installation check that the driver is correctly installed For details of the remote personal computer operation driver refer to the following manual GT Designer3 GOT2000 Help 9 PC REMOTE CONNECTION 9 2 Serial Connection 9 7 z E 2 2 O o E o a 9 3 Ethernet Connection 9 3 1 System Configuration Communication driver Lom Extended function OS Communication driver PC remote operation Ethernet Ethernet system Connection type dependent Connection cable Varies according to the connection type Maximum GOT Number of Personal computer Connection cable segment PLC connectable length Option device Model equipment 100BASE TX Shielded twisted pair cable STP or unshielded twisted pair cable For the system 1 To be selected by the UTP of category 5 or higher m configuration between 100 Built into GOT ter for 1 user 1
134. there is an error in the 0 0 0 paa response from the SEC MS ME B 02 52 44H 30H 30H 32H 31H 30H 31H 03 42 44 Batch Displays 0 on wom 00 0 c numerical the numerical Writes an initial value to value value display Sum check is performed in this range device 021 display write b i 2 pk on base screen 4 Displays the receive packet structure of the batch write response a packet 7 packet When Issues the receiving current Batch When normally operated When an error occurred response to value numerical ACK NAK writing to acquisition vale frre FF c device 021 request to display read don from the device packet Increments the 021 numerical value Creates the displayed on 5 Displays the receive packet structure of the batch read response next device base screen 1 packet value 021 The host side When normally operated When an error occurred When Calculates repeats T T T T receiving the sum Processing on STX Data ETX Sum check NAK response nae coros edm any data according to device D21 09 Packet 1 is displayed O3H data section 158 from the Issues the Batch 1 10 D i ap Reception of GOT update numerical Sum check is performed in this range tof value response
135. where the sum check error 06H has occurred 2 28 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 5 Message Formats 2 Batch write in word units WD command a When writing to a word device The following shows as example of writing 0064H and 0065dH to virtual devices D100 and 0101 0000H 4 0000H 4 Before execution After execution lt 12 Item Message format Uu T T T T T T T T T T 2 STX Command Address Number of Data 1 D100 Data 2 D101 grx Sum points ST ES 7 Check Request message Ww D 0 1 0 0 0 2 0 0 6 4 0 0 6 5 5 6 m host GOT 02 57H 44 30H 31H 30H 30 30H 32 30H 30H 36H 34 30H 30H 36H 5 034 35H 36H z 0 7H A a 0 0 0 H L 5 4 gt Sum check is performed this range o 4 um Response message ACK 2 duringnormal fe communication host O 12 format 1 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection format 1 15 Response message during faulty format 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection format 2 communication GOT host The above is a case where the sum check error 06H has occurred 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 29 2 5 Message Formats b When writing to a bit device The following shows an example of writing 1 s to vir
136. 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 4 o Sum check is performed in this range c Character section E 4 2 T T T T T T a Command Sub command Requestmessage host 0 9 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 o 39H 30H 314 30H 30H 30H 30H 0 0 0 O Character C section 4 gt Year data Month data Day data Hour data Minute data Second a data weekdata 1 0 4 0 6 0 1 1 8 4 6 4 9 0 2 30H 4 30H 30H 31H 31H 8 34H 36 34H 9 30H 32 0j L H Example Format 7 QnA compatible 4C frame format 1 T T T T T T T inati ans Host Response message ACK Frame ID Station No Network PLC No Request destination equest destination 1 ion No Add No during normal _ 4 No TEM TT RENT No rcm ete eng odule VO No PIS station N 22255 radi communication F 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 GOT host 46H 8 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30 30H 30H P D D Continued to next page 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 47 2 5 Message Formats Item Example Format 7 QnA compatible 4C frame format 1 Message format From previous page T T T
137. 000 series GOT A 0064 System configuration between the GOT and PLC For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC refer to each chapter 57 GOT2000 Series Connection Manual Mitsubishi Product For Works3 Version1 GOT2000 Series Connection Manual Non Mitsubishi Product 1 GT Works3 Version1 gt GOT2000 Series Connection Manual Non Mitsubishi Product 2 For GT Works3 Version1 GOT2000 Series Connection Manual Microcomputer MODBUS Products Peripherals For GT Works3 Version1 12 2 12 PRINTER CONNECTION 12 1 Connectable Model List 12 2 2 Connecting to serial printer di s Printer Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 Printer serial Extended function OSllECommunication driver Connection type dependent Varies according to the connection type Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 GOT Model name For connectable printers and system equipment refer to the following Technical News List of valid devices applicable for GOT2000 series GOT A 0064 1 The RS 232 cable differs depending on the specification of the printer Model name RS 232 cable 1 the printer to be used xf Model name Option device Model Built into GOT GT15 RS2 9P PLC For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC refer to each chapter Number of connecta
138. 00bps Set this item when change the data length used for Data Bit communication with the connected 7bits 8bits equipment Default 8bits Specify the stop bit length for Stop Bit communications 1bit 2bits Default 1bit Specify whether or not to perform None Parity a parity check and how it is Even performed during communication Odd Default Even 8 4 1 Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual gt GOT2000 Series User s Manual Utility 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 8 BAR CODE READER CONNECTION 8 3 GOT Side Settings 8 4 System Configuration Examples A system configuration example for bar code reader connection is shown below System configuration Read data 123456789 9 DO 00 09x Read bytes 27 1 D 3 D2 339 5 Barcode D3 358 Stored data 8 T 1 ps SP 9 20H 39H 23456789 lt GoT gt V V 3 remm L Eg 5 E 9
139. 01010 Result 111011010 MMMMMMMM MMMMMMMM 33222222 22222222 10987654 00000000 33333333 98765432 Request message host GOT format 4 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection Binary T Com Station Number No of points Following D 1FH 02 3 Write Write specification Address1 Bit specification Address2 Bit ____ patem2 ____ 1 20H 03 80 0 20H 40H 50 mc i CES write write specification1 1 specification2 0 Source data 1 0 1 110 Source data 11010101 bit pattern 10000000 bit pattern 0100000 Result 00101010 Result 1111411010110 MMMMMMMM MMMMMMMM 33222222 22222222 10987654 00000000 33333333 98765432 Response message ACK during normal fe communication GOT host 06H Response message NAK during faulty E communication GOT host 15H 3 38 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 4 Message Formats 72 The write specification specifies how the data of the specified address is changed in the bit pattern Writ 5 i Function Description Action example specification Original data 1010 ON 0 Bits set to 1 by the bit pattern are turned ON Bit pattern 1100 specification Result 1110 Original data 1010 OFF 1 VD Bits set to 1 by the bit pattern
140. 035 L2034 L2033 L2032 AOFEH 8319 207FH L2047 L2046 L2045 L2044 L2043 L2042 L2041 L2040 AOFFH 1 For the address specification method for each data format refer to the following 2 5 Message Formats Formats 1 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection Formats 3to6 A compatible 1C frame Formats 7 to 10 QnA compatible 3C 4C frame Formats 11 to 13 Digital Electronics Corporation s memory link method Formats 14 15 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection 2 For reading or writing data in word units specify the addresses 16 point units Example LO L16 132 etc 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 4 Device Data Area 2 4 4 M devices The M devices are bit devices into which user data are stored All of these devices can be used as a user area List of M devices and differences in address specification by data format The following shows the M devices virtual devices inside the GOT The address specification values different depending on the data format are also given below 1 For the address specification method for each data format refer to the following gt 2 5 Message Formats Formats 1 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection Formats 3to6 A compatible 1C frame Formats 7 to 10 QnA compatible 3C 4C frame Formats 11 to 13
141. 0H 30H 31H 31H 38H 34H 36 34H 39 30H 34H Response message O H 148 D 0 D D P 14 0 during normal communication GOT host format 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection Binary Year Month Day Hour Minute Second Day of data data data data data data weekdata 09H OAH 01 12H 2EH 31H 04 LE 2 124 I E E z E o 2 2 O 14 E 2 O o x code during faulty 15H 06H communication host The above is a case where the sum check error 06H has occurred 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 27 3 4 Message Formats 6 Set clock data TS command The following shows an example of setting the clock data of GOT Assuming the clock data of GOT is to be set to 2009 October 1 18 46 49 Thursday Time display 2009 10 01 18 46 49 THU After execution Item Message format format 1 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection ASCII Second Day of data week data Command Year data Month data Day data Hour data Minute data 54H 53H 30 39H 31H 30H 30H 31H 31H 38H 34H 36H 34H 39H 30H 34H H D H D 9 D H D D 9 L H 0 0 0
142. 1 80H OOH T cem 00000000000000011000000000000000 11111198765432103322222222221111 543210 1098765432109876 Response message ACK during normal fT communication 06 GOT host Error code Response message during faulty ieri 15H communication host The above is a case where the sum check error 06H has occurred 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 4 Message Formats 3 Random read in word units RR command The following shows an example of reading the two points of the virtual devices D100 and MO to M15 Assuming 0100 0064 0 1 stored 0064 M15 to OF 0001H Item Message format format 1 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection ASCII E T 2 Address 1 Address 2 c R R R 1 0 8 2 0 I 52 52 30H 31H 30H 30 38H 33H 32H 30H m H 40 10 Request message i 2 host format 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection Binary 2 T T o Command Address 1 Address 2 z z O R 00H 644 20H
143. 1 Software related to GOT Abbreviations and generic terms GT Works3 Description SW1DNC GTW3 J SW1DND GTW3 J SW1DNC GTW3 E SW1DND GTW3 E SW1DND GTW3 C GT Designer3 Version1 Screen drawing software GT Designer3 for GOT2000 GOT1000 series GT Designer3 GT Designer3 GOT2000 Screen drawing software for GOT2000 series included in GT Works3 GT Designer3 GOT1000 Screen drawing software for GOT1000 series included in GT Works3 GT Simulator3 Screen simulator GT Simulator3 for GOT2000 GOT 1000 GOT900 series GT SoftGOT2000 Monitoring software GT SoftGOT2000 series GT Converter2 Data conversion software GT Converter2 for GOT1000 GOT900 series GT Designer2 Classic Screen drawing software GT Designer2 Classic for GOT900 series GT Designer2 Screen drawing software GT Designer2 for GOT1000 GOT900 series DU WIN 2 Software related to iQ Works Abbreviations and generic terms Screen drawing software FX PCS DU WIN for GOT F900 series Description iQ Works Abbreviation of iQ Platform compatible engineering environment MELSOFT iQ Works MELSOFT Navigator Generic term for integrated development environment software included in the SW DNC IQWK iQ Platform compatible engineering environment MELSOFT iQ Works n indicates a version 3 Other software Abbreviations and generic terms Description SWaDNC GXW2 J JA JAZ type programmable controller eng
144. 1 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 GS238 128 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 2 z o X 2 a a 22 5 a t a b For the Ethernet multiple connection or the temperature controller connection The station number to which each device corresponds changes according to the connection non connection with Ethernet With Ethernet connection 1 to 128 With other than Ethernet connection 0 to 127 Example With Ethernet connection when PC No 100 CPU connecting to Ch3 is faulty GS327 b3 is set The following table shows the case with Ethernet connection Device Station number Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO GS281 GS301 GS321 GS341 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 GS282 GS302 GS322 GS342 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 GS283 GS303 GS323 GS343 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 GS284 GS304 GS324 GS344 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 GS285 GS305 GS325 GS345 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 GS286 GS306 GS326 GS346 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 05287 GS307 GS327 GS347 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97
145. 1 Connectable Model List 1 System configuration between the GOT and PLC For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC refer to each chapter gt Mitsubishi Products Non Mitsubishi Products 1 Non Mitsubishi Products 2 257 Microcomputer MODBUS Products Peripherals 10 3 GOT Side Settings 10 3 1 VNC R server function setting 10 3 2 Setting communication interface Communication settings For using the 9 server Ethernet communication drivers must be set on the GOT and set the Communication settings Server Connection Setting The following settings are required for the use of VNC Server b Setting of Ethernet driver License registration in GOT Controller Setting Port No 5900 HE cH2 None Controler 5 0 05 Q17nD M NC DR CRnD 700 Network Duplex Setti 3 ZE Routing Informati Please set the Ethernet Setting of the Controller with a Ist of lower Ek Gateway ve Standard F Ethernet Mutti Fp Communication 43 Gateway Serve Ethernet MELSEC Q17nNC CRnD 700 Gateway 128 Gateway Client he Detail Setting GOT Ethemet Setting FTP Server Manufacturer MITSUBISHI Connecting Password Operation Monitoring password Use exclusive password for monitoring VNC R SERVER CONNECTION
146. 1444144444 44444444 42442223 00 week 0 0 0 0 0 9 1 0 0 1 1 8 4 6 4 9 0 4 30H 30H 39H 31H 30H 30H 31H 31H 38 34H 36H 34H 9 30 34H Of O H 0 09 0 O H oO oO 9 D gt Data length target data format 9 QnA compatible frame Binary Network PLC Request End d Year Month Day Hour Minute Second Day of Subheader Wo No No 10046 data length nd code data data data data data data week data DOH OOH 01H 01H OOH OOH OOH 09H OOH OOH OOH 09 OAH 01 12H 2 31H 04H Data length target data 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 4 Message Formats Continued to next page From previous page Item Message format format 8 QnA compatible 3E frame ASCII Subheader T T T T Request destination Request module I O No module station No Response data length T Network D 0 o fo 1 0 14 0 010 of 0 1 9 44H 30H 30H 30H 30H 31 30H 31H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 31H 36H w m oO oO T T T T T T Network Request destination 2909 End code No PEG Nd module I O No moue stion no 0 0 5 610 olo 0 1 30H 35H 36 30H 30 30H 30H 30H 30H 30 30H 30H
147. 2 Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment Property Value GOT Net No 1 GOT Station 1 GOT Wireless LAN Setting 192 168 4 20 Item Description Range GOT Net No Set the network No of the GOT 1 to 239 Default 1 GOT Station Set the station No of the GOT 1 to 64 Default 1 Displays the set GOT IP address in the GOT Wireless LAN I F Setting dialog 3 5 2 3 wireless LAN setting 1 Communication interface setting by Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication Settings after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual 57 GOT2000 Series User s Manual Utility 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective GOT wireless LAN Setting 15 WIRELESS LAN CONNECTION 15 3 15 2 GOT Side Settings WIRELESS LAN CONNECTION 15 2 3 wireless LAN I F setting Peripheral S W Communication Port No Transparent Port No i EN GOT Wireless LAN Setting V Reflect GOT wireless LAN I F setting in GOT This setting is shared by other Ethernet driver settings GOT IP Address 192 168 4 20 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 5015 5014 Comi Item Descr
148. 2 NULL 0x00 3 Select Common Peripheral Setting RFID from the menu Set the interface to which the RFID controller is connected Check the Use RFID to set the function For details on the function setting refer to the following manual gt GT Designer3 GOT2000 Help Clicking the detail setting button displays the Communication Detail Settings dialog box for each communication driver Make the settings according to the usage environment 57 14 3 2 Communication detail settings Click the OK button when settings are completed 1 Communication interface setting When Channel No 8 is used the following external devices which use Channel No 8 cannot be connected at the same time Barcode reader that requires the power supply When connecting the above mentioned devices at the same time set RFID to Channels No 5 to 7 2 Setting for the driver To Channels No 5 to 8 multiple RFID cannot be set 14 3 2 Communication detail settings ni 1 Communication interface setting by the Utility se FEE The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project property data ee For details on the Utility refer to the following Data Bit Stop Bit manuals Users Manual of GOT used Sum Check Retry Times 2 Precedence in communication settings Timeout Time Sec When settings ar
149. 25 Specify the maximum number input register read times Other than above 125 0 800 Function Code OF 1 to 1968 Specify the maximum number GS595 GS602 GS609 GS616 Specification for the max number of Other than above 1968 multiple coil write times When of GS570 is 1 the function code OF is not used and therefore the setting of GS575 will be disabled 0 100 Function Code 10 1 to 123 Specify the maximum number GS596 GS603 GS610 GS617 Specification for the max number of Other than above 123 multiple holding register write times When Bit1 of GS570 is 1 the function code 10F is not used and therefore the setting of GS576 will be disabled 4 MODBUS R RTU CONNECTION 4 5 MODBUS R RTU Equipment Side Setting 4 5 2 Station number setting In the MODBUS network a maximum of 31 MODBUS RTU equipment can be connected to one GOT Assign a non overlapped station number ranging from 1 to 247 arbitrarily to each MODBUS RTU equipment In the system configuration the MODBUS RTU equipment with the station number set with the host address must be included The station number can be set without regard to the cable connection order There is no problem even if station numbers are not consecutive Station Station Station GOT No 3 No 15 No 1 i Pr
150. 2H 31H 35H 32H 30 30H 0 30H 34H 03 35H 41H Request message 0 0 W H o host gt gt Sum check is performed in this range i T T T T Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 222 8 M23 to 16 08110551 rues 0 1 0 0 0 0 8 0 31H 30H 30 30H 38H 30H H L B D 9 D H D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 OO MMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMM 76543210111111982222111133222222 543210 3210987610987654 Response message ACK duringnormal communication GOT host 06H Response message NAK during faulty fe communication GOT host 15H 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 65 2 5 Message Formats 3 Multi point write in bit units 3 command w out station No multi point write in bit units D command w station No The following shows an example of turning OFF the virtual device M31 and turning ON the virtual device M2038 on the GOT at station No 31 Item Message format format 14 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection format 1 STX station No CR D 3 1 0 2 Following 02H 44H 33H 31H 30H 32H H L H L format 15 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection format 2 T ji T STX Com Station No Number of ETX Sum check 11 ponts 0000000 D 3 1 0 2
151. 3 4 2 List of commands Timeout error 105 There is no response from the GOT or the station of the specified address does not exist Check the communication cable and communication module attachment Check the settings of Communication Detail Settings Review the contents of the message to transmit Multiple units not connectable Check the communication cable and communication module attachment 106 The RS 232 port is occupied Check the settings of Communication Detail Settings Check to see if the RS 232 port is occupied armor Review the contents of the message to transmit 6 107 M Check whether the non existent data is set e g setting 07 The setting value of the clock data has error 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 3 Device Data Area at the day of the week as clock data Differences in address specifications by data format The address specification of devices varies depending on the data format The following shows the address specification values for each data format Address specification value Address Formats 1 2 Formats 3 42 Formats 5 Formats 6 to 9 2100 2100 2101 SDO 8448 2 A c 2100 5 0 2101 Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits 2102 2102 2103 E
152. 3 7 3 3 Device Data Area 3 3 2 devices The R devices are word devices into which user data are stored All of these devices can be used as a user area List of R devices and differences in address specification by data format The following shows the R devices virtual devices inside the GOT The address specification values different depending on the data format are also given below Address specification value Address Format Format Format Format 22 3 4 5 6 to 9 0000 0000 0001 DO 4096 S 1000 RO 00014 Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits 0002 0002 0003 1 4097 MU S 1001H R1 0003H Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits 1 1 1 04095 8191 S 1 R4095 1FFFH Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits 1 For the address specification method for each data format refer to the following 5 3 4 Message Formats Formats 1 2 Formats 3 4 Formats 5 Formats 6 7 Formats 8 9 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection GOT F900 series microcomputer connection Digital Electronics Corporation s memory link method 4E frame QnA compatible 3E frame 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 3 Device Data Area 3 3 3 L devices The L devices are bit devices into which user data are stored All of these devices can be used as a user area List of L devices and differences in address specification by d
153. 5 MODBUS R TCP CONNECTION 5 7 Precautions The following actions may improve the communication performance Using a switching hub More high speed by 100BASE TX 100Mbps Reduction of the monitoring points on GOT MODBUS communication control function on the GS device At GOT startup set MODBUS communication control function with project scripts etc If settings are changed after communication start a communication error may occur r Script Pret Y Screen Script Symbol Option Order Script No Comment TriagerType Add 1 No 1 Rise GB40 5557 100 Real Coil Status wGS572 100 Real Input Status 100pt 05573 100 Input Rei 100pt 65574 100 Holding ster 100 wGS575 50 Multiple Coils wGS576 50 Write Multiple Register 50pt m Edit Script Setting example for project script CONNECTIONS TO PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT 6 CONNECTION TO SOUND OUTPUT UNIT 6 1 7 CONNECTION EXTERNAL I O DEVICE 7 1 8 BARCODE READER 8 1 9 PC REMOTE 9 1 10 VNC R SERVER CONNECTION 10 1 11 VIDEO ROB CONNECTION Rr was 11 1 12 PRINTER CONNECTION 12 1 13 MULTIMEDIA CONNECTION 13 1
154. 7 1 1 2 communication setting 4 8 4 MODBUS R RTU CONNECTION 4 4 GOT Side Settings Make the settings according to the usage environment Property Value Transmission Speed BPS 19200 Data Bit 8 bit Stop Bit 1 bit Parity Even Retry Times 3 Timeout Time Sec 3 Host Address 1 Delay Time ms 0 32bit Storage LH Order FunctionCode 0F Used FunctionCode 10 Used Coil read times Points 2000 Input relay read times Points 2000 Holding rehister read times Points 125 Input register read times Points 125 Coil write times Points 800 Holding register wrtite times Point 100 Item Description Range Set this item when change the 9600bps Transmission transmission speed used for 19200bps Speed communication with the connected 38400bps equipment 57600bps Default 19200bps 115200bps Set this item when change the data Data Bit length used for communication with 7bits 8bits the connected equipment Default 8bits Specify the stop bit length for Stop Bit communications 1bit 2bits Default 1bit Specify whether or not to perform a parity check and how it is performed Parity during communication Odd Default Even Set the number of retries to be Retry performed when a communication 0 to 5times error occurs Default 3times Set the time period for a Timeout Time communication to time out 1 to 30sec Default 3sec Specif
155. 7885 Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits 30071 210 3008 210 3008 210 3009 507 8455 09007 607 2107 A x 21081 Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits 3009 2110 300 21 JUR SODA 211 1 300 08 8456 09008 SD8 2108 A S 8 Lower 8 bits 300 2112 300 21129430069 21 13 63000 SD9 8457 D9009 SD9 2109 2134 Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits 1 2 For the address specification method for each data format refer to the following 2 5 Message Formats Formats 1 2 Formats 3 to 6 Formats 7 to 10 Formats 11 to 13 Formats 14 15 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection A compatible 1C frame QnA compatible 3C 4C frame Digital Electronics Corporation s memory link method GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection 503 to 9 correspond to GDO to 6 on the GOT F900 Series Access to SD3 to 9 can be also made by the specification of the addresses 3000 to 300DH of GDO to 6 on the GOT F900 Series 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 4 Device Data Area 24 6 SM devices The SM devices are bit devices into which interrupt outputs and clock data that turn ON OFF at 1 second cycles List of SM devices The following shows the SM devices virtual devices inside the GOT Address Description Set side Interrupt output When the ON OFF state of SMO to 49 is changed by a touch switch on th
156. 8 XD04 XD05 45 A18 XD05 For GT15 DIO XD06 21 B17 XD06 Connection diagram 1 XDO7 46 A17 7 External unit side Terminal block converter side ADOS XD09 47 18 20 XD00 XDOA 23 XD01 43 A20 XD01 XDOB 48 XD02 19 B19 XD02 XDOC 24 XD03 44 A19 XD03 XDOD 49 XD04 20 B18 XD04 XDOE 25 XD05 45 A18 XD05 XDOF 50 XD06 21 B17 XD06 XSCNOO 14 B16 XSCNOO XD07 46 A17 XD07 XSCNO1 39 A16 XSCNO1 XD08 22 XSCNO2 15 B15 XSCNO2 XD09 47 XSCNO3 40 A15 5 XDOA 23 5 04 16 B14 5 04 48 XSCNO5 41 A14 XSCNO5 XDOC 24 XSCNO06 17 B13 5 06 49 XSCNO7 42 13 XSCNO7 o XDOE 25 YDOO 6 B12 YDOO m XDOF 50 YDO1 31 A12 YDO1 a XSCNOO 14 B16 XSCNOO YD02 7 B11 02 XSCNO1 39 A16 XSCNO1 YDO3 32 11 003 XSCNO2 15 B15 XSCNO2 YD04 8 B10 YD04 XSCNO3 40 ats XSCNO3 YDOS ato 005 lt 5 04 16 B14 5 4 YD06 9 B9 06 2 XSCNO5 41 A14 5 05 07 34 9 07 XSCNO6 17 B13 XSCNO6 YDO8 10 Bs 08 XSCNO7 42 A13 5 07 YDO9 35 09 YDOO 6 B12 YDOO YDOA 11 B7 YDOA YDO1 31 12 YDO1 YDOB 36 YDOB LE YD02 T B11 YD02 YDOC 12 B6 YDOC z 03 32 YDOS YDOD 37 as YDOD YD04 8 B10 YD04 YDOE 13 B5 YDOE 05 33 10 05 YDOF 38 A5 YDOF m YDO6 9 B9 06 RUN 30 z YDO7 34 AQ YDO7 DC24V 4 e B4 24V 2 YDO8 10 Bs 08 24 4 24V 09 35 a
157. 80H o 4 format 1 900 Series microcomputer connection ASCII n T T T T T T Data 1 D100 Data 2 M15 to 0 PME o 0 6 4 0 0 0 1 O 30H 36H 34H 30H 30H 30H 31H 5 Z 0 0000000000000001 MMMMMMMMMMMMMMMM 1111119876543210 Response message 543210 during normal communication format 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection Binary host T T Data 1 Data 2 0100 M15 to 0 00H 64H OOH 01 0000000000000001 1111119876543210 543210 Error NA code Response message during faulty 15H communication GOT host The above is a case where the sum check error has occurred 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 25 3 4 Message Formats 4 Random write in word units RW command The following shows an example of writing 0064H and 1 to virtual devices D100 and MO respectively 0000H 4 m 0000H 4 Ju Before execution After execution Item Message format format 1 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection ASCII T T ij T 2 Command Address 1 Data 1 D100 Address 2 Data 2 M15 to 0 R wj o 1 0
158. 9 peo peo 5 Ho HoT edpeo1 p relay etc DC24V 7 10 7 CONNECTION EXTERNAL I O DEVICE 7 3 Connection Diagram 7 3 3 Connection cable between Connection diagram 8 external I O unit and operation For 16 point input nel 2 5 5 1 oO Oo XD02 The connection cable between the external I O unit and the S operation panel must be prepared by the user referring to 2 2 XD05 the followings 8 2 XD08 For GT15 DIO XD09 XDOA Connection diagram 7 8 3 XDOB External unit side Original operation panel XDOD 18 moO O XD01 43 01 0 XD02 19 XD02 XSCNOO XD03 44 gt XD03 A ND XD04 20 XD04 XSCNO3 XD05 45 XD05 5 04 XD06 21 XD06 XSCNO05 7 46 XD07 XSCNO6 08 22 XD08 j ASENOT XD09 47 XDOA 23 XDOA 48 For 128 point input 1 24 _ 070 X060 X050 2 040 X030 _ 020 _X010 272 X000 XDOD 49 9 9j 9 94 9 9j 9 94 9 9 9 04 0 04 o 0 XDOE 25 9 5 9 94 9 9 994
159. ARDOM in a specified period When the GOT does not communicate with STARDOM in a specified period during the GOT is turned on STARDOM disconnects the line for the GOT As the line is disconnected the GOT displays an error when the GOT monitors STARDAM after the disconnection After the error displayed as the system alarm No 402 timeout error on the GOT the normal communication is recovered and the GOT can monitor STARDOM z E 2 2 O O E 5 e o 5 MODBUS R TCP CONNECTION 5 15 5 6 Example of Connection 5 7 Precautions When connecting to multiple GOTs 1 Setting PLC No When connecting two or more in the MODBUS TCP network set each PLC No to the GOT 227 5 3 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings 2 Setting IP address Do not use the IP address 192 168 3 18 when using multiple GOTs A communication error may occur on the GOT with the IP address When setting IP address Do not use 0 and 255 at the end of an IP address Numbers of 0 and 255 are used by the System The GOT may not monitor the controller correctly with the above numbers Consult with the administrator of the network before setting an IP address to the GOT and controller When connecting to the multiple network equipment including GOT in a segment By increasing the network load the transmission speed between the GOT and PLC may be reduced 5 16
160. CN6 A13 XSCN7 A6TBY36 E gt a 4 lt 2 E X O E z E o 2 2 O o O 24V i UJ 10201 D 5 7 CONNECTION EXTERNAL I O DEVICE 7 7 7 3 Connection Diagram Connection diagram 4 When using 54 connector terminal block module User created original operation panel 001 XDO2 XD04 XDO5 XDOG6 XD07 71 1245 oo 4 73 1 74 76 1 76 TA GOSH 00 09 13100 9 400 00 6 5 7 50 00 6455 6 05 6505 oo 65 09 6 5 06 5455 51409 52406 535 5455 50455 56 59 5405 5 05 4025 4000 9 4165 420 4405 455 405 46 60 XSCNO4 3060 9 3106 3205 3455 30 09 32165 36455 4 31 55 XSCNO3 20400 0 21400 22459 2310 S 2406 25 00 42605 2405 XSCNO2 12455 0 13450 45S 4 19455 4 165
161. CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 4 Message Formats Message Formats The following shows the message format of the dedicated commands for a microcomputer connection of GOT 1 Batch read in word units R command The following shows an example of reading the two points of the virtual devices D100 and D101 Assuming 0100 0102 D101 0304H are stored 0102 4 0304 Item Message format Data length Esc Com Address Number _ mand of points Request message host gt GOT 42H OOH OOH 00 OOH OOH OOH 1 52H OOH 64 OOH 02 T Response message Data length ESC Address Mumbar mand of points during normal ees communication host 42H OOH OOH 00 OOH OOH OOH 1BH 41H 01 02 03H 04H 2 Batch write in word units WD command a When writing to a word device The following shows as example of writing 0064H and 0065H to virtual devices D100 and 0101 0000H 4 0000H 4 LE 2 124 I E u z E o 2 2 O 14 E 2 O o a Before execution After execution Item Message format T T 1 Data length ESC Com Address Number Data 1 mand of points Request message 222222 77777777777 777 7777 77777777 Mo c d
162. Connecting to bar code tenebant nbn dash na 8 2 8 3 GOT Side Settings nenatis ende teda ei deve sedet eden e se 8 3 8 3 1 Setting communication 8 3 8 32 Communication detail 8 4 84 System Configuration 8 5 98 5 Precautions tee tees a ERR ERA cade em SEHEN E 8 7 9 PC REMOTE CONNECTION 9 1 Connectable Model List rsrsrsrs ee ener 9 2 9 2 esed pes boc ap ddp 8 4 9 3 927 System Configuration 2 2 ete e em Un ee eres 9 3 9 22 Connection Diagram niodo ced ete acida da Lo ded 9 4 9 2 3 GOT Side Settiligs oe cited fte e P eer ertet re desi eres 9 5 9 2 4 Communication detail emere 9 5 9 2 5 Installing and setting up computer remote operation 9 7 9 2 6 Precautlonsz 5 scuto eee TIER emen iet odes 9 7 9 3 Ethernet Gonrnectloh 2 22 9 8 9 3 4 System Configuration 9 8 9 3 2 GOT SIde Settings eo aeu ern o eer been teet 9 9 9 3 3 Install and setting the required 9 9 9 3 4 Precautioris 2o ute a Pe bertus ee eo eder bod Lati 9 9 10 V
163. Digital Electronics Corporation s memory link method Formats 14 15 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection l Address Address specification value lt Model Format Format Format Format Format D 7 bi b b4 b b2 b1 bi 2 ij 1 2 306 71010 110013 14 15 o M7 M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 MO 2000 2 8320 208080 15 14 13 12 M11 M10 M9 M8 2 001 o M23 M22 M21 M20 M19 M18 M17 M16 2002 LLI 8321 Same as address 208184 L z M31 M30 M29 M28 M27 M26 M25 M24 column on left 2003 z 2 o M2039 M2038 M2037 M2036 M2035 M2034 M2033 M2032 20FEH a 8447 20FFH M2047 M2046 M2045 M2044 M2043 M2042 M2041 M2040 20FFH n O Q O 2 For reading or writing data in word units specify the addresses 16 point units Example MO M16 M32 and others 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 13 2 4 Device Data Area 2 4 5 SD devices The SD devices are word devices into which GOT communication errors error codes clock data and other information are stored List of SD devices The following lists the SD devices virtual devices inside the GOT Address Description Set side 100ms counter 32bits The counter is incremented at 100ms intervals after GOT is turned ON The time elapsed after GOT is turned ON is stored in 100ms units 1 When setting the LH order to 32bit Storage for the communication detail sett
164. Do not touch the conductive and electronic parts of the unit directly Doing so can cause a unit malfunction or failure The cables connected to the unit must be run in ducts or clamped Not doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged due to the dangling motion or accidental pulling of the cables or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault When unplugging the cable connected to the unit do not hold and pull from the cable portion Doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault Do not drop the module or subject it to strong shock A module damage may result Do not drop or give an impact to the battery mounted to the unit Doing so may damage the battery causing the battery fluid to leak inside the battery If the battery is dropped or given an impact dispose of it without using Before touching the unit always touch grounded metals etc to discharge static electricity from human etc Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction Use the battery manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Use of other batteries may cause a risk of fire or explosion Dispose of used battery promptly Keep away from children Do not disassemble and do not dispose of in fire Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply before replacing the battery or using the dip switch of the terminating resistor Not doing so can cause the uni
165. ELSEGNE UT KE SS communication unl Serial communication unit When using a serial communication unit A serial communication unit can be installed in any position 1st to 3rd stage of the extension interface Serial Serial communication communication 9 12 2 gt o 7 2 a 12 2 lt 12 When using the sound output unit or external I O unit The sound output unit or external I O unit can be installed in any position 1st to 3rd stage of the extension interface Example When installing a sound output unit Communication Sound output unit Communication unit Sound output unit 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 15 1 3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection When using the video input unit RGB input unit video RGB input unit RGB output unit or multimedia unit Install the video input unit RGB input unit video RGB input unit RGB output unit or multimedia unit at the 1st stage of the extension interface These communication units cannot be used if installed in the 2nd or higher stage When any of these units is used the communication units indicated below must be installed in the 2nd stage of the extension interface Communication unit Model Bus connection unit GT15 QBUS2 GT15 ABUS2 MELSECNET H communication unit GT15 J71LP23 25 GT15 J71BR13 CC Link IE Controller Network connection GT15 J71GP23
166. GOT dialog box Select the Drive information radio button of the Read Data 4 Click the Info Reception button 5 Confirm that the project data and OS are written correctly onto the GOT 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 11 1 2 Writing the Package Data onto the 1 3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection The following shows the option devices to connect in the respective connection type For the specifications usage and connecting procedure on option devices refer to the respective device manual 1 31 Communication module Product name Model Specifications GT15 QBUS For QCPU Q mode motion controller CPU Q series Bus connection 1ch unit standard mode GT45 QBUS2 For QCPU Q mode mo ion controller CPU Q series Bus connection 2ch unit standard mode GT15 ABUS For controler CPU A series Bus connection 1ch unit standard mode GT15 ABUS2 For AQRAGPU motion controler CPU A series Bus connection 2ch unit standard mode Bus connection unit For QCPU Q mode motion controller CPU Q series GT15 75QBUSL Bus connection 1ch unit s im model GT15 75QBUS2L For QCPU Q mode motio Bus connection 2ch unit s n controller CPU Q series im model For A QnACPU motion controller CPU A series GT15 75ABUSL Bus connection 1ch unit slim model For A QnACPU motion controller CPU A series GT15 75ABUS2L Bus connection 1ch unit sl
167. GT Designer3 Before using the operation panel make the operation panel setting For details refer to the following manual 257 GT Designer3 GOT2000 Help gt a 9 lt 2 E X O E z E 2 2 O 7 CONNECTION EXTERNAL I O DEVICE 7 15 7 5 Precautions 7 CONNECTION TO EXTERNAL 1 DEVICE 7 5 Precautions 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 4 8 5 BAR CODE READER CONNECTION Connectable Model 45 8 System Configuration 8 GOT Side Settings Rmo aeg 8 System Configuration Examples 8 PRECAUNONS 32 35 35 73 3 49 94 9 EORR CR 8 O1 z E 2 2 o 44 lt c Q O a 4 8 BAR CODE READER CONNECTION 8 1 Connectable Model List For connectable bar code readers and system equipment refer to the following Technical News List of valid devices applicable for GOT2000 series GOT A 0064 8 2 System Configuration 8 2 1 Connecting to bar code reader Extended function OS Communication driver Barcode Connection type dependent Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 Varies according to the connection type GOT Number of Bar code reader Connection Connection PLC connectable cable 1 cabl
168. H 36H 34H 39 30 34 D H D format 7 4E frame Binary T T T Request gt Network PLC Request destination Response type _ Serial Fixed value Wo No length Following 04 00 OOH OOH OOH OOH 01H O1H OOH 00 OOH O9H 00 Data length target range 1 7 Year Month Day Hour Minute Second Day of Mocs data data data data data QOH OOH 09H OAH 01 12 2 31H 04H 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 4 Message Formats Continued to next page From previous page Item Message format format 6 4E frame ASCII T T T T T m k T Response type Serial No Fixed value No d PLC No D 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 110 1 44H 34H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30 30H 31 30H 31 D L H L H L T T T T ig T Request destination Request destination NE module VO No sae Response data length Endoode 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 6 0 0 5 6 1 Dc 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 31H 36H 30H 30H 35H 36H l H L H O 10 m 2 Response message
169. H OOH When a wrong day of the week has been set by the clock data setting command If a wrong day of the week is set by the clock data setting commands the clock data will differ from the time displayed on the utility Example When October 1 2009 Tuesday is set by the clock data setting command the actual day of the week is Thursday Thursday THU will be displayed on the utility time display 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 4 Message Formats Error code list The following shows error code error contents cause and measures Error code Description Action 0002 Device point error Check the specified head device and number of points and correct it H The specification of device range to read write has error 3 3 Device Data Area Request command Response response type code error 0050 Code other than the specified value is set for command response type Check the command response type set in the microcomputer and correct it Device error Check the devices that can be used and the device ranges 0056 4 A non existent device has been specified 3 3 Device Data Area Device point error The command number of points specification from the microcomputer exceeds the maximum number of points processed at each process number of points processed in one communication 0057u The start address head device number to specified number of points
170. Ide Settlngs ettet eee a d eei e ER te tu ertet rite teda 5 4 5 3 1 Setting communication interface Communication 5 4 5 3 2 Communication detail eene nnns 5 4 5 9 3 GOT Ethernet eim bp ID TEE Sc enum ic 5 5 5 3 4 ERE RR 5 6 54 MODBUS RyTCP Equipment 5 7 5 5 Device Range that Can Be 2 2 1 2 2 2 1 1 10 kan 5 7 5 6 Example of Connection terree totae cte Edel 5 11 5 6 1 Connecting to SCHNEIDER PLC Modicon Premium series and Modicon Quantum Series iie bostes dec eda tel ate ee aint ft 5 11 5 6 2 Connecting to YOKOGAWA PLC 5 5 13 5 72 LPEOeCaUtloris ectetuer tee det tae f eb re e d eee duet 5 16 CONNECTIONS TO PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT 6 CONNECTION TO SOUND OUTPUT UNIT 6 1 Connectable Model 2 20 a nannten ana tnn dann the aenea 6 2 6 27 System COnfIg ration e 6 2 6 2 1 Connecting to sound output 6 2 6 3 GOT Side Settings inicie Ree 6 3 6 3 1 Setting communication
171. Interrupt output Output Output value 1 value 2 Item Message format 1 When Interrupt Data Byte in Communication Detail Settings is set to 1 byte format 1 in the case of GOT A900 Series format 2 in the case of GOT A900 Series l lt mA 12 2 E 2 2 E 2 a t microcomputer connection microcomputer connection format 1 format 2 T Output Output UE STX PU ETX Sum check 3 39H 02 39H 03 33H 43H D gt Sum check is performed in this range 2 When Interrupt Data Byte in Communication Detail Settings is set to 2 byte format 1 in the case of GOT A900 Series format 2 in the case of GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection microcomputer connection format 1 format 2 T Output Output Output Output Interrupt output value 1 value 2 STX Value 1 value 2 ETX Sum check GOT host 6 D 31H 39H 02H 31H 39H 03H 36H 44H H D e gt Sum check is performed in this range 3 When Interrupt Data Byte in Communication Detail Settings is set to 4 byte format 1 in the case of GOT A900 Series format 2 in the case of GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection microcomputer connection format 1 format 2 value3 value4 4 Sum check is performed in this range
172. J MX Component Versiona SWaD5C ACT J SWoD5C ACT JA MX Component Mn indicates a version MX Sheet Versiona SWoD5C SHEET J SWaD5C SHEET JA MX Sheet n indicates a version QnUDVCPU LCPU Logging Configuration Tool B6 License key for GT SoftGOT2000 Abbreviations and generic terms License key QnUDVCPU LCPU logging configuration tool SW1DNN LLUTL J Description GT27 SGTKEY U B7 Others Abbreviations and generic terms Description IAI IAI Corporation AZBIL Azbil Corporation OMRON OMRON Corporation KEYENCE KEYENCE CORPORATION KOYO EI KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO LTD JTEKT JTEKT Corporation SHARP Sharp Manufacturing Systems Corporation SHINKO Shinko Technos Co Ltd CHINO CHINO CORPORATION TOSHIBA TOSHIBA CORPORATION TOSHIBA MACHINE TOSHIBA MACHINE CO LTD PANASONIC Panasonic Corporation PANASONIC IDS Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co Ltd HITACHI IES Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems Co Ltd HITACHI Hitachi Ltd FUJI ELECTRIC FUJI ELECTRIC CO LTD YASKAWA YASKAWA Electric Corporation YOKOGAWA Yokogawa Electric Corporation RKC RKC INSTRUMENT INC ALLEN BRADLEY Allen Bradley products manufactured by Rockwell Automation Inc GE IP GE Intelligent Platforms KK 1515 LS Industrial Systems Co Ltd SCHNEIDER Schneider Electric SA SICK SICK AG SIEMEN
173. M 29 EN 54 The 128 point input can be executed with using a 16 point 27 input signal XDOO to with an 8 point scan signal 26 XSCNOO to XSCNO7 N C 5 2 When two or more switches are pressed simultaneously be sure to put the diode to each switch Only for 128 point input 7 CONNECTION TO EXTERNAL I O DEVICE 7 11 7 3 Connection Diagram ll For GT15 DIOR Connection diagram 9 External unit side XD00 XD01 XD02 XD03 XD04 XD05 06 XD07 XD08 XD09 XDOA XDOB XDOC XDOD XDOE XDOF XSCNOO XSCNO1 XSCNO2 XSCNO3 XSCNO04 XSCNO5 XSCNO6 XSCNO7 YDOO 01 YD02 YD03 04 05 YD06 YDO7 YD08 YD09 YDOA YDOB YDOC YDOD YDOE YDOF RUN DC24V DC24V DC24V DC24V OV OV OV OV N C 18 43 19 44 20 45 21 46 22 47 23 48 24 49 25 50 14 39 15 40 16 41 17 42 6 31 32 8 33 9 34 10 35 11 36 12 37 13 38 30 Original operation panel XD00 XD01 XD02 XD03 XD04 XD05 XD06 XD07 XD08 XD09 XDOA XDOC XDOD XDOE XDOF XSCNOO XSCNO1 XSCNO2 XSCNO3 XSCNO04 XSCNO5 Connection diagram 10 For 16 point input XSCNO6 XSCNO7 Cable for connecting an external input power supply DC24V 7 CONNECTION TO EXTERNAL I O DEVICE 7 3 Connection Diagram
174. MM 11111198765432103322222222221111 543210 1098765432109876 format 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection Binary Data 1 Data 2 M13 to 0 10431 to 16 00H 01 80H OOH 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 010 0 010 0 0 MMMMMMMMMMMMMMM 1 322222222221111 5 098765432109876 Response message during faulty communication host The above is a case where the sum check error 06 has occurred 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 4 Message Formats 2 Batch write in word units WD command a When writing to a word device The following shows as example of writing 0064H and 0065 virtual devices D100 and 0101 0000H 4 0000H 4 Before execution After execution Item Message format format 1 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection ASCII T Command Address Eu Data 1 D100 Data 2 D101 0 1 0 0 0 2 0 0 6 4 0 0 6 5 57H 44H 30H 31H 30H 30H 324 30H 30H 36H 34H 30H 30H 36H 35H 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Request message host GOT format 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection Binary T T Command Address Number Data1 Data 2 of points 0100 D101 Response message ACK during normal communication LE 2 4 I E u z E o 2 2 O E 2 O
175. Manual Hardware Manual number Model code SH 081194ENG 1D7MJ5 GOT2000 Series User s Manual Utility SH 081195ENG 1D7MJ6 GOT2000 Series User s Manual Monitor B2 List of Manuals for Designer3 GOT1000 Refer to the Help and manuals for GT Designer3 GOT 1000 SH 081196ENG 1D7MJ7 Abbreviations and Generic Terms The following shows the abbreviations and generic terms used in Help Abbreviations and generic terms Description 2712 5 2712 5 GT2712 STWA GT2712 STBD GT2712 STWD GT2710 S GT2710 STBA GT2710 STBD GT27 GT2710 V GT2710 VTBA GT2710 VTWA GT2710 VTBD GT2710 VTWD GT2708 S GT2708 STBA GT2708 STBD GOT2000 Series GT2708 V GT2708 VTBA GT2708 VTBD GT2310 V GT2310 VTBA GT2310 VTBD GT23 GT2308 V GT2308 VTBA GT2308 VTBD GT SoftGOT2000 GT SoftGOT2000 Version1 GOT 1000 Series GOT1000 Series GOT900 Series GOT A900 Series GOT F900 Series 800 Series Communication unit Abbreviations and generic terms GOT 800 Series Description Bus connection unit GT15 QBUS GT15 QBUS2 GT15 ABUS GT15 ABUS2 GT15 75QBUSL GT15 75QBUS2L GT15 75ABUSL GT15 75ABUS2L Serial communication unit GT15 RS2 9P GT15 RS4 9S GT15 RS4 TE MELSECNET H communication unit GT15 J71LP23 25 GT15 J71BR13 CC Link IE Controller Network communication unit GT15 J71GP23 SX CC Link IE Field Network c
176. N SD1 8449 SA S 2101H SD1 m 2103 Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits z 124 2104 2104 2105 502 8450 2102 02 2105 Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits 2 2106 3000 2106 3000 2107 3001 03 8451 2 A A 2103 SD3 2 Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits gt 2 2108 3002 2108 3002 21 09 3003 SD4 8452 25 A ee x 2104H SD4 2109 30038 Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits 2 210 3004 210 3004 210 3005 05 8453 2 A sS 2105H SD5 21088 Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits o 3005 o x 210 o 30064 210 3006 210Du 3007H 06 8454 2 S 2106H SD6 21098 Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits 3007 210 3008 210 3008 210 3009 SD7 8455 M gt 2107 SD7 210FH Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits 30091 2110H 300 21 10 300 211 1 300 08 8456 2 s 2108H SD8 2118 Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits 300 2112 300 21 12 300 21 13 3000 09 8457 2 X 2109H SD9 Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits 1 For the address specification method for each data format refer to the following 3 4 Message Formats Formats 1 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection Formats 3 4 GOT F900 series microcomputer connection Formats 5 Digital Electronics Corporation s memory link method Formats 6 7 4E frame Formats 8 9 QnA compatible 3E
177. N 10 3 10 3 Side Settings Ethernet based driver For using the VNC server any of the following Ethernet communication drivers must be set on the GOT Ethernet MELSEC Q17nNC CRnD 700 Gateway Ethernet FX Gateway Ethernet OMRON Gateway Ethernet KEYENCE Gateway Ethernet YASKAWA Gateway Ethernet YOKOGAWA Gateway EtherNet IP AB Gateway Ethernet SIEMENS 57 Gateway Ethernet SIEMENS OP Gateway MODBUS TCP Gateway Ethernet MICROCOMPUTER In the peripheral setting set Destination I F in Ethernet Download for the PC Data Transfer dialog box To connect controllers including a programmable controller to the GOT by using the Ethernet connection no setting is required For the details of Ethernet Download refer to the following 57 GT Designer3 GOT2000 Help 10 4 Setting in Personal Computer For connecting the VNC server to the personal computer VNC9 client itis necessary to install the VNC client software to the personal computer to be connected and set it Refer to the following for details of the VNC client software installation method and setting method 10 4 57 GT Designer3 GOT2000 Help 10 VNC R SERVER CONNECTION 10 4 Setting in Personal Computer 11 VIDEO RGB CONNECTION 11 1 Connectable Model 1 11 2 11 2 System 11 3 11 3 Connection Diagram
178. NC DR CRnD 700 n 3 p 8 8 Gateway Standard 1 85422 485 Communication cateway Serve Q LIQNAVA CPU 0271624 137124 Gateway Clent Detat Setting 50 FTP Server File Transfer Property Value 2 xil Transmission Speed BPS 115200 xxx Retry Times Timeout Time Sec Delay Time ms Format Montor Speed High Normal 1 Select Common Controller Setting from the menu 2 The Controller Setting window is displayed Select the channel to be used from the list menu 3 Set Manufacturer Controller Type I F and Driver according to the connected equipment to be used 4 The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer Controller Type I F and Driver are set Make the settings according to the usage environment Click the OK button when settings are completed The settings of connecting equipment can be set and confirmed I F Communication Setting For details refer to the following 1 1 2 communication setting 14 4 14 RFID CONNECTION 14 3 GOT Side Settings RFID setting 2 4 Read Data Direct Input to Object No Device Transmitted Data Points Received Data Points Device Points Header Terminator Data Writing Order Low gt High High Low V Fil up a space when imported data is less than the writing points Filing Data Space 0x20
179. NC R SERVER CONNECTION 10 1 Connectable Modell 5 22245554 det di ted et eR pd desee 10 2 10 2 System Configuration i eddie e ee d nde ne a n a 10 2 10 3 GOT Side Settings er REPRE E Fed Pee Hed em Pie 10 3 10 3 1 VNC R server function setting enne 10 3 10 3 2 Setting communication interface Communication 10 3 10 4 Setting in Personal 12 0222 1 00 donna aas nes 10 4 11 VIDEO RGB CONNECTION 11 4 Connectable Model List ueria 11 2 11 2 System Configuration ies seis esee esee ea daa nnne da nnde 11 3 11 2 1 Displaying video image on 11 3 11 2 2 Displaying GOT screen on external enne 11 5 11 3 Connection Diaan daz cci echter te 11 6 11 39 11 Goaxialicable iti ri rU REPE 11 6 11 3 2 Analog RGB cable da eie aga deeem ai 11 6 114 Side Settings cede ege pda seda d du dua aun dV Rudd dud nae 11 8 11 4 1 Setting communication mm enne ennemis 11 8 11 4 2 Communication detail 11 8 11 4 3 Setting the video RGB
180. NNECTION ETHERNET 3 4 Message Formats 3 35 LE 2 4 I E u z E o 2 2 O 14 E 2 O o a 2 Batch write 1 command w out station No batch write B command w station No a When writing to a word device The following shows an example of writing 3D21H 3604H to virtual devices R100 and R101 on the GOT at station No 15 0000 4 0064H 4 m 0000H 4 0065H 4 Before execution After execution Item Message format format 3 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection ASCII 1 Number mand StalonNo Address B 1 5 0 0 8 0 4 Following 42H 31H 35H 30H 30H 43H 38H 30H 34H L H D H D Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 21 R100 upper 100 lower 101 upper R101 lower 3 D 2 1 3 6 0 4 33H 44 32H 31 33H 30H 34 D H D H D H D Request message host GOT format 4 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection Binary Stat Numb Com Station umber Address Following 2 B OFH OOH C8H 04H 72 Datat 2 Data3 1 2 0 Clo Rupe Rte 3DH 21 36H 04 Response message ACK during normal communication GOT host 06H Response mes
181. No 5020 1 Startup Time Sec 3 1 Timeout Time Sec 3 Delay Time ms 0 32bit Storage 1H Order FunctionCode 0F Used E FunctionCode 10 Used read times Points 1000 d Input relay read times Points 1000 Ethernet Setting Fs Host Station Unit Type Address m 1 1 MODBUS TCP 1 1 1 1 ll 1 Select Common Controller Setting from the menu 2 The Controller Setting window is displayed Select the channel to be used from the list menu 3 Setthe following items Manufacturer MODBUS Controller Type MODBUS I F Interface to be used Driver MODBUS TCP Gateway 4 The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer Controller Type I F and Driver are set Make the settings according to the usage environment 57 5 3 2 Communication detail settings Click the OK button when settings are completed The settings of connecting equipment can be set and confirmed in I F Communication Setting For details refer to the following 57 1 1 2 I F communication setting Make the settings according to the usage environment Value GOT Net No 1 GOT Station 1 GOT Ethernet Setting 192 168 3 18 GOT Communication Port No 5020 Startup Time Sec 3 Timeout Time Sec 3 Delay Time ms 0 32bit Storage LH Order FunctionCode 0F Used FunctionCode 10 Used Coil read times Points 1000 Input relay read times Points 1000 Hold
182. No No module 1 0 No M data length Following 1 54H OOH OOH OOH OOH 00 01H 01 OOH OOH OOH OOH Data length target range 1 CPU DK T Sub 2 ime Command command QOH 00 01H 19 OOH OOH Continued to next page 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 53 3 4 Message Formats Item Message format From previous page Response message during normal communication host format 6 4E frame ASCII T T n T T T Serial No Fixed value MEUM PLC No D 4 010 0 0 0 1 0 1 05 44H 34H 30H 30 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30 31 30H 31 0 D HB D L 53 T T T T T T T Request destination Request destination MER module I O No Response data length Endcode 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 2 0 0 0 0 1 30 30H 30H 30H 31H 32 30H 30H 30H 30 0 0 0D M Lt HW D Character B section lt gt ig T T T T Year data Month data Day data Hour data Minute data Second Day of PO PENAT aaa cll data _ week data 1 0 9 1 0 0 1 1 8 4 6 4 9 0 4 30H 39H 31H 30 30H 31 31H 38 34
183. O 14 E 2 O o x Other station Communication error that occurred another when multiple GOTs are connected 101 Parity error 102 Framing error 103 Overrun error 104 Communication message error 105 Timeout error No station of the specified address exists 106 Multiple units not connectable 107 Clock data setting error 03 Clock data second Second data of 00 to 59 is stored 04 C ock data minute Minute data of 00 to 59 is stored 8 5 Clock data hour Hour data of 00 to 23 is stored 06 Clock data day Day data of 00 to 31 is stored 07 Clock data month Month data of 01 to 12 is stored Continued to next page 1 For details and corrective actions for the errors error codes that are stored into SD2 refer to the following Details and actions for errors error codes stored into 502 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 11 3 3 Device Data Area From previous page Address Description Set side spe Clock data year 4 digit year data is stored Clock data day of week System 09 Day of the week data is stored 0 Sunday 1 Monday 2 Tuesday 3 Wednesday 4 Thursday 5 Friday 6 Saturday SD10 to 15 Unused 1 If a wrong day of the week is set by the clock data setting commands the clock data will differ from the time displayed on the utility Example When October 1 2009 Tuesday is s
184. OMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 5 Message Formats 7 In the case of interrupt outputs The following shows an example of an interrupt output when data are written to the interrupt output devices D13 and D14 Assuming that 3139H is written to D13 and 55 to 014 Example When the number of interrupt data bytes is 2 1111111111111 2 Interrupt output Output Output value 1 value 2 Item Message format 1 When Interrupt Data Byte in Communication Detail Settings is set to 1 byte 2 When Interrupt Data Byte in Communication Detail Settings is set to 2 byte Output Output Interrupt output value 1 value 2 GOT host EE 3 When Interrupt Data Byte in Communication Detail Settings is set to 4 byte Output Output Output Output value 1 value 2 value 3 value 4 Interrupt output To disable the interrupt output turn ON 5 52 interrupt code output disable flag 7 5 2 4 6 SM devices To enable the interrupt output set 8 bits to the data length at Communication Detail Settings 2 9 2 6 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings When 7 bits is set the MSB 8th bit is ignored Example FFH gt 7 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 71 2 5 Message Formats l lt mA 12 2 E 2 2 E 5 a Error
185. ON SERIAL 2 5 Message Formats 7 Number of bytes Specifies the number of bytes of the device data to be batch read written Setting range 0 to FFH The address notated in hexadecimal is converted to a 2 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted from the upper digit 8 Number of points Specifies the number of device data to be written to multiple points in bit units Setting range 0 to 70 The address notated in decimal is converted to a 2 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted from the upper digit 9 Year month day hour minute second and day of the week data Specifies year month day hour minute second and day of the week to be read set to the GOT clock data The address notated in decimal is converted to a 2 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted from the upper digit 57 m 5 Read clock data 6 command w out station No read clock data command w station No 57 m 6 Set clock data 5 command w out station No set clock data command w station No 10 Data Specifies the data to read from write to the specified device data word unit The address notated in hexadecimal is converted to a 4 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted from the upper digit 11 Write data Specifies the data to write to the specified device data The address notated in hexadecimal is converted to a 2 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted from the upper digit 12 Sum check code for format 15 GOT F900 series microcompute
186. OUR GOT se Number of connectable Model name Option device Model equipment 27 Built into GT For connectable RFID controllers and system GOT 23 For the system equipment refer to the following Technical Varies according to configuration 1 RFID controller bulletin specification of RFID between the GOT GT gt List of valid devices applicable for controllers 97 PLC refer to GOT2000 series GOT D 0064 GT15 RS2 9P each chapter When using the RS 232 communication unit Use the RS 232 communication unit of the for connecting to an RFID controller However when the RS 232 communication unit is used the following operations cannot be supported a Using the external authentication b Supplying the power to an RFID controller from the GOT 14 2 14 RFID CONNECTION 14 1 Connectable Model List System configuration between the GOT and PLC For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC refer to each chapter Mitsubishi Products Non Mitsubishi Products 1 Non Mitsubishi Products 2 gt Microcomputer MODBUS Products Peripherals 2 E 2 2 a LL X 14 RFID CONNECTION 14 3 14 2 System Configuration 14 3 GOT Side Settings 14 3 1 Setting communication interface Controller setting Set the channel of the equipment to be connected to the GOT Manufacturer MITSUBISHI Controller Type MELSEC Q QS Q17nD M
187. Order Script No Comment TriggerType Add E 1 Rise GB40 Paste Up Down 05571 100 7Real Coil Status 100pt wGS572 100 Real Input Status 100pt Real Input Register 100pt 10 95574 100 Real w GS575 50 Force Multiple Coils b pt wGS576 50 Write Multiple Register 50pt lding Register 1 pt D Sent Setting example for project script 4 MODBUS R RTU CONNECTION 4 13 4 6 Precautions z E 2 2 O 2 E E 2 ae Q O 4 14 4 MODBUS R RTU CONNECTION 4 6 Precautions RR MODBUS R TCP CONNECTION 5 1 Connectable Model 15 5 2 5 2 System 5 3 5 3 GOT Side 5 5 4 54 MODBUS R TCP Equipment Setting 5 7 5 5 Device Range that Can Be Set 5 7 5 6 Example of Connection 5 11 Dr PICCAUNONG tix wwii yk ce a trs eade e Dn 5 16 z E 2 2 O O E 5 e o 5 MODBUS R TCP CONNECTION 5 1 Connectable Model List GOT2000 Series products support the master function of MODBUS TCP communication the open FA network Thus the GOT can be connected with each MODBUSS TCP slave For applicable MODBUS TCP equipment refer to the following Technical News gt List o
188. RTU equipment refer to the following Technical News gt List of Valid Devices Applicable for GOT2000 Series with MODBUS Connection GOT A 0037 4 2 4 MODBUS R RTU CONNECTION 4 1 Connectable Model List 4 2 System Configuration 4 2 1 Connecting to MODBUS R RTU equipment Communication driver Coo MODBUS RTU Connection cable Connection cable GOT Number of Controller Cabl del M connectable ation Type 90 9 moge ti i Model Connection diagram number distance e equipment GT 27 Built into GOT 93 1 MODBUS X i i RS 232 232 connection diagram 45m equipment for 1 1 GT 27 GOT GT15 RS2 9P FA LTBGT2R4CBL05 0 5m 2 85 8 422 485 cable 1 2 pair FA LTBGT2R4CBL10 1m 2 z E 2 2 O 5 E 2 a Q wirin 9 FA LTBGT2RACBL20 2m MODBUSS RTU equipment E 27 Built 93 Up to 31 MODBUS RS 422 Uxs RS 422 485 cable 2 2 pair 120007 2 485 wiring 2 p 7 3 GT15 RS4 9S GT 27 369 5 422 485 connection 1200m GT15 RS4 TE diagram 3 1 The shortest specification on the MODBUS RTU equipment side is prioritized 2 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED For details of the product contact MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED 3 When itis less than 31 units
189. Request message T S 0 4 0 6 0 1 1 8 4 6 4 9 0 2 7 7 host gt 02 54 53 30H 34 30H 36 30H 31H 31H 38H 34H 36H 34H 9 30H 32H 03 37H 37H H D B D B D H D H D H D H D H L L Sum check is performed in this range Response message ACK during communication 06H GOT host Response message during faulty format 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection format 2 communication GOT host Error NAK code 15H The above is a case where the sum check error 06H has occurred When a wrong day of the week has been set by the clock data setting command If a wrong day of the week is set by the clock data setting commands the clock data will differ from the time displayed on the utility Example When June 1 2004 Thursday is set by the clock data setting command the actual day of week is Tuesday Tuesday TUE will be displayed on the utility time display 2 34 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 5 Message Formats 7 In the case of interrupt outputs The following shows an example of an interrupt output when data are written to the interrupt output devices D13 and D14 Assuming that 3139H is written to D13 and 55 to 014 Example When the number of interrupt data bytes is 2 2525 o Interrupt on ninm
190. S S Device Information 0 v 00001 Kind 289 oE E 65536 2 E 2 2 O O E 5 e o Network Host Other NetworkNo 1 Station No 1 T Item Description Set the device name device number and bit number The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit of word device Device Set the file No File No The file No can be set only when select 6 at Device Information Displays the device type and setting range which are selected in Device Set the station number of the controller to be monitored Host Select this item for monitoring the host controller Select this for monitoring other controllers Network After selecting the item set the station number and network number of the controller to be monitored Other NW No For the MODBUS RTU connection set 1 For the MODBUSS TCP connection set the network No Station No Set the station No 5 MODBUS R TCP CONNECTION 5 7 5 4 MODBUS R TCP Equipment Setting Coils 0 Device No Device name Setting range representation 000001 to 065536 Bit device Discretes input 1 100001 to 165536 Decimal Input registers 3 1 300001 to 365536 Holding registers 4 400001 to 465536 Decimal Word device Extension file register 6 File No 0 to104 600000 to 609999 71 Only
191. S 9 D O4 0086 5 50 2 24 02 OF OF OF OF OF OF OF OF XD02 XSCNOO 14 XSCNOO E E E X003 XSCNO1 XSCNO1 OF 9 OF 0 OF 0 OF po OF FO OF 21008 2r zu i 1 2004 XD04 XSCNO2 15 XSCNO2 SHO SES Sm OE ES XSCNO3 40 XSCN03 994 5 9 01 6 0 6 0 6 0 9 6 5 6 XD05 4 16 5 04 994 904 T S 05 0 5 00400406 XD06 m XSCNO05 41 XSCNO05 5 ssl 551 scl 55 55 ool ss a OF OF OF OF OF Or OF OF XSCNO6 17 XSCNO06 E P E E X008 XD08 XSCNO7 42 XSCNO7 SH SHS SHS 5 5 5 6 00 910151 1009 093 10 SH sese YD01 31 9 94 9 94 9 Gf 9 Gt po 0 O OF o 04 0 0 en XDOA lt YDO2 7 St 69 S 94 10 941094 993 OF 2 vate 9 01 OG 0 01 pO Op OO OO c 32 1 1 1 1 1 1 O1 O 01 9 04 O St OF O OF 04 o OF 04 8 i E E pr X00D EC 05 33 XDOD 2 lt 06 9 00 601050 oc po Gy YDO7 34 9 91 9 OF 0 O 0 O 04 0 XDOF o 008 10 2 09 35 TOR XSCNO1 YDOB 36 LL d YDOC 12 XSCNO2 YDOD 37 XSCNOS YDOE 13 an external XSCNO4 5 YDOF 38 d XSCNOS RUN 30 XSCNO6 24 4 o DC24V 9 seen DC24V 2 24 2 DC24V 1 CO
192. S Siemens AG PLC Programmable controller manufactured by each corporation Control equipment Control equipment manufactured by each corporation Temperature controller Temperature controller manufactured by each corporation Indicating controller Indicating controller manufactured by each corporation Controller Controller manufactured by each corporation PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 z z o Y a o a 2 5 a t a 1 1 Setting the Communication Interface 1 3 1 2 Writing the Package Data onto the GOT 1 10 1 3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection 1 12 1 4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection 1 17 1 5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment 1 20 1 6 Checking for Normal 0 1 22 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING The following shows the procedures to be taken before monitoring and corresponding reference sections Setting the communication interface gt 71 15 the Communication Interface Determine the connection type and channel No to be used and Each chapter GOT Side Settings perform the communication setting gt Writing the project data and OS Write the standard monitor OS communication driver option 5 3771 2 1Writing the Package Data onto the GOT OS proj
193. S422 485 p Communication 588 Gateway Serve BB Gateway Clent g Ed Mail FTP Server Transfer F Property Value 4 Flos Transmission Speed BPS 115200 Station No Swit Retry Times Timeout Time Sec Uana CPU QJ71C24 LI71C24 Delay Time ms Format Monitor Speed High Normal 1 Select Common Controller Setting from the menu 2 The Controller Setting window is displayed Select the channel to be used from the list menu 3 Set Manufacturer Controller Type I F and Driver according to the connected equipment to be used 4 The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer Controller Type I F and Driver are set Make the settings according to the usage environment Click the OK button when settings are completed The settings of connecting equipment can be set and confirmed in I F Communication Setting For details refer to the following 97 1 1 2 communication setting Bar code reader setting 4 Read Data Direct Input to Object Device Device Points Header Terminator Data Writing Order Low High 7 High Low V Fill up a space when imported data is less than the writing points Filing Data 9 Space 0x20 2 NULL 0x00 3 1 Select Common Peripheral Setting Bar Code from the menu
194. SYNC VSYNC 14 VSYNC DGND 5 L 5 GND 4 Twisted pair NC 11 11 GND NC 12 12 SDA NC 15 15 SCL IDEEN e 2 Precautions when preparing a cable a Cable length The cable length differs depending on the specification of the personal computer to be used Create a cable under the specifications of the personal computer b GOT side connector Use the following as the video RGB input unit and the RGB input unit connectors For the GOT side connector and connector cover of the analog RGB cable use the ones applicable to the GOT connector Connector GOT Connector type Manufacturer type GT16M R2 GT16M V4R1 1 13150 73 2 Sub IN DERE GT15V 75R1 pin female DDK GT15V 75V4R1 c Personal computer side connector Use a connector compatible with the personal computer to be used 9 2 3 GOT Side Settings 9 2 4 Communication detail settings CET 1 Serial connection Setting communication interface Make the settings according to the usage environment Communication settings Detail Setting Set the channel of the equipment to be connected to Driver Video RGB the GOT Property Video Input Signal 2 Video Resolution CH1 MELSEC Q QS 0 cH2 None 7
195. Settings 13 4 2 Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment r Detail Setting Driver Multimedia 640x480 192 168 3 51 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 1 Video Setting Set the video input signal Default NTSC Video Input Signal NTSC PAL 640 x 480 720 x 480 768 x 576 2 Video Resolution Set the video resolution 1 When NTSC format is selected the resolution is fixed to 640 x 480 When PAL format is selected the resolution is fixed to 768 x 576 52 For GT2710 V and GT2708 V the resolution is fixed to 640 x 480 2 IP Address Setting for Multimedia Unit Set the network settings for connecting from the multimedia unit via Ethernet Item Description Range Set ly adaness of the 0 0 0 0 to IP Address multimedia unit Default 192 168 3 51 Set the subnet mask for the sub network Only for connection via 0 0 0 0 to Subnet Mask router If the sub network is not 255 255 255 255 used the default value is set Default 255 255 255 0 Set the router address of the default gateway on the side to Default which the multimedia unit is 0 0 0 0 to Gateway connected Only for connection 255 255 255 255 via router Default 0 0 0 0 13 6 13 MULTIMEDIA CONNECTION 13 4 GOT Side Settings Network settings with the utility The network setting can be changed on the U
196. Station umber mand No Address lof bytes gt Following 1 B OFH 20H 00 04H 1 2 Datat 2 093 1 2222 AMTt0 1600 12001 iO ___ 01H 00 OOH 80H 0100000010000000000000000110000000 MMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMM 76543210111111982222111133222222 543210 3210987610987654 Response message ACK duringnormal communication GOT host 06H Response message NAK during communication GOT host 15H 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 37 3 4 Message Formats 3 Multi point write in bit units 3 command w out station No multi point write in bit units D command w station No The following shows an example of turning OFF the virtual device M31 and turning ON the virtual device M2038 on the GOT at station No 31 Item Message format format 3 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection ASCII Station No T Number of D 3 1 0 2 Following 1 1 Write Write i Address1 Bit pattern1 Address2 Bit pattern2 1 2 0 0 3 8 0 0 2 0 F E 4 0 31H 32H 30H 30H 33H 38H 30 30H 32H 30H 46 45H 34H 30H 1010 0 D 50 2 write specification1 1 write specification2 0 Source data 1 0110 1 0110 Source data 110101010 bit pattern 110000000 bit pattern 0100000 Result 001
197. T When the user continues using the GOT with the protective film the film may not be removed In addition for the models equipped with the human sensor function using the GOT with the protective film may cause the human sensor not to function properly Operate and store the GOT in environments without direct sunlight high temperature dust humidity and vibrations When using the GOT in the environment of oil or chemicals use the protective cover for oil Failure to do so may cause failure or malfunction due to the oil or chemical entering into the GOT WIRING PRECAUTIONS NWARNING Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before wiring Failure to do so may result in an electric shock product damage or malfunctions NCAUTION Make sure to ground the FG terminal and LG terminal of the GOT power supply section to the protective ground conductors dedicated to the GOT with a ground resistance of 100 or less When tightening the terminal screws use a Phillips head screwdriver No 2 Terminal screws which are not to be used must be tightened always at torque 0 5 N m to 0 8 N m Otherwise there will be a danger of short circuit against the solderless terminals WIRING PRECAUTIONS NCAUTION Use applicable solderless terminals and tighten them with the specified torque If any solderless spade terminal is used it may be disconnected when the terminal screw comes lo
198. T GT27 Only MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS NCAUTION Use the GOT in the environment that satisfies the general specifications described in this manual Not doing so can cause an electric shock fire malfunction or product damage or deterioration When mounting the GOT to the control panel tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque range 0 36 N m to 0 48 N m with a Phillips head screwdriver No 2 Undertightening can cause the GOT to drop short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a drop short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the GOT When loading the communication unit or option unit other than wireless LAN unit to the GOT fit it to the connection interface of the GOT and tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque range 0 36 N m to 0 48 with a Phillips head screwdriver No 2 When loading the wireless LAN unit to the GOT fit it to the side interface of GOT and tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque range 0 10 N m to 0 14 with a Phillips head screwdriver No 2 Under tightening can cause the GOT to drop short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a drop failure or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit GT27 Only When closing the USB environmental protection cover fix the cover to the GOT by pushing the PUSH mark on the latch firmly to comply with the protective structure GT27 Only Remove the protective film of the GO
199. User Library to the new project Right click Library under the project tree in Logic Designer Right click Insert and select User Library Double click SD CMODBUSE PF mwt SD CUTIL PF mwt and SD CMODBUSS PF mwt to select it When STARDOM Serial Communication is used for the template SD CUTIL PF mwt is inserted as default The library path inserted in the procedures above is as follows Install Folder LogicDesigner Libraries SD_CMODBUSE_PF mwt Install Folder LogicDesigner Libraries SD_CUTIL_PF mwt Install Folder LogicDesigner Libraries SD_CMODBUSS_PF mwt d Copy a sample project POU to the new project Open SD_CMODBUSE_Sample1 mwt Right click ComEServerModbus in the Logic POU under the project tree in the SD CMODBUSE Sample1 project and select Copy Right click the Logic POU under the project tree in the previously created project and select Paste Double click the ComEServerModbus file in the ComEServerModbus folder Forthe following terminals set as shown below SD BS OPEN 1 TRUE UINTEO UINT 20 YOKOGAWA RILOT COIL DSCI IREG HREG ESTS COMERR 5 MODBUS RyTCP CONNECTION 5 6 Example of Connection e Set devices to be monitored by a GOT Right click the ComEServerModbus file the ComEServerModbus folder in the logic POU under the project tree and select Insert Cord worksheet Setthe variable devices to be monitore
200. a communication This is the same message format as when communication is performed using the dedicated protocol A compatible 1C frame of the A Series computer link module For details of the basic format of data communication refer to the following manual 3 MELSEC Q L MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual This section describes items whose settings differ from the dedicated protocol of the A Series computer link modules and the dedicated commands for a GOT microcomputer connection Example Request message for the batch read in word units QR command in format 4 A compatible 1C frame format 2 Character A section T T jj T T T Station Number Block No PLC No Command Wait Address of points Check 0 0 0 0 0 0 Q R 0 D 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 2 B A 05 30 30H 30 30H 30 51H 52 30H 44H 30H 30H 30H 31H 30H 30 30H 32 42H 41H H D H D H D 148 D 9 Hy Sum check is performed in this range Details of data items in message format Data code during communication l lt mA 12 2 E 2 2 E 5 a 12 Communication is performed in ASCII code 1 Block No PLC No Ignored in a microcomputer connection of the GOT Specify 00 00 is converted to a 2 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted from the upper digit 2 Station No
201. a to be read written In the format 1 the address notated in decimal is converted to a 4 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted from the upper digit In the format 2 the address notated in decimal is converted to a 2 digit Binary code binary and transmitted from the upper digit For details of the device range that can be accessed refer to the following 3 3 Device Data Area Number of points Specifies the number of device data to be read written Setting range 1 to 64 In the format 1 the address notated in decimal is converted to a 2 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted from the upper digit In the format 2 the address notated in decimal is converted to a 1 digit Binary code binary and transmitted Year month day hour minute second and day of the week data Specifies year month day hour minute second and day of the week to be read set to the GOT clock data In the format 1 the address notated in decimal is converted to a 2 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted from the upper digit In the format 2 the address notated in decimal is converted to a 1 digit Binary code binary and transmitted 257 m Message format 5 Read clock data TR command 257 m Message format 6 Set clock data TS command Data Specifies the data to read from write to the specified device data word unit In the format 1 the address notated in hexadecimal is converted to a 4 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted from the uppe
202. al 4 MODBUS R RTU CONNECTION 4 7 4 3 Connection Diagram 4 4 Side Settings 4 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings 4 42 Communication detail settings Set the channel of the equipment to be connected to the GOT Network Duplex Settir 8 Routing Informatio Eik Gateway Communication 15 Gateway Serve BB Gateway Client Mail FTP Server Fi Fie Transfer F Property Q Redundant Transmission Speed BPS A Station No Switch Stop 4 Parity Retry Times Timeout Host Address Delay Time ms 32bit Storage FunctionCode 0F Standard 1 F RS232 _ FunctionCode 10 Coil read times Points 1 Select Common Controller Setting from the menu 2 The Controller Setting window is displayed Select the channel to be used from the list menu 3 Setthe following items Manufacturer MODBUS Controller Type MODBUS Interface to be used Driver MODBUS RTU 4 The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer Controller Type I F and Driver are set Make the settings according to the usage environment 227 4 4 2 Communication detail settings Click the OK button when settings are completed The settings of connecting equipment can be set and confirmed I F Communication Setting For details refer to the following 5
203. al printer the following external devices which use Channel No 8 cannot be connected at the same time Barcode reader that requires the power supply When connecting the above mentioned devices at the same time set the serial printer to Channels No 5 to 7 2 Setting for the driver Regardless of the printer type multiple printers are cannot be set 12 3 2 Communication detail settings 1 Communication interface setting by the Utility _ a The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual 57 GOT2000 Series User s Manual Utility 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective Make the settings according to the usage environment XON XOFF Item Description Range 4800bps Set this item when change the 9600bps Transmission transmission speed used for 19200bps Speed communication with printer 38400bps Default 19200bps 57600bps 115200bps Set this item when change the data length used for communication with printer Default 8bits Data 7bits 8bits Default None Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication error occurs Default Otimes Retry 0 to 5times 2 Specify the
204. ame series Please make the setting according to the specifications of the controller actually used When non existent device or a device number outside the range is set other objects with correct device settings may not be monitored Setting item r lt Bit gt CH1 Computer Device Information 0 5 Kind aas e uem Range 0 2047 Item Description Device Set the device name device number and bit number The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit of word device Information Displays the device type and setting range which are selected in Device Device name Setting range Device No representation Internal relay M MO to M2047 2 Special relay SM SMO to SM63 Decimal amp Latch relay L LO to L2047 Word device bit Specified bit of the following word devices F Data register D DO to D4095 o Link special register SD SDO to SD15 Decimal 5 File register RO to R4095 Bit device word Converting bit devices into word 3 72 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 7 Device Range that Can Be Set 3 8 Precautions GOT clock control The settings of time adjusting or time broadcast made on the GOT will be disabled on the PLC Use the dedicated commands to set or read out the clock data of microcomputer UDP IP connection When the commands are sent from multiple controllers
205. and communication module attachment Check the settings of Communication Detail Settings Review the contents of the message to transmit Clock data setting error Review the contents of the message to transmit 15 Check whether th existent data is set e g setting 07 atthe day of H The setting value of the clock data has error eck whether the nonexistent Are di the week as clock data Address error The start address of the read write device is out of range contents OF Uie message to transmit Check the devices that can be used and the device ranges 7Bu Exceeded number of points error 2 4 Device Data Area The read write range exceeded the device range Precautions 1 Batch reading writing crossing over different devices When using the batch read RD or batch write WD command do not batch read write crossing over the different devices This will cause an error response 2 Storage order for 32 bit data To use the program of GOT A900 series with 32bit Order setting to GOT1000 series set HL Order to 32bit Order for Communication Detail Settings when 32 bit data is set for GOT A900 series With setting LH Order the order of upper bits and lower bits are reversed when the GOT displays and writes 32 bit data 2 5 Message Formats 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 5 4 Formats 3 to 6 A compatible 1C frame Basic format of dat
206. are turned OFF Bit pattern 1100 specification Result 0010 Original data 1010 Invert 2 AEN Bits set to 1 by the bit pattern are inverted Bit pattern 1100 specification Result 0110 Original data 1010 Writ Th ical val t ite by the bit patt ified 3 e numerical values to write by the bit pattern are specifie Bit pattern 1100 Specification directly Result 1100 3 39 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 4 Message Formats LE 2 I LE u z E o 2 2 O 14 E 2 O o a 4 Fill command 4 w out station No fill command E w station No The following shows an example of writing 16 s to virtual devices R50 to R100 on the GOT at station No 27 0000H4 1616H 4 0000 1616H 4 0000H4 1616H 4 Before execution After execution Item Message format format 3 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection ASCII Com Station No Start address End address 45H 32H 37H 30H 30H 36H 34 30H 30H 43H 9 31H 36H OF 9 Request message host GOT format 4 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection Binary T T Station Start End Write mand No address address E 1 OOH 64 OOH CO9H 16H Response message ACK during normal communication GOT h
207. ata format The following shows the L devices virtual devices inside the GOT The address specification values different depending on the data format are also given below Address Address specification value Format3 4 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 pp Fomei When GS580 b8 When GS580 b8 remi 1 2 GS581 b8 GS582 b8 or GS581 b8 GS582 b8 or 5 Ston 65583 08 is ON GS583 b8 is OFF 2 17 16 L5 L4 L3 L2 L1 10 000 001 8192 2000 115 114 113 112 111 110 19 18 001 000 m L23 L22 L21 L20 L19 L18 L17 L16 002 003 8193 2001 address 2 131 130 129 128 127 126 125 124 003 002 column on left Oo L2039 L2038 L2037 L2036 L2035 L2034 L2033 L2032 AOFEH AOFFH gt 8319 207 12047 12046 12045 12044 12043 12042 12041 12040 AOFFH AOFEH 5 For the address specification method for each data format refer to the following 3 4 Message Formats m Formats 1 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection 5 Formats 3 4 GOT F900 series microcomputer connection Formats 5 Digital Electronics Corporation s memory link method Formats 6 7 AE frame Formats 8 9 QnA compatible 3E frame 8 2 For reading or writing data in word units specify the addresses in 16 point units Example LO 116 132 etc c 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 9 3 3 Dev
208. ation s memory link method with the GOT correct the commands to be used and the device ranges to match the specifications of the GOT 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 51 2 5 Message Formats Message format The following shows the message format of the dedicated commands for a microcomputer connection of GOT 1 Read clock data N command The following shows an example of reading the clock data of GOT Assuming that the clock data of GOT has been set to 2004 June 1 18 46 49 Tuesday Time display 2004 06 01 18 46 49 TUE Item Message format Example Format 13 Digital Electronics Corporation s memory link method extended mode ASCII code 1 n Digital compatible signal GS580 to GS583 OFF Partly compatible ENQ Station No ha CR HF 0 0 N C E Request message This range Sum check host GOT E Digital compatible signal GS580 to GS583 ON Fully compatible T ENQ Station No ESC cem n CR LF 0 0 NIC 9 05 30H 30H 1 4 43H 39H OAH H D lt gt This range Sum check Continued to next page 2 52 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 5 Message Formats Item Response message during normal communication GOT host From previous page Message format Example Format 13 Digital Electr
209. batch edit of GT Designer3 7 3 GT Designer3 GOT2000 Help LE 2 124 I E z E o 2 2 O 14 E 2 O o a 1000 Series virtual devices GOT F900 Series virtual devices DO to 2047 D2048 to 4095 RO to 4095 DO to 4095 LO to 2047 to 2047 MO to 2047 D8000 to 8015 500 to 15 GDO to 6 5 0 to 63 8000 to 8063 3 Access to SD3 to 9 can also be made by the specification of the addresses 3000 to 000 of to 6 on the GOT F900 Series Values of virtual devices inside the GOT When the GOT is turned OFF or reset values are cleared to their defaults bit devices OFF word devices 0 Values are held in the memory when project data are written to the GOT 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 3 Device Data Area 3 3 1 devices The D devices are word devices into which GOT communication errors clock data or other information are stored The user can also store data using the user area List of D devices The following lists the D devices virtual devices inside the GOT Address Description Set side DO to 2 Unused Communication error status Stores the communication error details of GOT 0
210. ber GS595 GS602 GS609 GS616 Specification for the max number of Other than above 800 multiple coil write times When of GS570 is 1 the function code OF is not used and therefore the setting of GS575 will be disabled 0 100 Function Code 10 1 to 100 Specify the maximum number GS596 GS603 GS610 GS617 Specification for the max number of Other than above 100 multiple holding register write times When Bit1 of GS570 is 1 the function code 10F is not used and therefore the setting of GS576 will be disabled 5 MODBUS R TCP CONNECTION 5 5 Device Range that Can Be Set 5 6 Example of Connection 5 6 1 Connecting to SCHNEIDER PLC Modicon Premium series and Modicon Quantum series System Configuration Communication driver Ceo MODBUS TCP Hub Connection cable Connection cable E 2 9 Communi Connection cable Connection cable Number of Ethernet External o controller TE cation Max RES Max ON GOT connectable Cable model Cable model distance d device model equipment Modicon 100 5 TOUBASECTA Premium TSX ETY 5102 Shielded twisted Shielded twisted Series pair cable STP pair cable STP a or unshielded or unshielded twisted pair twisted pair E cable UTP of cable UTP of c category 5 or category 5 or 97 5 higher higher Built into GT 64
211. ble 100BASE TX Shielded twisted pair cable STP or unshielded twisted pair cable UTP of Ethernet category 5 or higher 100m Built into GOT 10BASE T Shielded twisted pair cable STP or unshielded twisted pair cable UTP of category 3 or higher Unlimited number of GOTs for 1 host 1 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system Connect to the Ethernet module hub transceiver or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network system Use cables connectors and hubs that meet the IEEE802 3 10BASE T 100BASE TX standard 2 Alength between a hub and a node The maximum distance differs depending on the Ethernet device to be used The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used 10BASE T Max 4 nodes for a cascade connection 500m 100BASE TX Max 2 nodes for a cascade connection 205m When switching hubs are used the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades For the limit contact the switching hub manufacturer 3 2 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 1 Microcomputer connection Ethernet 3 3 Device Data Area The following shows a list of virtual devices inside the GOT available in the microcomputer connection Ethernet and the address specification values for each data format The address specification
212. ble equipment 1 printer for 1GOT be used Use the RS 232 cable that is compatible with gt System configuration between and PLC For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC refer to each chapter gt GOT2000 Series Connection Manual Mitsubishi Product For GT Works3 Version1 gt GOT2000 Series Connection Manual Non Mitsubishi Product 1 For GT Works3 Version1 257 GOT2000 Series Connection Manual Non Mitsubishi Product 2 For GT Works3 Version1 L gt GOT2000 Series Connection Manual Microcomputer MODBUS Products Peripherals For GT Works3 Version1 12 PRINTER CONNECTION 12 2 System Configuration 12 3 PRINTER CONNECTION 12 3 GOT Side Settings 12 3 1 Setting communication interface Controller setting Set the channel of the equipment to be connected to the GOT Controller Setting n ke 6 E CH1 MELSEC Q Q5 Q CH2 MELSEC Q QS Q manufacturer 5 0 05 Q 7 cH4 None Controller Type wELSEC Q QS Q17nD M NC DR CRnD 700 Routing Informatio 5 88 Gateway yr Standard VF RS232 CPU 0371624 1271024 Communication 8 Gateway Serve Gateway Clent Sun Detail Setting FTP Server File Transfer F Property 5 9 M Transmission Speed BPS station No Switch Retry Times Timeout Time Sec Delay Time ms
213. ble message format with the protocol of the Digital Electronics Corporation s memory link method Digital Electronics Corporation s memory link This is the basic format of the Digital Electronics Corporation s memory link method method 4 Formats 6 7 4E frame This is the compatible message format with when a communication is performed using the MC protocol of Q QnA Series serial communication module Format 6 4E frame ASCII This is the basic format of the MC protocols The data format is ASCII 27346 Format 7 4E frame Binary This is the basic format of the MC protocols The data format is Binary 5 Formats 8 9 QnA compatible 3E frame This is the compatible message format with when a communication is performed using the MC protocol of Q QnA Series serial communication module QnA compatible 3E frame ASCII This is the basic format of the MC protocols The data format is ASCII Refer to Format 5 Refer to Refer to Format 8 3734 7 Format 9 QnA compatible 3E frame Binary This is the basic format of the MC protocols The data format is Binary How to set data format Set the data format at Detail setting in GT Designer3 For details of the data format setting method refer to the following 257 8 5 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings 3 16 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 4 Message Formats 3 4 2 List of commands The follo
214. bled 0 100 Function Code 10 1 to 100 Specify the maximum number GS576 Specification for the max number of Other than above 100 multiple holding register write times When Bit1 of GS570 is 1 the function code 10F is not used and therefore the setting of GS576 will be disabled When configuring individual communication settings for specific channel numbers The table below shows the settings for the GS device GS device Description Set value Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 0 Using Function Code 1 Not using Function Code 65590 65597 GS604 65611 Command selection 0 Using Function Code 10 1 Not using Function Code 10 Function Code 01 0 1000 GS591 GS598 GS605 GS612 Specification for the max number of 1 to 2000 Specify the maximum number Coil read times Other than above 2000 Function Code 02 0 1000 GS592 GS599 GS606 GS613 Specification for the max number of 1 to 2000 Specify the maximum number input relay read times Other than above 2000 Function Code 03 0 125 GS593 GS600 GS607 GS614 Specification for the max number of 1 to 125 Specify the maximum number holding register read times Other than above 125 Function Code 04 0 125 GS594 GS601 GS608 GS615 Specification for the max number of 1 to 125 Specify the maximum number input register read times Other than above 125 0 800 Function Code OF 1 to 800 Specify the maximum num
215. ce diagram 5 9 z Lamp relay pm di 2 im Connection 6 54 iagram 2 5 diagram 6 Connection diagram 6 1 The power supply of 24VDC must be applied for the external I O unit gt When the power supply of the external I O unit is stopped in the operation the operation panel becomes nonfunctional z For using the operation panel again reset the GOT after supplying the power to the external 1 unit 2 When the connector terminal block converter module is used the maximum input points 64 points 3 When starting turn on the external power supply to the external I O unit and turn on the GOT 7 CONNECTION TO EXTERNAL I O DEVICE When turning off the external power supply a system alarm occurs When a system alarm is generated input output cannot be performed In this case turn on the main power of the GOT or reset the GOT When bus connection is used the reset switch on the GOT does not function 7 2 System Configuration 7 3 When only inputting Extended function OS LL External I O Operation panel Connection cable External device Connection cable Connection diagram number Connection diagram number Option device Model 8 Connection diagram 8 G83 Connection diagram 7 GT15 DIO Operation panel 8 Connection diagram 10 8 diagram 9 GT15 DIOR
216. ce of the changed channel No as In this case set the device again Since the channel No is retained the objects can be reused in other channel No in a batch by using the Device Bach Edit CH No Batch Edit or Device List 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 9 1 1 Setting the Communication Interface 1 2 Writing the Package Data onto the GOT Write the package data onto the GOT For details on writing to GOT refer to the following manual gt GT Designer3 GOT2000 Help 1 2 1 Writing the Package Data onto the GOT Communicate with cor wie cor Read Bo Verfaton GOT Information Get GOT Information Write Data Package Data Write Option GOT Type GOT Name Data Size ROM 2215 KB RAM 8877 Free Space Capacity KB KB GOT Destination Drive C Built in Flash Memory What is package data Package data are project data that work in GOT and system applications data required for GOT operation GOT Write Communication Configuration Communication Path PC USB GOT 1 Select Communication Write to GOT from the menu 2 The Communication configuration dialog box appears Set the communication setting between the GOT and the personal computer Click the button when settings are completed A The GOT Write tab appear
217. ces are set System Seton the system side User Seton the user side by sending request messages from host or using the touch switches etc on the GOT 2 Interrupt outputs SMO to 49 To disable the interrupt output turn ON 5 52 interrupt code output disable flag 7 gt 2 4 6 SM devices To enable the interrupt output set 8 bits to the data length at Communication Detail Settings gt 2 6 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings When 7 bits is set the MSB 8th bit is ignored Example FFH 7FH 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 17 2 4 Device Data Area Differences in address specifications by data format The address specification of devices varies depending on the data format The following shows the address specification values for each data format Address Address specification value Model Format Format Format Format Format b7 b b4 53 b2 b1 50 1 2 6 7 to 10 11 to 13 14 15 SM7 SM6 SM5 SM4 SM3 SM2 SM1 SMO 2200 8464 2110 SM15 SM14 SM13 SM12 5 11 SM10 SM9 SM8 2201 SM23 SM22 5 21 SM20 SM19 SM18 SM17 SM16 2202 8465 2111 SM31 SM30 SM29 SM28 SM27 SM26 SM25 SM24 2203H 5254 3 4 SM39 SM38 SM37 SM36 5 35 5 34 SM33 SM32 2204H 8466 2112 5 47 5 46 5 45 SM44 SM43 SM42 5 41 5 40 2205 Unused 5 52 5 51 5 50 5 49 5 48 8467 2206 2113 Unused 1 For the address specification met
218. cify HEX for Value of the GX Developer and confirm the read data 8 5 Precautions Bar code function setting on GT Designer3 Before connecting the bar code reader make the bar code function and system data settings For details refer to the following manual 5 GT Designer3 GOT2000 Help Controller setting When using the barcode reader which requires the power supply from the GOT set Channel No 8 using the standard interface With Channels No 5 to 7 ofthe extension interface the power cannot be supplied 8 BAR CODE READER CONNECTION 8 5 Precautions 8 7 z E 2 2 o Q q Q O c lt a 8 BAR CODE READER CONNECTION 8 5 Precautions PC CONNECTION 9 1 Connectable Model 9 2 9 2 Serial 9 3 9 3 Ethernet Connection 9 8 z E 2 2 O o LE o a e 9 PC REMOTE CONNECTION 9 1 Connectable Model List The RGB display is used for the remote personal computer operation connection The following GOT models support the remote personal computer operation connection Connection type GOT model Serial connection cu EE Ethernet connection 9 PC REMOTE CONNECTION 9 1 Connectable Model List 9 2 Serial Connection 9 2 1 System Configuration Extended func
219. communication module and the dedicated commands for a GOT microcomputer connection Example Request message for the batch read in word units 0401 command in format 8 QnA compatible 4C frame format 2 ji 1 1 Frame ID Network Request destination Request destination Host Address Block No No Station No No PLC No module 1 No module station No No Sum check o 4 1 olo olo o 5 6 olo o B 05 30H 30 46H 38H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30 30H 30H 42H 41H L H L H L H L H D 1 Sum check is performed in this range Character A section 1 ji 1 1 Us i T T T T Command Sub command e Head Device Device points 0 4 0 1 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 2 34 30H 31 30H 30H 30 44H 2 30H 30H 30H 31H 30H 30 30H 30H 30H 32H H H Ee ee QnA compatible 4C frame format 5 GOT cannot use the QnA compatible 4C frame format 5 2 42 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 5 Message Formats Details of data items in message format POINT Data code during communication Communication is performed in ASCII code 1 Block No network No PLC No request destination module I O No and station No Ignored in a microcomputer connection
220. ction ASCII m Year data Month data Day data Hour data Minute data Second data z 0 9 1 0 0 1 1 8 4 6 4 9 0 4 2 30H 39 31H 30 30H 31H 31H 38H 34H 36H 34H 39 30H 34H esponse message H L H L H E H L H L H L H L ormai H L H D H D P D H D H D D communication format 4 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection Binary 2 GOT host Year Month Day Hour Minute Second Day of data data data data data data week data 09H OAH 01 12H 2 31H 04H Response message NAK during faulty communication GOT host 15H 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 41 3 4 Message Formats 6 Set clock data 5 command w out station No set clock data command w station No The following shows an example of setting clock data of GOT at station No 27 Assuming the clock data of GOT is to be set to 2009 October 1 18 46 49 Thursday Time display 2009 10 01 18 46 49 THU After execution Item Message format format 3 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection ASCII Second Day of mand Station No Year data Month data Day Data Hour data data data Week dala 46H 32H 37H 30H 39 31H 30H 30H 31H 31H 38H 34H 36H 34H 9 30H 34 H D H
221. d Instantiate Logic POU Define an already defined instance to Right click Physical hardware Configuration IPC_33 FCX01 FCX Tasks Task0 CYCLIC and select Insert Program instance Define the program instance name and select ComEServerModbus for the program type f Defining Target Setting Define the IP address of STARDOM to set the communication settings Double click Physical hardware Configuration IPC_33 FCX01 FCX Target Setting and input the address or the host name g Downloading the project Execute Build Make Same as when pressing the function key F9 Download after confirming that the compile error does not occur Select Download in the project control dialog displayed when Online Project control is selected When the download is completed select Cold and start STARDOM Device range When performing monitoring with the GOT connected to a YOKOGAWA PLC and setting devices for objects use devices within the device range of the YOKOGAWA PLC When a device outside the range is set on an object an indefinite value is displayed on the object No error is displayed in the system alarm For details on the device range of YOKOGAWA PLCs refer to the following manual s YOKOGAWA PLC user s Manual Precautions 1 For dual redundant configuration When STARDOM is configured with a redundant system the connection is not supported 2 Not communicating with GOT and ST
222. d Bit pattern 1100 specification Result 0110 Original data 1010 Writ Th ical val t ite by the bit patt ified 3 e numerical values to write by the bit pattern are specifie Bit pattern 1100 Specification directly Result 1100 2 67 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 5 Message Formats lt o 2 E 2 2 E 2 a 4 Fill command 4 w out station fill command E w station No The following shows an example of writing 16 s to virtual devices R50 to R100 on the GOT at station No 27 Item Before execution 0000 0000 0000 After execution Message format L 1616H L 1616H 1616H 4 Request message host gt format 15 GOT F9 2 45 H 32 STX Com station No 7 0 37H 30H format 14 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection format 1 Start address 0 30H 6 36H 4 34H L 00 Series microcomputer connection format 2 End address 0 0 9 30H 30 43H 39 Write Data 31H 36 6 L i S STK Rang Staion No Startadress E 2 T 0 0 6 4 0 0 9 1 02H 45H 32H 37 30H 30 36H 34H 30H 30H 43H 39H 31H 36H 03 42H 45H 0
223. d as 2 digit BCD Unused Continued to next page 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 7 2 4 Device Data Area From previous page Address Description Set side Clock data hour b15 b8 b7 E 0 v v D7 A A Data of hours 00 to 23 stored as 2 digit BCD Unused Clock data minute b15 b8 b7 0 v v D8 A A Data of minutes 00 to 59 stored as 2 digit BCD Unused Clock data second System b15 b8 b7 0 N 111110 9 A A Data of seconds 00 to 59 stored as 2 digit BCD Unused Clock data day of week b15 b8 b7 bO mm v A 240 Day of week data stored 2 digit BCD 00 Sunday 01 Monday 02 Tuesday 03 Wednesday 04 Thursday 05 Friday 06 Saturday Unused D11 D12 Unused Continued to next page If a wrong day of the week is set by the clock data setting commands the clock data will differ from the time displayed on the utility Example When June 1 2004 Thursday is set by the clock data setting command the actual day of the week is Tuesday 04 is stored to D10 although Tuesday TUE will be displayed on the utility time display 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 4 Device Data Area From previous page Address Descript
224. d original operation panel The connection cable among the original operation panel the connector terminal block converter module and the general output device must be prepared by the user referring to the followings For GT15 DIO Connection diagram 3 When using A6TBY36 E connector terminal block module User created original operation panel XD01 XDO2 XDO3 XD04 XDO5 XDO6 XD07 73 7055 nos 7455 PHOS 7 55 77455 XSCNO7 60 61 62 1 63 64 65 66 1 67 S399 9 4899 42993 XSCNO6 1100 0 0079 40079 4009 0079 qom d XSCNO5 000 4 42565 4 00 465 400 40460 4109 5 04 30455 4 3 32455 4 3250 34455 4 3205 36 609 3 55 XSCNO3 20 21 2590 9 0 0 2240 2300 22455 22400 4 0 0 27459 XSCNO2 1065 9 165 4 FOS 1405 aos 5 01 1 0066 4 0455 4 02465 4 08 00 0 0065 4 0065 9 065 9 XSCNOO 03 5 24V ov B20 XD00 20 01 B19 XD02 19 XD03 B18 XD04 18 XD05 B17 XD06 A17 07 B16 XSCNO 16 XSCN1 B15 XSCN2 A15 XSCN3 B14 XSCN4 A14 XSCN5 B13 XS
225. dard use the switching hub and operate in an 9 environment where 10Mbps and 100Mbps can be mixed Alength between a hub and a node The maximum distance differs depending on the Ethernet device to be used The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used 10BASE T Max 4 nodes for a cascade connection 500m 100BASE TX Max 2 nodes for a cascade connection 205m When switching hubs are used the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades For the limit contact the switching hub manufacturer 4 Usethe straight cable 5 For details refer to the MODBUS TCP equipment manual 5 MODBUS R TCP CONNECTION 5 3 5 2 System Configuration 5 3 GOT Side Settings 5 3 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings 5 9 2 Communication detail settings Set the channel of the equipment to be connected to the GOT Manufacturer MODBUS Controler Type Network Duplex Settr Routing Informatio 2 5 58 Gateway yr Standard I F Ethernet Multi eid er 7 77 77 mar Oo Dear Sering GOT Ethernet Setting FTP Server es Transfer F Property Value B 4 0 Redundant GOT Net No 1 1 5 AD Station No Switch n GOT Ethernet Setting 192 168 318 GOT Communication Port
226. ds for a microcomputer connection of GOT Example Request message for the batch read in word units R command in format 13 Digital Electronics Corporation s memory link method extended mode ASCII code 1 n Station ESC Com Address Number of points Sum CR LF mand Check 0 0 R 0 0 6 4 0 0 0 2 5 E 05 30H 30H 1 52H 30H 30H 36H 34 30H 30H 30H 32 35H 45 OAH H D D gt Sum check is performed in this range Compatibility with the Digital Electronics Corporation s memory link method In the case of formats 12 and 13 Digital Electronics Corporation s memory link method extended mode a communication error may occur since some communication packets are not compatible with the Digital Electronics Corporation s memory link method in the communication To give the compatibility turn on the digital compatible signals 55580 to 65583 of the internal device and communicate in the fully compatible message format Device Function Bit Bit position Settings 0 Partly compatible Default GS580 Microcomputer connection extended setting CH1 Digital compatible signa bO Fully compatible Partly compatible Default Fully compatible GS581 Microcomputer connection extended setting CH2 Digital compatible signa bO Partly compatible Default GS582 Microcomputer connection extended setting CH3 Digita
227. e for example the interrupt lt codes shown below are transmitted interrupt output to the host side m The data amount number of bytes to be interrupt output is set at Interrupt Data Byte in Communication o Detail Settings 2 6 1 Setting communication interface Communication 06 z Address Eventtype Interrupt code 9 Bus Changed from OFF to ON 50 m Changed from ON to OFF 51 2 Changed from OFF to ON 52 5 0 to 49 SM1 User Changed from to OFF 53 Changed from OFF to ON 54 Lu 5 2 Changed from ON to OFF 55 t 1 1 Changed from OFF to ON 5 48 Changed from ON to OFF 1 SM49 Changed from OFF to ON 2 o Changed from ON to OFF 1 second cycle clock Turns ON OFF at a 1 second cycle 5 50 0 5 0 5 System 2 second cycle clock Turns ON OFF at a 2 second cycle 5 51 1 1 Interrupt code output disable flag Enables or disables the output of the interrupt code SM52 OFF Interrupt code output enabled Interrupt code output disabled User When set to disable the interrupt code output no interrupt data are output to the host Relevant devices D13 D14 SMO to 49 SM53 to 63 Unused 1 After the ON OFF state is changed the interrupt data is output within a period of 1 to 10 ms 2 When the ON OFF state of SMO to 49 is changed from the host side interrupt output is not performed 1 The side where virtual devi
228. e Check the devices that can be used and the device ranges 7 42 Number of data error 2 4 Device Data Area The number of requests exceeds the command range Review the contents of the message to transmit 7E43H Device error Check the devices that can be used and the device ranges A non existent device has been specified L3 2 4 Device Data Area clock data Setting error Review the contents of the message to transmit 7E46H 9 Check whether the non existent data is set e g setting 07 at the day of The setting value of the clock data has error the week as clock data Review the contents of the message to transmit Exceeded number of points error Check the devices that can be used and the device ranges The read write range exceeded the device range 2 4 Device Data Area Character error 7 20 A character other than A to Z 0109 space and control Review the contents of the message to transmit codes has been received Communication message error Check the communication cable and communication module attachment 7F23H EXT CR LF was not found within the upper limit of the Check the settings of Communication Detail Settings receive buffer Review the contents of the message to transmit Sum check error 24 The sum check code created from received data differs Review the contents of the message to transmit from the sum check code in the receive data Overrun error Check the settin
229. e attenuated by the cable The use of a video signal amplifier is recommended to correct the attenuated signals Connect a video signal amplifier in reference to the following Coaxial cable The cable length is 100m or more when 3C 2V is used Coaxial cable The cable length is 200m or more when 5C 2V is used 11 3 2 Analog RGB cable Connection diagram 1 Analog RGB connection diagram 1 Displaying video image on GOT Vision sensor PC side 150 drohmcoaxial GOT side POR fa 19 R RGND L7 1 RGND 2 Bs 7 H7 1 GGND B 3 Hs 1 B BGND 7 BGND GND GND HSYNC 13 4 1 HSYNC VSYNC 14 Hs A VSYNC GND 5 GND 4 NC 9 Twisted pair NC GND AE i NC SDA 12 NC NC PIER 3 C iore J 2 Analog RGB connection diagram 2 Displaying GOT screen on external monitor External monitor GOT side 750 drohmcoaxial side R 1 RGND 6 G 2 GGND 7 3 BGND 8 DGND 10 i HSYNC 13 VSYNC 14 DGND 5 NC 4 NC 9 NC 11 12 NC 15 Precautions when preparing a cable 1 Cable length The cable length differs depending on the specification of the vision sensor PC to be used Create a cable under the specification
230. e MODBUS RTU communication protocol and GT Designer3 MODBUS RTU Communication protocol Function code to be Representation on Device name used Address Designer3 Read Write 0000 000001 0 05 0001 000002 0 01 OxOF to to FFFE 065535 FFFF 065536 0000 100001 0001 100002 Input relay 0x02 to to FFFE 165535 165536 0000 300001 0001 300002 Input register 0x04 to to FFFE 365535 365536 0000 400001 Holding 0x06 0901 400002 register 940 0 10 19 0 465535 FFFF 465536 0000 600000 Extension file 0001 register 0x14 0x15 to to 270E 609998 270F 609999 Address conversion example When monitoring the holding register s address 1234H GT Designer3 displays 4 since GT Designer3 processes the internal conversion in decimal format as follows GT Designer3 converts the holding register s address 1234H to 04660 in decimal format Then 1 is added to this decimal address since the holding register s address on GT Designer3 always starts from 1 Therefore the holding register s address 1234H is displayed as 404661 on GT Designer3 Holding register 1234H v Y 4 04660 1 404661 MODBUS communication control function the GS device 1 Function overview This function is to prevent the communication response delay that occurs because the devices on the MODBUS network differs from eac
231. e 2 Option device Model equipment 3j 27 1 Built into GOT 93 For the system configuration between 1 bar code reader GT the GOT and PLC for 1 GOT 27 refer to each chapter 1 GT15 RS2 9P 1 For connectable bar code readers system equipment available bar code types and connection cables refer to the following Technical News 37 List of valid devices applicable for GOT2000 series GOT A 0064 When using the RS 232 communication unit Use the RS 232 communication unit of the for connecting to a barcode reader However when the RS 232 communication unit is used the power cannot be supplied to a bar code reader from the GOT aly System configuration between and PLC For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC refer to each chapter 237 Mitsubishi Products 57 Non Mitsubishi Products 1 Non Mitsubishi Products 2 227 Microcomputer MODBUS Products Peripherals 8 2 8 BAR CODE READER CONNECTION 8 1 Connectable Model List 8 3 Side Settings 8 3 1 Setting communication interface Controller setting Set the channel of the equipment to be connected to the GOT Contr pe A controler Setting l CH1 MELSEC Q QS 0 Gone tanufacturer MITSUBISHI controller Type MELSEC Q Q5 Q17nD M NC DR CRnD 700 3 58 Routing Informatio 8 56 Gateway Ur Standard F R
232. e GOT 0 0 0 0 to Default 192 168 0 18 255 255 255 255 When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the i Utility the latest setting is effective Set ine subnet z network Only for connection via z router 0 0 0 0 to Subnet Mask sub network is not used the 255 255 255 255 default value is set Default 255 255 255 0 Set the router address of the i 14 MM o MID Gateway D 255 255 255 255 5 router a Default 0 0 0 0 a 1024 to 5010 Peripheral S W Set the port No for the S W 5014 to 65534 Communicatio communication Except for 5011 n Port No Default 5015 5012 5013 and 49153 1024 to 5010 Set the GOT port No for the 5014 to 65534 Transparent transparent function Except for 5011 Port No Default 5014 5012 5013 and 49153 5 MODBUS R TCP CONNECTION 5 5 5 3 GOT Side Settings 5 3 4 Ethernet setting Controler Setting Please set the Ethernet Setting of the Controller with a list of lower Item Description Range The host is displayed The host is indicated with an asterisk Set the network No of the N W No connected Ethernet module 1 to 239 Default blank Set the station No of the PLC No connected Ethernet module 1 to 247
233. e Single Coil 1 r n Bit 1 MODBUS 0x06 Write Single Register 1 Device OxOF Write Multiple Coils 1 to 1968 0 00001 0x10 Write Multiple Register 1 to 123 Kind lelle 0 aU 0x14 Read File Record 1 to 124 Range 456 3 Device 0x15 Write File Record 1to 122 00001 65536 weji Network QG Other NetworkNo 1 Station 1 E OK Cancel 4 Item Description Set the device name device number and bit number The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit of word Device Set the file No The file No can be set only when select 6 at Device File No Informati Displays the device type and setting range which are selected on in Device Set the station number of the controller to be monitored Host Select this item for monitoring the host controller Select this for monitoring other controllers After selecting the item set the station number and network number of the controller to be monitored NW No For the MODBUS RTU connection set 1 For the MODBUS TCP connection set the network No Station No Set the station No Network Other 4 MODBUS R RTU CONNECTION 4 5 MODBUS R RTU Equipment Side Setting Address GT Designer3 converts the device numbers into decimal format according to the address map of the MODBUS RTU equipment to be used The table below shows the representations on th
234. e cause of failure be attributable to Mitsubishi Electric Corporation 2 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 3 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases 1 Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design 2 Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user 3 When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced Replacing consumable parts such as the battery backlight and fuses Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi Any other failure found not to be the responsibilit
235. e clock Turns ON OFF at a 2 second cycle 5 51 1 1 Interrupt code output disable flag Enables or disables the output of the interrupt code SM52 OFF Interrupt code output enabled ON Interrupt code output disabled User When set to disable the interrupt code output no interrupt data are output to the host Relevant devices D13 D14 SMO to 49 SM53 to 63 Unused 1 After the ON OFF state is changed the interrupt data is output within a period of 1 to 10 ms 2 When the ON OFF state of SMO to 49 is changed from the host side interrupt output is not performed POINT 1 The side where virtual devices are set System Seton the system side User Seton the user side by sending request messages from host or using the touch switches etc on the GOT 2 Interrupt outputs SMO to 49 To disable the interrupt output turn ON 5 52 interrupt code output disable flag 7 5 3 3 6 SM devices To enable the interrupt output set 8 bits to the data length at Communication Detail Settings 27354 Setting communication interface Communication settings When 7 bits is set the MSB 8th bit is ignored Example 7 3 14 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 3 Device Data Area Differences in address specifications by data format The address specification of devices varies depending on the data format The following shows the address specification values for each data format
236. e following shows an example of setting the clock data of GOT Assuming the clock data of GOT is to be set to 2004 June 1 18 46 49 Tuesday Time display 2004 06 01 18 46 49 TUE After execution Item Message format Example Format 3 A compatible 1C frame format 1 Character C section T T T T Sum Station No PLC No Command Wait Check 0 0 0 0 5 0 Following 1 6 4 05H 30H 30H 30H 30H 54H 53H 30H 36H 34H H L H D H L H L Request message 4 gt host Sum check is performed in this range 1 Year data Month data Day data Hour data Minute data 22 34H 30H 36H 30H 31H 31H 38H 34H 36H 34H 39H D 1 D 109 1 D 9 0 T Day of week data Response message Station PLC No duringnormal communication 0 0 0 0 host 30 30H 30H 30H Example Format 3 A compatible 1C frame format 1 Station No PLC No Error code Response message 4 44444444 4444444 44 during faulty 0 0 0 0 0 5 communication 15H 30H 30H 30H 30 30H 35 host H D H L H L The above is the case where an overrun error 05H has occurred When a wrong day of th
237. e made by GT Designer3 or the Delay Time ms Utility the latest setting is effective Format x 4 Description Range Set this item when change the 4800803 ne 9600bps transmission speed used for Transmission ME R 19200bps communication with the connected Speed equipment 38400bps 22 57600bps Default 9600bps 115200bps Set this item when change the data Data Bit length used for communication with 7bits 8bits the connected equipment Default 8bits Specify the stop bit length for Stop Bit communications 1bit 2bits Default 198 Specify whether or not to perform a N parity check and how it is performed as Parity s Even during communication Odd Default Even Set whether or not to perform a sum Sum Check check during communication Yes or No Default Done Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs Reti 0 to 5times When receiving no response after retries the communication times out Default Otime Set the time period for a Timeout Time communication to time out 3 to 30sec Default 3sec Set this item to adjust the transmission timing of the Delay Time communication request from the 0 to 3000ms GOT Default Oms z E 2 2 O a LL x Select the communication format Default 15 Dedicated protocol Format 10 LS Industrial Systems Co L
238. e week has been set by the clock data setting command If a wrong day of the week is set by the clock data setting commands the clock data will differ from the time displayed on the utility Example When June 1 2004 Thursday is set by the clock data setting command the actual day of week is Tuesday Tuesday TUE will be displayed on the utility time display 2 40 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 5 Message Formats Error code list The following shows error code error contents cause and measures Error code Description Action Ban amor Check the communication cable and communication module attachment 01H y NUM Check the settings of Communication Detail Settings The parity bit does not match Match the GOT and host transmission settings Sum check error 02H The sum check code created from received data differs Review the contents of the message to transmit from the sum check code in the receive data Protocol error 03H Received a message that does not follow the control Check the settings of Communication Detail Settings procedure of the format set at Communication Detail Review the contents of the message to transmit Settings Overrun error Check the settings of Communication Detail Settings 05H The next data was transmitted from the host before GOT 9 2 BIS Decrease the transmission speed completes the processing of the data received Character section error Revie
239. e week to be read set to the GOT clock data In the format 3 the address notated in decimal is converted to a 2 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted from the upper digit In the format 4 the address notated in decimal is converted to a 1 digit Binary code binary and transmitted 57 m 5 Read clock data 6 command w out station No read clock data command w station No 57 m 6 Set clock data 5 command w out station No set clock data command w station No 10 Data Specifies the data to read from write to the specified device data word unit In the format 3 the address notated in hexadecimal is converted to a 4 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted from the upper digit In the format 4 the address notated in hexadecimal is converted to a 2 digit Binary code binary and transmitted from the upper digit 11 Write data Specifies the data to write to the specified device data The address notated in hexadecimal is converted to a 2 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted from the upper digit 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 33 3 4 Message Formats LE 2 124 I LE u z E o 2 2 O 14 E 2 O o a Message format 1 Batch read 0 command w out station No batch read A command w station No a When reading a word device The following shows an example of reading four bytes of virtual devices R100 to R101 from the GOT at sta
240. ect data and communication settings onto the GOT Verifying the project data and OS Verify the standard monitor OS communication driver option lt 374 2 2Checking the package data writing GOT OS project data and communication settings are properly written onto the GOT Attaching the communication unit and connecting the cable 71 30ption Devices for the Respective Connection 37 AConnection Cables for the Respective Connection lt 3 Each chapter System Configuration lt _ gt Each chapter Connection Diagram Mount the optional equipment and prepare connect the connection cable according to the connection type Verifying GOT recognizes connected equipment Verify the GOT recognizes controllers on Communication 1 5 GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment Settings of the Utility gt Verifying the is monitoring normally Verify the GOT is monitoring normally using Utility Developer 2 71 6 for Normal Monitoring etc 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 11 Setting the Communication Interface Set the communication interface of GOT and the connected equipment When using the GOT at the first time make sure to set the channel of communication interface and the communication driver before writing to GOT Set the communication interface of the GOT at Controller Setting and I F Communication Setting in GT Desi
241. ed Equipment Verify the GOT recognizes controllers on Communication Settings of the Utility Channel number of communication interface communication drivers allocation status Communication unit installation status For details on the Utility refer to the following manual 57 GOT2000 Series User s Manual Utility 1 After powering up the GOT touch GOT basic Utility main menu GOT basic set func set Maintenance Monitor aid control Utility cal Communication Setting Standard I F Setting Channel Driver assign poll SB A QnA QCPU QJ7 1024 9 lost PC Extend F Setting Extend 1 1 Extend 1 2 1st ChNo None ChNo None 0 None 0 None ChNo None ChNo None 0 None 0 None ChNo None ChNo None 0 None 0 None inition of ChNo 8 Barcode connection ther connection OK connection 9 connection 1 20 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment set Controller from the Utility The Communication Settings appears Verify that the communication driver name to be used is displayed in the communication interface box to be used When the communication driver name is not displayed normally carry out the following procedure again gt 1 1Setting the Communication Interface Utility 1 How to display Utility at default Utili
242. emory link method Command ASCII Command name Description Max number of points Symbol processed code Batch read Reads bit devices in 16 point units 64 words 1024 points ai in word units Reads word devices in 1 point units 64 points Batch write Writes to bit devices in 16 point units 64 words 1024 points di in word units Writes to word devices in 1 point units 64 points 49H Interrupt inquiry Issues an interrupt inquiry List of commands for formats 6 7 4E frame formats 8 9 QnA compatible frame Sub Max ber of point Command Command name Description command processed Batch read 0401 0004 aerea Reads bit devices in 1 point units 64 points in bit units Reads bit devices in 16 point units 64 words 1024 points 0401 Batch in word units Reads word devices in 1 point units 64 points Batch writ 1401 Boni Writes to bit devices in 1 point units 64 points in bit units i Writes to bit devices 16 point units 3 64 words 1024 points 1401 Batch ps word units Writes to word devices in 1 point units 64 points Random read Reads multiple different bit devices in 16 point and 32 point units 64 words 1024 points 0403 0000 571 in word units Reads multiple different word devices in 1 point and 2 point units 64 points Random write 1402 0001
243. enuated by the cable The use of a video signal amplifier is recommended to correct the attenuated signals Connect a video signal amplifier in reference to the following Coaxial cable The cable length is 100m or more when 3C 2V is used Coaxial cable The cable length is 200m or more when 5C 2V is used 13 4 GOT Side Settings 13 4 1 Setting communication interface Multimedia setting Controller setting 2 4 Set the channel of the equipment to be connected to the GOT 2 Seng Playback External Notification Setting Recording Setting Recording Mode Standard Extended m Controller Setting CH1 MELSEC Q QS 0 5 CH3 None I SEWOIR DUPIEX fj Routing Informatio E Dk Gateway Communication Eh Gateway Serve P 88 Gateway Clent 5 FTP Server File Transfer F Property s Q Redundant Transmission Speed BPS Station No Swite Timeout Time Sec Delay Time ms Format Monitor Speed High Normal Video Input Signal NTSC 640x480 MITSUBISHI 5 0 95 Q17nD M NC DR CRnD 700 Recording Size 640x480 0 320x240 Frame Rate 15 Fes Recording Time 240 Sec Maximum Size 30000 KB File Name yyyymmdd hhmmss 3GP 7 Save to File Server Before After Event Recording Setting
244. er time adjust the send delay time why Hinr _ If the communication with MODBUSS RTU equipment is not established some equipment which requires a delay longer than 3 5 character time may be connected Adjust the send delay time in the communication detail setting 1 Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual GOT2000 Series User s Manual Utility 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective z E 2 2 O o 5 E x 2 em Q o 4 MODBUS R RTU CONNECTION 4 9 4 4 GOT Side Settings 4 5 MODBUS R RTU Equipment Side Setting MODBUS RTU equipment For details of tte MODBUSS RTU equipment refer to the manual of MODBUS RTU equipment to be used Function Code The GOT supports the following function codes Number of device that is accessible Function Code Function with one message Unit point s 0x01 Read Coils 1 to 2000 4 5 1 Communication settings 0x02 Read Discrete Inputs 1 to 2000 0x03 Read Holding Registers 1 to 125 Device setting items for GT Designer3 Read Input Registers tioa 0x05 Writ
245. es refer to the following 2 6 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings 2 24 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 5 Message Formats Details of data items in message format Data code during communication Communication is performed in ASCII code excluding interrupt output 1 Control codes Symbol ASCII code Description STX 02 Start of Text start marker of message frame ETX 03 End of Text end marker of message frame EOT 04H End of Transmission ENQ 05H Enquiry start of enquiry NAK 15H Negative ACK error response ACK 06 Acknowledge write completion response LF OAH Line Feed CL OCH Clear CR Carriage Return Command Specifies the contents to access from the host to GOT The command is converted to a 2 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted from the upper digit For details of the commands that can be used refer to the following gt 2 5 2 List of commands Address Specifies the head No of the device data to be read written The address notated in decimal is converted to a 4 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted from the upper digit For details of the device range that can be accessed refer to the following gt 24 Device Data Area Number of points Specifies the number of device data to be read written Setting range 1 to 64 The address notated in decimal is converted to a 2 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted from the up
246. et by the clock data setting command the actual day of the week is Thursday 2 is stored to SD9 although Thursday THU will be displayed on the utility time display The side where virtual devices are set System Set on the system side User Seton the user side by sending request messages from host or using the touch switches etc on the GOT Details and actions for errors error codes stored into SD2 Error code Description Action 0 No error 4 101 Parity error Check the communication cable and communication module i The parity bit does not match attachment mm Framing error Check the settings of Communication Detail Settings The data bit and or stop bit are not correct Match the GOT and host transmission settings Overrun error 3 103 The next data was transmitted from the host before GOT completes the processing of the data received Check the settings of Communication Detail Settings Decrease the transmission speed Communication message error Check the communication cable and communication module attachment 4 104 EXT CR could not be found before the upper limit of the mm Check the settings of Communication Detail Settings receive buffer was exceeded Review the contents of the message to transmit Review the contents of the message to transmit 5 Command error Check the commands in the message An unsupported command was used 2 2
247. evices 65570 to 65576 and GS devices 65590 to 65617 refer to the next page 5 MODBUS R TCP CONNECTION 5 9 5 5 Device Range that Can Be Set z E 2 2 O O E 5 e o 5 10 b When sharing communication settings between multiple channel numbers The table below shows the settings for the GS device GS device Description Set value 0 Using Function Code 1 Not using Function Code OF VERO Biti 0 Using Function Code 10 1 Not using Function Code 10 Function Code 01 0 1000 GS571 Specification for the max number of 1 to 2000 Specify the maximum number coil read times Other than above 2000 Function Code 02 0 1000 GS572 Specification for the max number of 1 to 2000 Specify the maximum number input relay read times Other than above 2000 Function Code 03 0 125 GS573 Specification for the max number of 1 to 125 Specify the maximum number holding register read times Other than above 125 Function Code 04 0 125 GS574 Specification for the max number of 1 to 125 Specify the maximum number input register read times Other than above 125 0 800 Function Code OF 1 to 800 Specify the maximum number GS575 Specification for the max number of Other than above 800 multiple coil write times When of GS570 is 1 the function code OF is not used and therefore the setting of GS575 will be disa
248. ex EE n R GARE ERR exe 2 21 2 5 3 Formats 1 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer 2 24 2 5 4 Formats to 6 A compatible 1C 2 37 2 5 5 Formats 7 to 10 QnA compatible 3C 4C 2 42 2 5 6 Formats 11 to 13 Digital Electronics Corporation s memory link method 2 50 2 5 7 Formats 14 15 GOT F900 Series microcomputer 2 59 GOT Side Settings 2 73 2 6 1 Setting communication interface Communication 2 73 2 62 Communication detail 2 73 System Configuration 2 75 Device Range that Can 2 21 1 1 1 11 11 AE anis ensis teen 2 78 re M Litres 2 79 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 Microcomputer connection Ethernet eene ener 3 2 System Gonflguration RR df ba ad i dee 3 2 3 2 1 For the microcomputer connection Ethernet 3 2 CELLS 3 3 9 3 1 teret Mme ei
249. exceeds the maximum address device number step number for each process Correct the specified number of points or the start address device number 3 3 Device Data Area When reading data which the command bit length is longer than the specification the set number of write data points Check the command data length and set the data again differs from the specified number of points value The command start address head device number start step number specification from the microcomputer exceeds the range that can be specified Value outside the GOT parameter setting range is specified 0058 in the microcomputer program and file register R reading writing Correct the values to values that can be specified in each process Word device is specified in the command for bit device the command for word device a bit device start number Correct the command or the specified device is specified in other than hexadecimal Request content cannot be analyzed because the text length LE 2 a I E u z E o 2 2 O 14 E 2 O o 4 00 1 Review the text length or the head t data length or request data length is too short Mew Med eng 00 2 Request cannot be processed Correct the request content and command COD6H The specification of network No and station No have error Review the network No
250. f Valid Devices Applicable for GOT2000 Series with MODBUS Connection GOT A 0037 5 2 5 MODBUS R TCP CONNECTION 5 1 Connectable Model List 5 2 System Configuration 5 2 1 Connecting to MODBUS R TCP equipment Hub am Connection cable Connection cable GOT Commun Tee Maximum External Maximum Number of connectable Controller ication PR a Option GOT equipment Tee Cable model seamen Cable model comen Ne guip length length 3 100BASE TX 100BASE TX When controller GOT Shielded twisted Shielded twisted is N 1 The number of z pair cable STP or pair cable STP or controllers for 1 GOT unshielded twisted unshielded twisted is TCP 128 or less I pair cable UTP of pair cable UTP of m category 5 or category 5 or When controller GOT 2 MODBUS higher higher Built into sai 2 ITCP Ethernet 100m Hub 100m is 1 N 10BASE T 10BASE T GOT The following shows equipment Shielded twisted Shielded twisted the number of GOTs pair cable STP or pair cable STP or for 1 controller 5 unshielded twisted unshielded twisted Depends on the pair cable of pair cable UTP of MODBUS TCP category 3 or category 3 or 85 higher higher equipment used 2 1 Connect the GOT to the MODBUS TCP equipment via a hub a Use cables connectors and hubs that meet the IEEE802 3 10BASE T 100BASE TX standards a 2 When connecting GT2000 to an equipment that meets the 10BASE T 2 5 stan
251. frame 2 503109 correspond to GDO to 6 on the GOT F900 Series Access to 503 to 9 be also made by the specification of the addresses 3000 to 300DH of GDO to 6 on the GOT F900 Series 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 13 3 3 Device Data Area 3 3 6 SM devices The SM devices are bit devices into which interrupt outputs and clock data that turn ON OFF at 1 second cycles List of SM devices The following shows the SM devices virtual devices inside the GOT Address Description Set side Interrupt output When the ON OFF state of SMO to 49 is changed by a touch switch on the GOT for example the interrupt codes shown below are transmitted interrupt output to the host 172 The data amount number of bytes to be interrupt output is set at Interrupt Data Byte in Communication Detail Settings 3 5 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings Address Event type Interrupt code 8 0 Changed from OFF to ON 50 Changed from to OFF 51 SMO to 49 Su Changed from OFF to ON 52 User Changed from ON to OFF 53H Changed from OFF to ON 54H SM2 2 Changed from ON to OFF 55 1 1 1 Changed from OFF to 5 48 Changed from ON to OFF 1 Changed from OFF to ON B2 SM49 2 Changed from ON to OFF 1 second cycle clock Turns ON OFF at a 1 second cycle 5 50 0 5 0 5 System 2 second cycl
252. g 3 4 2 List of commands Station No Station No is used to identify the GOT with which the host communicates Setting range 0 to 31 In the format 3 the address notated in decimal is converted to a 2 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted from the upper digit In the format 4 the address notated in decimal is converted to a 1 digit Binary code binary and transmitted The GOT processes only commands whose station No matches the Host Address 0 to 31 set at Communication Detail Settings The message of command whose station No does not match is ignored For setting method of Communication Detail Settings refer to the following gt 3 5 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings Address Specifies the head No of the device data to be read written In the format 3 the address notated in hexadecimal is converted to a 4 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted from the upper digit In the format 4 the address notated in hexadecimal is converted to a 2 digit Binary code binary and transmitted from the upper digit For details of the device range that can be accessed refer to the following 3 3 Device Data Area Bit pattern Specifies the pattern of the bits to change In the format 3 the address notated in hexadecimal is converted to a 2 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted from the upper digit In the format 4 the address notated in hexadecimal is converted to a 1 digit Binar
253. g 7 14 7 CONNECTION TO EXTERNAL I O DEVICE 7 4 GOT Side Settings External device setting a r External I O Operation Panel Destination Extend I F 1st Operation Panel Setting luse Operation Panel Setting of Operation Panel is not required for the use of External IO only Panel Key Setting Display Type Initialize EPS MD41 Compatible Compatible 1 Select Common gt Peripheral Setting External Operation Panel from the menu 2 Set the interface to which the external I O device is connected 3 Checkthe Use Operation Panel to set the operation panel For details on the operation panel settings refer to the following manual L gt GT Designer3 GOT2000 Help Click the OK button when settings are completed 1 Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual GOT2000 Series User s Manual Utility 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 7 5 Precautions External I O function setting on
254. ge Formats Formats 1 2 Formats 3 to 6 Formats 7 to 10 Formats 11 to 13 Formats 14 15 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection A compatible 1C frame QnA compatible 3 4 frame Digital Electronics Corporation s memory link method GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 4 Device Data Area Address specification value Address Format Format Format Format Format 1 2 3to6 7 to 10 11 to 13 14 15 8000 8000 8001 DO 0 DO DO 0000 S 8001H Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits 8002H 8002H 8003H D1 1 D1 D1 00011 gt SA A S 8003 Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits 9FFEH QFFFH 04095 4095 04095 04095 OFFFH A S 9FFFH Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits 2 4 2 Rdevices The R devices are word devices into which user data are stored All of these devices can be used as a user area List of devices and differences in address specification by data format The following shows the R devices virtual devices inside the GOT The address specification values different depending on the data format are also given below l Address specification value lt 12 Model Address Format Format Format Format Format 172 3106 7 to 10 11 to 13 14 15 o 2 0000 0000H 0001 RO 4096 RO RO 1000 0001 Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits m 2
255. gners 1 1 1 Setting connected equipment Channel setting Set the channel of the equipment connected to the GOT Setting Controller Setting CH1 MELSEC QnA ME cH2 None MITSUBISHI CH3 None QD MELSEC QnA MELDAS C6 Network Duplex Settir Routing Informatio Gateway yr Standard I F RS422 485 a Driver CPU 0371 24 L371C24 Gateway Client Detail Setting Fu File Transfer F Redundant D Station No Switch o z E z gt o x 2 a 2 2 5 lt a 1 Select Common Controller Setting from the menu 2 The Controller Setting dialog box appears Select the channel No to be used from the list menu 3 Referto the following explanations for the setting Channel 2 to 4 Use the channel No 2 to No 4 when using the Multi channel function For details of the Multi channel function refer to the following gt Mitsubishi Products 20 MULTI CHANNEL FUNCTION 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 3 1 1 Setting the Communication Interface Setting item This section describes the setting items of the Manufacturer Controller Type Driver and I F When using the channel No 2 to No 4 put a check mark at Use CH Controller Setting CH1 MELSEC Q QS
256. gs of Communication Detail Settings TF67H The next data was transmitted from the host before GOT 9 PPS Decrease the transmission speed completes the processing of the data received Framing error 7 68 The data bit and or stop bit not correct Check the communication cable and communication module attachment Check the settings of Communication Detail Settings 7F69H Parity error Match the GOT and host transmission settings The parity bit does not match Check the communication cable and communication module attachment Buffer full error Check the settings of Communication Detail Settings The receive buffer overflowed Review the contents of the message to transmit 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 49 2 5 Message Formats lt 2 E 2 2 E 2 a 2 5 6 Formats 11 to 13 Digital Electronics Corporation s memory link method Basic format of data communication This is the same format as the protocol of the Digital Electronics Corporation s memory link method For details of the basic format of data communication refer to the following manual 257 The connection manual of the device manufactured by Digital Electronics Corporation This section describes items whose settings differ from the protocols of the Digital Electronics Corporation s memory link method and dedicated comman
257. h other in network specification This function is effective for the MODBUS network conditions as described below When only a part of function codes is supported Example OF is not supported When the maximum transfer size of function code is small Example The maximum number of coil read times is 1000 2 Communication setting When the MODBUS RTU communication driver is assigned to multiple channel numbers using the multi channel function the following cases are possible The communication settings are shared between the assigned multiple channel numbers or the individual communication setting is configured to a specific channel number By setting the device GS579 either the GS device used for sharing communication settings 05570 to GS576 or the GS device used for individual communication setting GS590 to GS617 is validated GS Description Set value device Bit 0 Configure the Ch1 communication settings between GS570 to GS576 1 Configure the Ch1 communication Settings between GS590 to GS596 Bit1 0 Configure the Ch2 communication settings between GS570 to GS576 1 Configure the Ch2 communication settings between GS590 to GS603 Bit2 0 Configure the Ch3 communication Settings between GS570 to GS576 1 Configure the Ch3 communication Settings between GS604 to GS610 Bit3 0 Configure the Ch4 communication Settings between GS570 to GS576 1 Configure the Ch4 communication Settings between GS611 to
258. he GOT side anddata 6 4 44 aaa transfer packets bM VM M MP Assumin that host side rograms use programs 02H 57H 44H 30 30H 32 30H 30H 31H 30H 30H 30H 31H 03 38H 32H 9 prog prog 09 09 1 101 60 00 0 10 H 1 which perform the processing on host side shown below Sum check is performed in this range 2 Displays the send packet structure of the numerical value display 2 Packet Display batch write packet Processing Processing on host side used for Processing on 21 datatransfer side m Number of IECUR STX Command Address oints Data 1 D21 ETX Sum check Opens the port mn nn e w D O 2 1 0 1 Changes Screen 1 any value according to batch 02 57H 44H 30H 30H 32H 31H 30H 31H 03H data section o Writes 1 to the screen switching Displays base 0 0 switching device D20 Write screen 1 5 Sum check is performed in this range 5 21 packet 3 Displays the send packet structure of the numerical value display Receives a response from batch read packet Initial the GOT processing Judges whether or not STX Command Address 2
259. he format of messages that can be used in the microcomputer connection Ethernet 3 4 1 Data format type and application Data format type and application Communication is possible using any of the data formats shown below 1 Formats 1 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection This is the same message format as when a microcomputer connection is established with the GOT A900 series GOT A900 series microcomputer connection This format is used when the GOT is connected to the host in a 1 1 ASCII connection The data format is ASCII Refer to Format 1 727343 This format is used when the is connected to the host in a 1 1 connection The data format is Binary GOT A900 series microcomputer connection Binary Format 2 2 Formats 3 4 GOT F900 series microcomputer connection This is the compatible message format with when a microcomputer connection is established with the GOT F900 Series GOT F900 series microcomputer connection This format is used when the GOT is connected to the host in a 1 1 ASCII connection The data format is ASCII Refer to Format 3 37344 This format is used when the GOT is connected to the host in a 1 1 connection The data format is Binary GOT F900 series microcomputer connection Format 4 orma Binary 3 Format 5 Digital Electronics Corporation s memory link method This is the compati
260. hod for each data format refer to the following 2 5 Message Formats Formats 1 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection Formats 3 to 6 A compatible 1C frame Formats 7 to 10 QnA compatible 3C 4C frame Formats 11 to 13 Digital Electronics Corporation s memory link method Formats 14 15 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection 2 In formats to 6 values are specified within a range of M9000 to 9052 3 In formats 7 to 10 values are specified within a range of SMO to 52 4 Forreading or writing data word units specify the addresses 16 point units Example SMO SM16 SM32 etc 2 18 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 4 Device Data Area 2 5 Message Formats This section describes the format of messages that can be used in the microcomputer connection serial 2 5 1 Data format type and application Data format type and application Communication is possible using any of the data formats shown below 1 Formats 1 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection This is the same message format as when a microcomputer connection is established with the GOT A900 series format 1 connection A 257 253 format 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection format 1 2 Formats 3 to 6 A compatible 1C frame This is the same message format as when communication is performed using the dedicated protocol of the A series computer link module Type Name Description Refer to
261. ice Data Area 3 3 4 devices The M devices are bit devices into which user data are stored All of these devices can be used as a user area List of M devices and differences in address specification by data format The following shows the M devices virtual devices inside the GOT The address specification values different depending on the data format are also given below 1 Address Address specification value Format3 4 Format When GS580 b8 When GS580 b8 Format Format b7 56 55 54 53 b2 b1 50 12 GS581 b8 GS581 b8 5 Suas GS582 b8 or GS582 b8 or GS583 b8 is ON GS583 b8 is OFF M7 M6 M5 4 M3 M2 M1 MO 2000 2001 8320 2080 15 14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M9 M8 2001 2000 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 2002 2003 Sameas 8321 2081 address 31 M30 M29 M28 M27 M26 M25 M24 2003 2002 column on left M2039 M2038 M2037 M2036 M2035 M2034 M2033 M2032 20FEH 20FFH 8447 20FFH 2047 M2046 M2045 M2044 M2043 2042 M2041 M2040 20FFH 20FEH 1 For the address specification method for each data format refer to the following 34 Message Formats Formats 1 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection Formats 3 4 GOT F900 series microcomputer connection Formats 5 Digital Electronics Corporation s memory link method Formats 6 7 4E frame Formats 8 9 QnA compatible 3E frame 2 For reading or writing
262. ies Mitsubishi Electric Corporation of the intention the application is clearly defined and any special quality is not required GOT is a registered trademark of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Microsoft Windows Windows NT Windows Server Windows Vista and Windows 7 are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Adobe and Adobe Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated Pentium and Celeron are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation in the United States MODBUS is a trademark of Schneider Electric SA VNC is a registered trademark of RealVNC Ltd in the United States and other countries Other company and product names herein are either trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners SH NA 081200ENG C GOT2000 Series Connection Manual Microcomputer MODBUS Products Peripherals MODEL GOT2000 CON4 SW1 E MODEL CODE When exported from Japan this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry for service transaction permission SH NA 081200ENG C 1401 MEE MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE TOKYO BUILDING 2 7 3 MARUNOUCHI CHIYODA KU TOKYO 100 8310 JAPAN NAGOYA WORKS 1 14 YADA MINAMI 5 CHOME HIGASHI KU NAGOYA JAPAN Specifications subject to change without n
263. igit Transmit the data converted to a 4 digit binary code from the lower ASCII code from the upper digit two digits Year month day hour minute second and day of the week data Specifies year month day hour minute second and day of the week to be read set to the GOT clock data 257 Message format 1 Read clock data 1901 command gt Message format 2 Set clock data 0901 command Transmit the data notated in decimal converted to a 2 digit code from the upper digit Transmit the data converted to a 2 digit binary code End code Microcomputer side Appended to the response message from the microcomputer side If an error occurs at the microcomputer side the error code is displayed m Error code list Transmit the data notated in hexadecimal converted to a 4 digit Transmit the data converted to a 4 digit binary code from the lower ASCII code from the upper digit two digits When connecting a microcomputer etc that uses the MC protocol of the Q QnA series serial communication module with the GOT When connecting a microcomputer etc that uses the MC protocol of the Q QnA series serial communication module with the GOT correct the commands to be used and the device ranges to match the GOT specifications 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 4 Message Formats Message format The following shows the message format of the dedicated commands for a microcomputer c
264. il the executing communication is completed 14 6 14 RFID CONNECTION 14 4 Precautions 19 WIRELESS LAN CONNECTION 15 1 System 15 2 15 2 GOT Side Settings ER Eu 15 3 15 3 Precautions 2 15 5 WIRELESS LAN CONNECTION 15 WIRELESS LAN CONNECTION wireless LAN connection precautions Wireless LAN connection is available for use only in Japan 15 1 System Configuration 15 1 1 Connecting to wireless LAN Communication driver TIT Connection type dependent Varies according to the connection type Wireless LAN access point GOT PLC Number of connectable equipment Model name Option device Model GT For the wireless LAN access point use the 21 Foc the system configurator bise Gets can be GT25 WLAN between the GOT and PLC refer to connected to one wireless LAN access point compatible with IEEE802 11b g n each chapter access point 1 The number of connectable GOTs depends on the specifications of wireless LAN access point System configuration between the GOT and PLC For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC refer to each chapter gt GOT2000 Series Connection Manual Mitsubishi Product For GT Works3 Version1 gt GOT2000 Series Connection Manua
265. im model GT15 RS2 9P RS 232 serial communication unit D sub 9 pin male Serial communication unit GT15 RS4 9S RS 422 485 serial communication unit D sub 9 pin female GT15 RS4 TE RS 422 485 serial communication unit terminal block GT15 J71LP23 25 Optical loop unit MELSECNET H communication unit GT15 J71BR13 Coaxial bus unit Optical loop unit GT15 J71LP23 25 MELSECNET H communication unit used in the MNET 10 mode MELSECNET 10 communication unit Coaxial bus unit MELSECNET H communication unit used in the MNET 10 mode CC Link IE Controller NON 1 GT15 J71GP23 SX Network communication unit Optical loop unit CC Link IE Field 1 GT15 J71GF13 T2 Network communication unit CC Link IE Field Network 1000BASE T unit CC Link communication unit GT15 J61BT13 Intelligent device station unit CC LINK Ver 2 compatible Ethernet communication unit Built into GOT Ethernet 100Base TX For the connection to personal computer Wireless LAN communication unit GT25 WLAN IEEE802 11b g n compatible built in antenna station wireless LAN adapter for Japanese domestic use 1 12 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection 1 3 2 Option unit Product name Model Specifications Multimedia unit GT27 MMR Z For video input signal NTSC PAL 1 ch playing movie
266. ime display l lt mA o 2 E 2 2 E 2 a 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 55 2 5 Message Formats 3 In the case of interrupt inquiry The following shows an example of an interrupt inquiry when data are written to the interrupt output devices D13 and D14 Assuming that 3139H is written to D13 and 55 to D14 Example When the number of interrupt data bytes is 2 in format 11 4 Interrupt output Output Output value 1 2 Item Message format Example Format 13 Digital Electronics Corporation s memory link method extended mode ASCII code 1 n Digital compatible signal GS580 to GS583 OFF Partly compatible Station No ESC CO a CR LF 0 0 9 05 30H 30H 1 49H 43H 39H OAH H L H 0 4 Request message This range Sum check host hosts Digital compatible signal GS580 to GS583 ON Fully compatible Station No Esc Sum CR LF Check 7 0 0 4 05 30H 30 1 49H 43H 34 OAH H D D 4 gt This range Sum check Continued to next page 2 56 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 5 Message Formats From previous page Item Message format
267. ineering GX Works2 software n indicates a version GX Simulator2 GX Works2 with the simulation function SWaD5C LLT J JV type ladder logic test tool function software package GX Simulator SW5D5C LLT V or later versions n indicates a version GX Developer VNDC OPEN JV SWoD5F GPPW V type software package n indicates a version GX LogViewer SWaDNN VIEWER J type software package n indicates a version PX Developer SWaD5C FBDQ J type FBD software package for process control indicates a version MT Works2 Motion controller engineering environment MELSOFT MT Works2 SWoDNC MTW2 J indicates a version MT Developer SWoRNC GSV type integrated start up support software for motion controller Q series indicates a version SWaDNC MRC2 J type servo configuration software MR Configuratora o indicates a version MR Configurator MRE OSE type servo configuration software o indicates a version FR Configurator Inverter setup software FR SWo SETUP WJ n indicates a version NC Configurator CNC parameter setting support tool NC Configurator FX Configurator FP Parameter setting monitoring and testing software packages for FX3U 20SSC H SWaD5CFXSSCJ n indicates a version FX3U ENET L Configuration tool FX3U ENET L type Ethernet module setting software SW1D5 FXENETL J RT ToolBox2 Robot program creation software 3D 11C WIN
268. ing rehister read times Points 125 Input register read times Points 125 Coil write times Points 800 Holding register wrtite times Point 100 Item Description Range GOT Net No Set the network No of the GOT 1 to 239 Default 1 Set the station No of the GOT Station 1 to 247 Default 1 Set the GOT IP address subnet GOT Ethernet mask default gateway peripheral 3 5 3 3GOT Setting S W communication port No Ethernet Setting transparent port No 1024 to 5010 Set the GOT port No for th j GOT 2 5014 to 65534 POPE connection with the Ethernet Communication Except for 5011 Port No module Default 5020 5012 5013 and 49153 Specify the time period from the GOT startup until GOT starts the Startup Ti 3 to 255 adi communication with the PLC CPU z Default 3sec Set the time period for a Timeout Time communication to time out 3 to 90sec Default 3sec Set the delay time for reducing the load of the network destination 0 to 10000 Delay Time PLC 10 ms Default Oms Select the steps to store two words 32bit Storage 32 bit data LH Order HL Order Default LH Order FunctionCode Set whether to use the function code OF Used Unused Default Used FunctionCode Set whether to use the function code 10 Used Unused 10 Default Used Coil read times Set the read points of the coil
269. ing shows the terminating resistor specifications on the GOT side When setting the terminating resistor in each connection type refer to the following RS 422 485 communication unit 27 Set the terminating resistor using the terminating Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor setting switch resistor setting switch Terminating Switch No Terminating Switch No 1 A 4 oz resistor resistor 100 A A I 5 N _ A Disable 1 The default setting is Disable The default setting is Disable For RS422 485 communication unit For GT2710 V D 2 z o Y 2 a o a 22 5 t a Terminating resistor setting switch Rear view of RS 422 485 communication unit Terminating resistor setting switch inside the cover For GT2310 V l lol gt N d a TUI ll _ 2 i zl 1 i Terminating resistor setting switch inside the cover 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 19 1 4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection 1 5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connect
270. ings The lower and upper bits are stored in SDO and SD1 respectively SD1 SDO A N 00 a 01 Upper word Lower word 2 When setting the HL order to 32bit Storage for the communication detail settings The upper and lower bits are stored in 500 and 501 respectively SDO SD1 A A Lower word Communication error status An error data error code occurred during communication is stored Host Address Communication error that occurred on the request destination GOT 0 No error 1 Parity error 2 Framing error 3 Overrun error System 4 Communication message error 5 502 6 Clock data setting error Other station Communication error that occurred on another GOT when multiple GOTs are connected 101 Parity error 102 Framing error 103 Overrun error 104 Communication message error 105 Timeout error No station of the specified address exists 106 Multiple units not connectable 107 Clock data setting error Clock data second SD3 Second data of 00 to 59 is stored Clock data minute SD4 Minute data of 00 to 59 is stored Clock data hour Hour data of 00 to 23 is stored Clock data day SD6 Day data of 00 to 31 is stored Clock data month ndi Month data of 01 to 12 is stored Continued to next page 1 For details and corrective actions for the errors error codes that are st
271. ion GOT host format 6 4E frame ASCII T T T Response type Serial No Fixed value aie PLC No D 4 0 010 0 0 0 1 0 1 vee 44H 34H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30 30H 31H 30H 31H H H 0 H D 1 T T T T Request destination Request destination module I O No __ naduesiainni Response data length Endcode 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 6 0 0 5 6 1 30 30H 30H 30H 31H 36 30H 30H 35H 36H H 01 0 D T Network Request destination Request destination PLO module Command Sub command 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 9 0 1 0 0 0 0 30H 30H 30 30H 30H 30 30 30H 39H 30H 31 30H 30H 30H 30 H L H L H H format 7 4E frame R t Request eques n Network PLC Request destination destination Response type Seal No Fixed value Wo data length Following 4 00 OOH OOH OOH 01H 01 OOH OOH 00 OBH Data length target range gt Request Network PLC Request destination desinat Sub End code Command command 56H OOH OOH OOH OOH OOH OOH 01H 09H OO
272. ion Serial 2 3 2 z E z Z E 2 n z o 2 2 System Configuration 2 2 1 For the microcomputer connection serial When connecting one GOT Connection cable Communication driver Cem Host Connection cable GOT Number of icati Max connectable ou Pd Connection diagram number Option device Model equipment GT 27 Built into GOT 23 Differs according to RS 232 hast side Ga RS 232 connection diagram 1 specifications 27 GT15 RS2 9P 1 GOT for 1 host GT 27 Built into GOT Differs according to RS 422 h st side 85 53 422 connection diagram 1 specifications 27 GT15 RS4 9S 2 4 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 2 System Configuration 2 3 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the microcomputer 2 3 2 RS 422 cable Connection diagram 2 3 1 RS 232 cable 1 RS 422 connection diagram 1 GOT sid Host sid Connection diagram 27 lt 1 RS 232 connection diagram 1 i SpA Uu Example of the case where the DTR DSR signal is not used ROS 7 1 SDB gt side Host side SDA 1 r RDA 9 ah ES i 3 5 z RD RXD 2
273. ion format 2 T T T T T Sum STX Staton Address yen ET hok A 1 5 0 0 C 8 0 4 E 9 02H 41 31H 35 30H 30H 43H 38H 30H 34 03 45H 39H H L H L H L H L 4 Sum check is performed in this range Response message during normal communication host format 14 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection format 1 T T T T Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 STX R100 R100 lower R101 upper R101 lower 02H 334 44 32H 31H 33H 36 34 L L H D L format 15 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection format 2 Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Da ta 4 Sum STX 8100 upper 8100 lower R101 upper 8101 lower ETX Check 3 D 2 1 3 6 0 4 02H 33H 44 32H 31 33 36 30 34H 03 41H 41 H L H L H 1 H D Response message during faulty communication host 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 5 Message Formats b When reading a bit device The following shows an example of reading four bytes of the virtual devices MO to M31 Assuming 0 1 and M31 1 are stored
274. ion No set clock data F command w station No Time display 2004 06 01 18 46 49 TUE After execution Message format format 14 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection format 1 T T T T T T T STX com Station No Year data Month data Day Data Hour data Minute data M 5 2 7 0 4 0 6 0 1 1 8 4 6 4 9 0 2 02 46H 32H 37H 30 34H 30H 36H 30 31H 31H 38 34H 36 34H 39 30H 32H ODH H L H D HP D B D B D Com i STX Station No F 2 7 Following 1 Year data Month Day data Hour data Minute data Second Dayo data weekdata ___ 0 4 0 6 0 1 1 8 4 6 4 9 0 2 30H 34 30H 36 30H 31H 31H 38H 34H 36H 34H 39 30H 32 H L H D H D D Response message ACK during normal communication GOT host Response message NAK during faulty communication GOT host 15H When a wrong day of the week has been set by the clock data setting command If a wrong day of the week is set by the clock data setting commands the clock data will differ from the time displayed on the utility Example When June 1 2004 Thursday is set by the clock data setting command the actual day of week is Tuesday Tuesday TUE will be displayed on the utility time display 2 MICROC
275. ion Set side Interrupt output When data are written to D13 and D14 from a GOT touch switch for example the data of D13 and D14 are transmitted interrupt output to the host side 172 The data amount number of bytes to be interrupt output is set at Interrupt Data Byte in Communication Detail Settings 2 6 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings D13 Output value when 1 is set to Interrupt Data Byte in Communication Detail Settings D13 Lower 8 bits 1 byte Output value when 2 is set to Interrupt Data Byte in Communication Detail Settings D13 7 Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits lt gt 2 bytes User Output value when 4 is set to Interrupt Data Byte in Communication Detail Settings 1 When setting the LH order to 32bit Storage for the communication detail settings D14 D13 D14 AN s m Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits 4 bytes l lt mA 12 2 E 2 2 E 2 a D 2 When setting the HL order to 32bit Storage for the communication detail settings D13 D14 A Hd Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits 4 bytes D15 to 19 Unused D20 to 2031 User area User D2032 to 2034 Unused 1 second binary counter
276. ion due to a contact fault GT27 Only TEST OPERATION PRECAUTIONS NWARNING Before performing the test operations of the user creation monitor screen such as turning ON or OFF bit device changing the word device current value changing the settings or current values of the timer or counter and changing the buffer memory current value read through the manual carefully and make yourself familiar with the operation method During test operation never change the data of the devices which are used to perform significant operation for the system False output or malfunction can cause an accident STARTUP MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS NWARNING When power is on do not touch the terminals Doing so can cause an electric shock or malfunction Correctly connect the battery connector Do not charge disassemble heat short circuit solder or throw the battery into the fire Doing so will cause the battery to produce heat explode or ignite resulting in injury and fire Before starting cleaning or terminal screw retightening always switch off the power externally in all phases Not switching the power off in all phases can cause a unit failure or malfunction Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit NCAUTION Do not disassemble or modify the unit Doing so can cause a failure malfunction injury or fire
277. iption Range GOT Set the IP address of the 0 0 0 0 to IP Address Default 192 168 4 20 255 255 255 255 Select the set GOT in the GOT Select from Setting List dialog GOT Setting List 775 Designer3 GOT2000 Help Set the subnet mask for the sub network Only for connection via router 0 0 0 0 to Subnet Mask If the sub network is not used 255 255 255 255 the default value is set Default 255 255 255 0 Set the router address of the ME ee 207 oon Gateway y 255 255 255 255 connection via router Default 0 0 0 0 Peripheral S W Communication Port No Set the GOT port No for the S W communication Default 5015 1024 to 65534 Except for 5011 to 5014 and 49153 to 49170 Transparent Port No Set the GOT port No for the transparent function Default 5014 5014 fixed Automatically enable wireless LAN connection Select this item to automatically connect the wireless LAN to the wireless LAN access point after the GOT is powered on Time to Automatic Disconnect 15 4 Set the time for the wireless LAN communication to automatically disconnect Default 0 0 to 360 15 WIRELESS LAN CONNECTION 15 2 GOT Side Settings 15 3 Precautions When connecting to multiple GOTs Do not use the IP address 192 168 3 18 when using multiple GOTs A communication error may occur on the GOT with the IP address When setting IP address D
278. k data Specifies year month day hour minute second and day of the week to be read set to the GOT clock data The address notated in decimal is converted to a 2 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted from the upper digit 1 Read clock data TR command 57 m 2 Set clock data TS command Error code This is the response message at faulty communication appended with error contents The address notated in hexadecimal is converted to a 2 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted from the upper digit For details of error codes generated in formats 3 to 6 A compatible 1C frame refer to the following 257 m Error code list When connecting a microcomputer etc that uses the dedicated protocol of the A series computer link module with the GOT When connecting a microcomputer etc that uses the dedicated protocol of the A series computer link module with the GOT correct the commands to use and the device range according to the specifications of GOT 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 5 Message Formats Message format The following shows the message format of the dedicated commands for a microcomputer connection of GOT 1 Read clock data TR command The following shows an example of reading the clock data of GOT Assuming that the clock data of GOT has been set to 2004 June 1 18 46 49 Tuesday Time display 2004 06 01 18 46 49 TUE Item Message format Example Forma
279. l Non Mitsubishi Product 1 For GT Works3 Version1 gt GOT2000 Series Connection Manual Non Mitsubishi Product 2 GT Works3 Version1 gt GOT2000 Series Connection Manual Microcomputer MODBUS Products Peripherals For GT Works3 Version1 15 2 15 WIRELESS LAN CONNECTION 15 1 System Configuration 15 2 GOT Side Settings 15 2 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings y T z inded 1 F Wireless LAN Y hb 0 LAN 88 EEUU Wiss LAN VF GOT Net no 1 GOT Station 1 GOT Wireless LAN Setting 192 168 4 20 em e 1 Select Common Controller Setting from the menu Select Communication Setting in the Controller Setting window 2 Select Use the function of Gateway and following items Connecting Means wireless LAN or Standard Ethernet wireless LAN Mode wireless LAN I F Extended l F wireless LAN Driver wireless LAN 3 The detailed setting is displayed after Connecting Means Mode I F and Driver are set Make the settings according to the usage environment 227 15 2 2 Communication detail settings Click the OK button when settings are completed COM The settings of connecting equipment can be set and confirmed in I F Communication Setting For details refer to the following 57 1 1 2 I F communication setting 15 2
280. l compatible signa b0 Fully compatible Partly compatible Default Fully compatible GS583 Microcomputer connection extended setting CH4 Digital compatible signa bO For the GOT internal device refer to the following manual 257 GT Designer3 GOT2000 Help 2 50 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 5 Message Formats Details of data items in message format POINT Data code during communication Communication is performed in ASCII code 1 Command Specifies the contents to access from the host to GOT The command is converted to a 1 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted For details of the commands that can be used refer to the following 257 2 5 2 List of commands 2 Station No Station No is used to identify the GOT with which the host communicates Setting range 0 to 1FH The address notated in hexadecimal is converted to a 2 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted from the upper digit The GOT processes only commands whose station No matches the Host Address 0 to 31 set at Communication Detail Settings The message of command whose station No does not match is ignored For setting method of Communication Detail Settings refer to the following 37 2 6 2 Communication detail settings 3 Address Specifies the head No of the device data to be read written The address notated in hexadecimal is converted to a 4 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted fro
281. lt Item Message format c o Sum ee 2 R T R A 9 equest message host 02 54H 52 41H 39 H L 1 lt gt 2 Sum check is performed in this range 5 5 d D T o Year data Month data Day data Hour data Minute data m T cum m Responsemessage rerio aa a dudes during normal 0 4 0 6 0 1 1 8 4 6 4 9 0 2 D 0 2 communication 02H 30H 34H 30H 36 30H 31H 31H 38H 34H 36H 34H 39H 30H 32H 03 44H 30H H D H L lt gt Sum check is performed in this range 4 format 1 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection format 1 o 15 during faulty format 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection format 2 communication GOT host code 15H The above is a case where the sum check error 06H has occurred 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 33 2 5 Message Formats 6 Set clock data TS command The following shows an example of setting the clock data of GOT Assuming the clock data of GOT is to be set to 2004 June 1 18 46 49 Tuesday Time display 2004 06 01 18 46 49 TUE After execution Message format Item Day of Sum STX Command Year data Month data Day data Hour data Minute data data week data ETX Check
282. m the upper digit For details of the device range that can be accessed refer to the following gt 24 Device Data Area 4 Number of points Specifies the number of device data to be read written Setting range 1 to 40H The address notated in hexadecimal is converted to a 4 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted from the upper digit l lt mA o 2 E 2 2 E 5 a 12 5 Year month day hour minute second and day of the week data Specifies year month day hour minute second and day of the week to be read set to the GOT clock data The address notated in decimal is converted to a 2 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted from the upper digit 57 m Message format 1 Read clock data command 5 m Message format 2 Set clock data M command 6 Error code This is the response message at faulty communication appended with error contents The address notated in hexadecimal is converted to a 2 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted from the upper digit For details of error codes generated in formats 12 and 13 Digital Electronics Corporation s memory link method extended mode refer to the following m Error code list When connecting a microcomputer etc that uses the protocol of the Digital Electronics Corporation s memory link method with the GOT When connecting a microcomputer etc that uses the protocol of the Digital Electronics Corpor
283. mat Data code during communication Communication of format 6 is performed in ASCII code Communication of the format 7 is performed in Binary code 3 50 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 4 Message Formats The following table shows the contents of the data items Data item name Request type Microcomputer side Contents Format 6 Indicates it is a command message Format 7 Command message ASCII 5400 Fixed value Command message 54H Upper digit Fixed value Response type Indicates it is a response message GOT side Response message ASCII D400 Fixed value Response message D4H Upper digit Fixed value Serial No Arbitrary number for recognition of the message appended at the microcomputer side GOT sends the response message appending this Serial No Fixed value Should be ASCII 0000 Should be 0000H Set the same number as the network No set in the GOT For setting method of Communication Detail Settings refer to the following Network No s 3 5 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings T it the dat rted to a 2 digit ASCII code from th a a Transmit the data converted to a 2 digit binary code Set the same number as the PLC No set in the GOT For setting method of Communication Detail Settings refer to the following PLC No 3 5 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings Tran
284. mats 11 to 13 Digital Electronics Corporation s memory link method This is the same format as the protocol of the Digital Electronics Corporation s memory link method Type Name Description Refer to Digital El ics C ion ink This is the basic format of the Digital Electronics Corporation s memory link Format 11 method method compatible mode Digital Electronics Corporation s memory link Format 12 method extended mode ASCII code 1 1 This is the appended format of the Digital Electronics Corporation s memory link method compatible mode with sum check CR and LF 2 5 6 Digital Electronics Corporation s memory link Format 13 method extended mode ASCII code 1 n This is the appended format of the Digital Electronics Corporation s memory link method extended mode ASCII code 1 1 with a station No 5 Formats 14 15 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection This is the same message format as when a microcomputer connection is established with the GOT F900 Series Type Name Description Refer to GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection Use this format when establishing a 1 1 or m n connection between the Format 14 format 1 GOT and the host The end code is CR Use this format wh tablishing a 1 1 tion bet th 257 se this format when establishing a 1 1 or m n connection between the Format 15 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection GOT and the host
285. mats 14 15 GOT F900 series microcomputer connection Command Max number of point ASCII Command name Description Symbol processed code 4 Batch read Reads bit devices in byte units 255bytes 2040 points w out station No Reads word devices in byte units 255bytes 127 points A 20 Batch read Reads bit devices in byte units 255bytes 2040 points a w station No Reads word devices in byte units 255bytes 127 points YX A ne Batch write Writes to bit devices in byte units 255bytes 2040 points D w out station No Writes to word devices in byte units 255bytes 127 points z E Batch write Writes to bit devices in byte units 255bytes 2040 points 9 w station No Writes to word devices in byte units 255bytes 127 points m 3 33H Multi point write in bit z units w out station writes bit patterns bit ON OFF inversion direct specification in TObytes 560 points m Multi point write in bit 1 point units 8 bits for 1 point to a specified device units w station No m i 4 Fill command 5 w out station No Writes the same value to range of specified devices Ei Fill command w station No o 5 35H Set clock data c w out station No Sets the clock data of the 46 Set data w station No 6 36H Read clock data w out station No Reads the clock da
286. microcomputer side to GOT For details of the commands that can be used refer to the following Command 5 33 4 List of commands Sub command Transmit the command and sub command converted to a 4 digit ASCII code from the upper digit Transmit the data converted to a 4 digit binary code from the lower two digits Specifies the code by which the device data to be read written is recognized For details of the device range that can be accessed refer to the following 3 3 Device Data Area Transmit the 2 digit ASCII code corresponding to the following device codes Transmit the 2 digit binary code corresponding to the following device codes Device name Device code Device name Device code Device code 17 5 5 5 91 L Lt L 92u D D D A8H SD SD SD A9H R R R AFH Specifies the head No of the device data to be read written For details of the device range that can be accessed refer to the following Head device x37 3 3 Device Data Area Transmit the data notated in decimal converted to a 6 digit ASCII code from the upper digit 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET Transmit the data converted to a 6 digit binary code from the lower two digits Continued to next page 3 61 3 4 Message Formats LE 2 14 I u z E 2 2 O E 2 O o a From previous page Contents
287. munication driver to the GOT Set the Ethernet system communication driver for the controller setting or peripheral setting For the settings refer to the following manual 57 GT Designer3 GOT2000 Help 9 PC REMOTE CONNECTION 9 9 9 3 Ethernet Connection 9 PC REMOTE CONNECTION 9 3 Ethernet Connection 10 VNC R SERVER CONNECTION 10 1 Connectable 151 10 2 10 2 System 10 2 10 3 GOT Side 10 3 10 4 Setting in Personal Computer 10 4 VNC R SERVER CONNECTION 10 VNC R SERVER CONNECTION 10 1 Connectable Model List The VNC server can be connected to the following VNC client Ultra VNC 10 2 System Configuration Extended function OS Communication driver Communication driver VNC Server Ethernet system Connection type dependent Connection cable T Varies according to the connection type Personal computer GOT VNC server Number of Connection cable 12 segment PLC connectable VNC client length Option device Model equipment 100BASE TX Shielded twisted pair cable STP or unshielded twisted pair cable For the system 1 personal To be selected by the UTP of category 5 o
288. n settings as shown below For details of the communication settings refer to the following manual Connection between STARDOM and the PC for communication settings Peripheral Software Manual for YOKOGAWA PLC For the communication settings of STARDOM STARDOM and the PC for communication settings must be connected to Ethernet using the Resource Configurator peripheral software 5 MODBUS R TCP CONNECTION 5 6 Example of Connection 5 13 z E 2 2 O O E 5 e o 1 Modbus Communication Portfolio License To set the communication settings for STARDOM an installation of Modbus Communication Portfolio License is required For details of the communication settings refer to the following manual gt gt STARDOM FCN FCJ Guide Defining Logic POU Define Logic POU using Logic Designer peripheral software and download the project to STARDOM a Start Logic Designer and create a new project using a template Use STARDOM Serial Communication template b Insert Firmware Library to the new project Right click Library under the project tree in Logic Designer Right click Insert and select Firmware Library Double click the SD FCXPLCE LIB folder and double click SD FCXPLCE LIB fwl to select it The library path inserted in the procedures above is as follows Install Folder LogicDesigner Mwt PIc Fw_lib SD_FCXPLCE_LIB SD_FCXPLCE_LIB fwl c Insert
289. n the MODBUS RTU equipment manual 2 MODBUS RTU equipment doesn t have SG In this case the wiring between GOT and SG is unnecessary 3 When placing the GOT to the terminal the system configuration set the terminating resistor to 100 OHM When placing the GOT to the position other than the terminal set the terminating resistor of the GOT to No 1 4 3 Terminating resistors of 4 For the terminating resistor of MODBUS RTU equipment refer to the manual of MODBUS RTU equipment Precautions when preparing a cable 1 Cable length The length of the RS 422 485 cable must be 1200m or less 2 GOT side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following 52 1 4 1 GOT connector specifications z E 2 2 O o 5 E x 2 em Q o 3 MODBUSS RTU equipment side connector Use the connector compatible with the MODBUS RTU equipment side module For details refer to the MODBUS equipment user s manual Connecting terminating resistors 1 GOT side Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor setting switch For the procedure to set the terminating resistor refer to the following 257 1 4 3 Terminating resistors of GOT 2 MODBUSS RTU equipment side When connecting a MODBUS RTU equipment to the GOT a terminating resistor must be connected to the MODBUS RTU equipment For details refer to the MODBUS RTU equipment user s manu
290. n this case the wiring between GOT and SG is unnecessary 2 Some MODBUS RTU equipment require the control line CS RS etc to be controlled Make sure to connect the cables and wires as described in the MODBUS RTU equipment manual 3 A terminating resistor is required Set the terminating resistor selector of the main unit to Disable and connect a 1100 terminating resistor 1 4 3 Terminating resistors of GOT 4 Forthe terminating resistor of MODBUS RTU equipment refer to the manual of MODBUS RTU equipment to be used 5 Use the twisted pair cable SDA1 SDB1 and RDA1 RDB1 CON side 20 pin MODBUS RTU equipment side 24 MODBUS RTU equipment side 1724 SDA1 TXD1 5 S 3 9 RDA R SDB1 TXD1 5 4 RDB 8 RDANRXDIS 5 i SDA SDA RDB1 RXD1 5 le SDB SDB 1 56 2 56 SG NC 1 NC NC 4 SDA2 TXD2 5 SDB2 TXD2 7 RDA2 RXD2 9 2 RDB2 RXD2 11 13 RSA RTS 14 15 2 RSB RTS 16 5 17 o CSA CTS 18 4 1 gt NC 19 CSB CTS 20 e loce o 2 a a O 4 MODBUS R RTU CONNECTION 4 5 4 3 Connection Diagram 2 RS 422 485 cable 1 1 pair wiring CON side 20 pin MODBUSS RTU equipme
291. nal safety Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user DESIGN PRECAUTIONS NWARNING Some failures of the GOT communication unit or cable may keep the outputs on or off Some failures of a touch panel may cause malfunction of the input objects such as a touch switch An external monitoring circuit should be provided to check for output signals which may lead to a serious accident Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction Do not use the GOT as the warning device that may cause a serious accident An independent and redundant hardware or mechanical interlock is required to configure the device that displays and outputs serious warning Failure to observe this instruction may result in an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction The GOT backlight failure disables the operation on the touch switch s When the GOT backlight has a failure the POWER LED blinks orange blue and the display section dims In such a case the input by the touch switch s is disabled The display section of the GOT is an analog resistive type touch panel GT27 The GOT is multi touch compliant however do not touch three points or more simultaneously on the display section Doing so may cause an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction GT23 If you touch the display section simultaneously in two poin
292. nel of the equipment to be connected to the Data Bit 7 bit Stop Bit 1 bit 2 Even gt Host Address 0 Format 1 T Manufacturer others _ Interrupt Data Byte Byte 1 Me inier 2 Special Interrupt Code No z e Gateway Standard I F RS422 485 z joe computer Control Method No Gateway Client 32bit Storage LH Order o Fg Fie Transfer F Property 4 c Transmission Speed BPS 19200 1 ui pups 4 Item Description Range 2 Set this item when change the 2 n pene transmission speed used for 1 1 Control Method No Transmission Speed communication with the 32b t Storage LH Order 38400bps connected equipment Default 19200bps 32600068 115200bps Set this item when change the data length used for Data communication with the Tbits 8bits Cancel connected equipment Default 7bits Specify the stop bit length for Stop Bit communications 1bit 2bits Default 1bit Select Common Controller Setting from the Specify whether or not to menu perform a parity check and None Parity how it is performed during Even The Controller Setting window is displayed Select the communication Odd Default Even channel to be used from the list menu Specify the host address Set the following items station No of the PLC to Host Address which the GOT is connected 0 to 31 Manufacturer Others in the netwo
293. nner they will not be exposed to the impact exceeding the impact resistance described in the general specifications of this manual as they are precision devices Failure to do so may cause the unit to fail Check if the unit operates correctly after transportation When fumigants that contain halogen materials such as fluorine chlorine bromine and iodine are used for disinfecting and protecting wooden packaging from insects they cause malfunction when entering our products Please take necessary precautions to ensure that remaining materials from fumigant do not enter our products or treat packaging with methods other than fumigation heat method Additionally disinfect and protect wood from insects before packing products INTRODUCTION Thank you for choosing Mitsubishi Graphic Operation Terminal Mitsubishi GOT Read this manual and make sure you understand the functions and performance of the GOT thoroughly in advance to ensure correct use CONTENTS SAFETY PRECAUTIONS iue bnt tte re eL eH RE Reit 1 INTRODUCTION eden tei A 8 wot A 8 List of Manuals for GT 3 A 14 Abbreviations and Generic Terms nennen nnne enne rne nnns A 15 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 1 Setting the Communication 1 3 1 1 1 Setting connected equipment Channel
294. nt side 77274 MODBUSS RTU equipment side 17274 SDATTXDIS 22228 mee SDB1 TXD1 5 i Q Q RDA1 RXD1 0 i 5 RDB1 RXD1 4 SG 2 1 NC 1 1 1 NC NC 4 1 SDA2 TXD2 5 SDB2 TXD2 7 RDA2 RXD2 9 RDB2 RXD2 11 13 1 1 RSA RTS 14 15 RSB RTS 16 NC 17 1 CSA CTS 18 19 CSB CTS 20 rc ME ais tate eso eet 1 The actual terminal layout on the MODBUS RTU equipment may differ from the example shown above SDA B and RDA B terminals can be separated from each other Make sure to connect the cables and wires as described in the MODBUS RTU equipment manual 2 MODBUS RTU equipment doesn t have SG In this case the wiring between GOT and SG is unnecessary 3 A terminating resistor is required Set the terminating resistor selector of the main unit to Disable and connect a 11009 terminating resistor 1 4 3 Terminating resistors of GOT 4 For the terminating resistor of MODBUS RTU equipment refer to the manual of MODBUS RTU equipment to be used 5 Use the twisted pair cable for SDA1 SDB1 3 RS 422 485 cable 2 2 pair wiring MODBUSS RTU equipment side 724 MODBUS RTU equipment side 1724 GOT side D Sub 9 pin 1st 2nd SDA RDA DSS DSP HER 1 T T 1 1 spB 4 i RDB
295. nto the GOT make sure to close the SD card cover Failure to do so causes the data not to be read or written When removing the SD card from the GOT make sure to support the SD card by hand as it may pop out Failure to do so may cause the SD card to drop from the GOT resulting in a failure or break When inserting a USB device into a USB interface of the GOT make sure to insert the device into the interface firmly Failure to do so may cause the USB device to drop from the GOT resulting in a failure or break Before removing the USB device from the GOT follow the procedure for removal on the utility screen of the GOT After the successful completion dialog is displayed remove the USB device by hand carefully Failure to do so may cause the USB device to drop from the GOT resulting in a failure or break DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS NCAUTION When disposing of this product treat it as industrial waste When disposing of batteries separate them from other wastes according to the local regulations Refer to the GOT2000 Series User s Manual Hardware for details of the battery directive in the EU member states TRANSPORTATION PRECAUTIONS NCAUTION When transporting lithium batteries make sure to treat them based on the transport regulations Refer to the GOT2000 Series User s Manual Hardware for details of the regulated models Make sure to transport the main unit and or relevant unit s in the ma
296. o be mounted onto the GOT 3rd stage Standard interface 4 Ethernet interface built in the Standard interface 1 2nd stage RS 232 interface built in the GOT Standard interface 3 RS 422 485 interface built in the GOT 2 USB interface built in the 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 1 Setting the Communication Interface 1 1 2 I F communication setting This function displays the list of the GOT communication interfaces Set the channel and the communication driver to the interface to be used Setting 7 Fi Q L QnA A CPU QJ71C24 137124 X 2 85232 x Detail setting USB Host 1 4 Ethernet x l Detail Setting 85232 Setting Enable the 5V power supply x None Detail Setting Zi Detail Setting Detail Setting 0 None 7 Detail Setting o rJ j Cancel o z E z gt o x 2 a 2 6 lt a 1 Select Common Communication Setting from the menu 2 Thel F Communication Setting dialog box appears Make the settings with reference to the following explanation 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 7 1 1 Setting the Communication Interface Setting
297. o not use 0 and 255 at the end of an IP address Numbers of 0 and 255 are used by the system The GOT may not monitor the controller correctly with the above numbers Consult with the administrator of the network before setting an IP address to the GOT and controller WIRELESS LAN CONNECTION 15 WIRELESS LAN CONNECTION 15 5 15 3 Precautions 15 6 15 WIRELESS LAN CONNECTION 15 3 Precautions REVISIONS The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Print Date Manual Number Revision Sep 2013 SH NA 081200ENG A Compatible with GT Works3 Version1 100E Nov 2013 SH NA 081200ENG B Compatible with GT Works3 Version1 104J Compatible with printer connection Compatible with wireless LAN connection To be supported soon Changing the icons of the supported models Jan 2014 SH NA 081200ENG C Compatible with GT Works3 Version1 108N Compatible with wireless LAN connection The operation panel function is supported This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2013 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION REVISIONS 1 REVISIONS 2 WARRANTY Please confirm the following product war
298. ode Communication Channel No GOT error ChNo 1 Reset 402 Commupicat ion timeout Confirm communication pathway or modules 1 17 38 CPU error No Error Network error No Error Error message Time of occurrence Displayed only for errors uly 0 Alarm popup display With the alarm popup display function alarms are displayed as a popup display regardless of whether an alarm display object is placed on the screen or not regardless of the display screen Since comments can be flown from right to left even a long comment can be displayed all For details of the alarm popup display refer to the following manual gt GT Designer3 GOT2000 Help 1 22 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 6 Checking for Normal Monitoring write data to virtual devices inside GOT For microcomputer connection Send a message from the host to the GOT and confirm that the values are stored in the virtual devices inside the GOT 2 2 2 7 System Configuration Examples Write command RW 0100 000A 0163 0362 D3 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 1 23 9 12 2 gt o 7 2 a 12 amp lt 12 1 6 2 Confirming the communication state on the GOT side For Ethernet connection Confirming the
299. of Communication Detail Settings 3 103 The next data was transmitted from the host before GOT 9 202 Ses Decrease the transmission speed completes the processing of the data received Check the communication cable and communication module Communication message error Hansen 4 104 EXT CR could not be found before the upper limit of the 1526 Check the settings of Communication Detail Settings receive buffer was exceeded Review the contents of the message to transmit Review the contents of the message to transmit 5 Command error Check the commands in the message An unsupported command was used 2 52 List of commands Timeout error 105 There is no response from the GOT or the station of the specified address does not exist Check the communication cable and communication module attachment Check the settings of Communication Detail Settings Review the contents of the message to transmit Multiple units not connectable Check the communication cable and communication module attachment 106 The RS 232 port is occupied Check the settings of Communication Detail Settings Check to see if the RS 232 port is occupied Clock data setting error Review the contents of the message to transmit 6 107 9 Check whether the non existent data is set e g setting 07 The setting value of the clock data has error 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL
300. ommunication unit GT15 J71GF13 T2 CC Link communication unit GT15 J61BT13 Wireless LAN communication unit GT25 WLAN Serial multi drop connection unit GT01 RS4 M Connection conversion adapter GT10 9PT5S Option unit Abbreviations and generic terms Description Printer unit GT15 PRN Video input unit GT27 V4 Z A set of GT16M V4 and GT27 IF 1000 RGB input unit Video RGB unit GT27 R2 Z A set of GT16M R2 and GT27 IF 1000 Video RGB input unit GT27 V4R1 Z A set of GT16M V4R1 and GT27 IF 1000 RGB output unit GT27 ROUT Z A set of GT16M ROUT and GT27 IF 1000 Multimedia unit GT27 MMR Z A set of GT16M MMR and GT27 IF1000 Video signal conversion unit GT27 IF 1000 External I O unit GT15 DIO GT15 DIOR Sound output unit GT15 SOUT B4 Option Abbreviations and generic terms Description SD card L1MEM 2GBSD L1MEM 4GBSD Battery GT11 50BAT GT11 BAT GT25 12PSGC GT25 10PSGC GT25 08PSGC GT25 12PSCC GT25 For GT27 10PSCC GT25 08PSCC GT25 12PSCC UC GT25 10PSCC UC GT25 Protective sheet 08 5 For GT23 GT25 10PSCC UC GT25 08PSCC UC Protective cover for oil USB environmental protection cover GT20 10PCO GT20 08PCO GT25 UCOV Stand GT15 90STAND GT15 80STAND GT15 70STAND GT15 60STAND GT15 70ATT 98 GT15 70ATT 87 GT15 60ATT 97 GT15 60ATT 96 GT15 Attachment 60 87 GT15 60ATT 77 B5 Software
301. onics Corporation s memory link method extended mode ASCII code 1 n Digital compatible signal GS580 to GS583 OFF Partly compatible Sum i Com STX Station No ESO mand EX Chee SR 1E 0 0 A 8 02H 30H 30H 1BH 41H D 03H 38H 45H ODH OAH H L This range Sum check 1 T Year data Month data Day data Hour data Minute data T T T T Second Day of data week data 30H 34 30H 36H H b D 30H 31H 31H 38 34H 36H 34H 39H 30H 32H oO O 10 i Com SM Station No ESC mand ES SR UF 0 0 8 C This range Sum check 71 Year data Month data 30H 34H 30H 36H Day data Hour data Minute data Second Day of data week data 30H 31H 31H 38 34H 36H 34H 39H 30H 32H D 0910 Response message during faulty communication host Example Format 13 Digital Electronics Corporation s memory link method extended mode ASCII code 1 n Station No Error code CR LF 30H 30H 30H 36H ODH OAH 090010 0 The above is a case where the sum check error 06H has occurred 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 5 Message Formats 2 53 l lt mA 12 2 E
302. onnection of GOT 1 Read clock data 1901 command The following shows an example of reading the clock data of GOT Assuming that the clock data of has been set to 2009 October 1 18 46 49 Thursday Time display 2009 10 01 18 46 49 THU Item Message format format 6 4E frame ASCII 2 1 N ty k T Request type Serial No Fixed value 23222 SSS ese Se a eases Sees see Ge Emme 5 4 0 010 0 0 010 010 1 0 14 oom 35H 34H 30H 30 30H 30H 30H 30 30H 30H 30H 30 30H 31 30H 31H 5 O M t WH D o z T T T T T T T T T T 5 Request destination Request destination USE module No modue staionno Request data length CPU monitoring timer 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 m 30H 30H 30H 30H 434 30H 30H 30H 30H E A n D n 5 Ch ter A secti aracter A section x Sub command ra Request message host GOT 1 gt 1 9 14 0 0 0 31H 39 30H 31 30H 30H 30H 30 0 00 0 format 7 4E frame Binary T Request 1 Network PLC Request destination Request type Serial No Fixed value
303. or Default 5014 5011 5012 5013 and 49153 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 5 GOT Side Settings 3 6 System Configuration Examples The following shows a system configuration example in the case of the microcomputer connection Ethernet System configuration The system configuration example illustrated below is explained in this section IBM PC AT compatible PC Microsoft Visual Ver 6 0 ll Communication settings on GOT side and monitor screen settings 1 Transmission settings Set the transmission settings of the GOT The transmission settings in the microcomputer connection Ethernet are made at Detail Setting on GT Designer3 57 3 5 2 Communication detail settings 2 Monitor screen settings For the monitor screen settings in this system configuration example refer to the example of the system configuration of the microcomputer connection serial 97 2 7 System Configuration Examples 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 6 System Configuration Examples 3 71 LE 2 12 I E u z E o 2 2 O 14 E 2 O o a 3 7 Device Range that Can Be Set The device ranges of controller that can be used for GOT are as follows Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the maximum values that can be set in GT Designer3 The device specifications of controllers may differ depending on the models even though belonging to the s
304. ored into SD2 refer to the following Eg m Details and actions for errors error codes stored into SD2 2 14 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 4 Device Data Area From previous page Address Description Set side 8 8 Clock 4 digit year data is stored Clock data day of week System 09 Day of the week data is stored 0 Sunday 1 Monday 2 Tuesday 3 Wednesday 4 Thursday 5 Friday 6 Saturday SD10 to 15 Unused 4 If a wrong day of the week is set by the clock data setting commands the clock data will differ from the time displayed on the utility Example When June 1 2004 Thursday is set by the clock data setting command the actual day of the week is Tuesday 4 is stored to SD9 although Tuesday TUE will be displayed on the utility time display The side where virtual devices are set System User Set on the system side on the GOT Set on the user side by sending request messages from host or using the touch switches etc Details and actions for errors error codes stored into SD2 Error code Description Action 0 No error 4 101 Parity error Check the communication cable and communication module The parity bit does not match attachment Framing error Check the settings of Communication Detail Settings 2 102 The data bit and or stop bit are not correct Match the GOT and host transmission settings Check the settings
305. ork Request destination gestinati MN MEE module VO No meesoone 00 0 0 5 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 30H 35H 36 30H 30 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 101 0 0 1 0 10 H L 4 Data length target data T 1 Command Sub command Response message 1 gt 0 9 0 1 0 0 0 0 during faulty communication 30H 39H 30H 31 30H 30H 30H 30H GOT host 0Ojnm Q0 Data length target data format 9 QnA compatible frame Binary T Request T Network PLC Request Response Subheader destination module 9 No module No data length Following 54 DOH OOH 01 01 OOH OOH OOH OBH OOH A Request Request End code Network destination Sub b module O No station No command 56H OOH 00 OOH OOH OOH OOH 01H O9H OOH OOH Data length target data When a wrong day of the week has been set by the clock data setting command If a wrong day of the week is set by the clock data setting commands the clock data will differ from the time displayed on the utility Example When October 1 2009 Tuesday is set by the clock data setting command the actual day of the week is Thursday Thursday THU will be displayed on the utility time display Error code
306. ose resulting in failure Correctly wire the GOT power supply section after confirming the rated voltage and terminal arrangement of the product Not doing so can cause a fire or failure Tighten the terminal screws of the GOT power supply section in the specified torque range 0 5 to 0 8 Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the GOT Exercise care to avoid foreign matter such as chips and wire offcuts entering the GOT Not doing so can cause a fire failure or malfunction The module has an ingress prevention label on its top to prevent foreign matter such as wire offcuts from entering the module during wiring Do not peel this label during wiring Before starting system operation be sure to peel this label because of heat dissipation GT27 Only Plug the communication cable into the GOT interface or the connector of the connected unit and tighten the mounting screws and the terminal screws in the specified torque range Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit Plug the QnA ACPU Motion controller A series bus connection cable by inserting it into the connector of the connected unit until it clicks After plugging check that it has been inserted snugly Not doing so can cause a malfunct
307. ost 06H Response message NAK during faulty E communication host 15 1 Start address end address specification conditions Specify addresses so that the start address is the same or less than the end address Error response occurs in the following cases The address to specify has the start address greater than the end address Either of the start address or end address exceeds the device range that can be specified 2 Address specifying crossing over different devices The start address and end address can be specified crossing over different devices 3 40 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 4 Message Formats 5 Read clock data 6 command w out station No read clock data G command w station No The following shows an example of reading the clock data of GOT at station No 27 Assuming that the clock data of GOT has been set to 2009 October 1 18 46 49 Thursday Time display 2009 10 01 18 46 49 THU Item Message format format 3 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection ASCII T Station G2 7 47 32 37H Request message H D m host GOT format 4 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection Binary z 2 G 1BH 5 o format 3 GOT F900 Series microcomputer conne
308. otice Printed in Japan January 2014
309. output from the video camera Power On of video camera Turn on the video camera simultaneously with the GOT Distortion of the image caused by the noise When the screen is distorted by the noise from the RGB cable install the following ferrite core to the input part of the RGB cable Recommended ferrite core TDK ZCAT3035 1330 or equivalent 11 VIDEO RGB CONNECTION 11 2 System Configuration 11 2 2 Displaying GOT screen on external monitor Extended function OS Video RGB input Connection cable Signal External monitor Connection cable GOT Number of 5 Distance 7 connectable Model name Model name Option device Model equipment For connectable external monitor types refer to the GT15 C50VG 5m 97 Analog following Technical News or 1 GT27 ROUT Z 1 for 1 GOT RGB 37 List of valid devices applicable GOT2000 58 Analog RGB connection series GOT A 0010 diagram 2 1 The cable length differs depending on the specification of the external monitor used by the user 2 o 2 2 O o t o 4 O a gt 11 VIDEO RGB CONNECTION 11 5 11 2 System Configuration 11 3 Connection Diagram The coaxial cable analog RGB cable to connect the GOT to the Video RGB equipment must be prepared by the user The following shows each cable connection diagram and relevant connectors 11 3 1 Coaxial cable
310. per digit Year month day hour minute second and day of the week data Specifies year month day hour minute second and day of the week to be read set to the GOT clock data The address notated in decimal is converted to a 2 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted from the upper digit 1 5 m Message format 5 Read clock data TR command 57 m Message format 6 Set clock data TS command Data Specifies the data to read from write to the specified device data word unit The address notated in hexadecimal is converted to a 4 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted from the upper digit Error code This is the response message at faulty communication appended with error contents Error code is transmitted in 1 byte For details of the error codes generated in format 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection format 2 refer to the following gt m Error code list 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 25 2 5 Message Formats lt o 2 E 2 2 E 2 a 8 Sum check code The sum check code is obtained by converting the lower 1 byte 8 bits of the result sum after having added the sum check target data as binary data to 2 digit ASCII code Hex Number of LSTX Command Address Check 02 52H 44 30H 31H 30H 30 30H 32u 03H 42H 43H 0D H L Sum check is perfo
311. points 2 Communication setting of side Network 1 PLC 1 Format 6 4E frame ASCII T T T i Network Request destination Request destination Request type Serial No Fixed value No PLC No module I O No module taton Ne 5 4 olo o o o o o 35H 34H 30H 3048 30H 30H 30 30H 30H 30 30H 31H 30H 31H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H D H L H H L 9148 0 1 Request data length CPU monitoring timer Command 0 0 1 8 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 1 1 30H 31H 38H 30H 30H 30H 30H 34H 30H 31H H D H D H D H D H 0 4 Data length target range Character A section Sub command i Head Device Device points 1 gt 0 1 0 0 0 30H 30H 30H 30 30H 31H 30H 30H 30H 30H 32H gt Data length target range format 7 4E frame Binary T T Request Fixed PLC Request Request CPU Sub Device m s nni type Serial No value No No modu data length monitoring Command command Head Device code Device points 54H 00 00H 00 00 OOH 01 01 OOH 00 00 00 00 OOH 01 04 OOH OOH 64H OOH OOH A8H 02 00 Data length target range Details of data items in message for
312. ppended with error contents The address notated in hexadecimal is converted to a 4 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted from the upper digit For details of error codes that are generated in formats 7 to 10 QnA compatible 3C AC frame refer to the following gt m Error code list When connecting a microcomputer etc that uses the MC protocol of the Q QnA series serial communication module with the GOT When connecting a microcomputer etc that uses the MC protocol of the Q QnA series serial communication module with the GOT correct the commands to be used and the device ranges to match the GOT specifications 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 5 Message Formats Message format The following shows the message format of the dedicated commands for a microcomputer connection of GOT 1 Read clock data 1901 command The following shows an example of reading the clock data of GOT Assuming that the clock data of GOT has been set to 2004 June 1 18 46 49 Tuesday Time display 2004 06 01 18 46 49 TUE lt 12 o 2 Item Message format Example Format 7 QnA compatible 4 frame format 1 5 Frame ID Network Request destination Request destinati ENO No Staion No module O No 11 F
313. pt Data Byte in Communication Detail Settings D13 A User Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits 4 2 bytes Output value when 4 is set to Interrupt Data Byte in Communication Detail Settings 1 When setting the LH order to 32bit Storage for the communication detail settings D14 D13 D14 s A Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits 4 4 bytes 2 When setting the HL order to 32bit Storage for the communication detail settings D13 D14 A A Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits 4 4 bytes D15 to 19 Unused D20 to 2031 User area User D2032 to 2034 Unused 1 second binary counter The counter is incremented at 1 second intervals after the GOT is turned ON The time elapsed after GOT is turned ON is stored in 1 second units Data are stored in binary format D2035 System D2036 to 4095 User area User 1 After writing data the interrupt data is output within a period of 1 to 10ms 2 When data are written to 013 and D14 from the host side interrupt output is not performed 1 The side where virtual devices are set System Seton the system side User Seton the user side by sending request messages from host or using the touch switches etc on the GOT 2 Interrupt output D13 D14 To disable the interrupt output turn ON 5 52 interrupt code output disable flag s 3
314. puter board Virtual devices inside the GOT The devices inside the GOT are used in the microcomputer connection PLC devices are not used 57 24 Device Data Area 2 2 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 1 Microcomputer Connection Serial The host sends a request message the read write command to the GOT The GOT performs a read write processing to its virtual devices according to the request from the host Upon completion of the processing the GOT sends a response message processing result to the host Creating the following objects on the screen allows you to use the data read written to the virtual devices Numerical Display that displays data written by the write command Numerical Input that is used to input data to be upload to the host 2 When outputting interrupts GOT Screen data Device data area Screen display V virtual devices Interrupt D13 V D13 3139 output value1 output value2 31H 39H 2 Interrupt output When the number of interrupt data bytes is 2 tL Host 1 Data are written to the virtual devices for interrupt output from the touch switches on the GOT 2 The GOT sends the written data interrupt output to the host 1 52 5 Message Formats 215724 Device Data Area 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 1 Microcomputer Connect
315. r connection format 2 only The sum check code is obtained by converting the lower 1 byte 8 bits of the result sum after having added the sum check target data as binary data to 2 digit ASCII code Hex T T Number of Sum STX Command Address points ETX Check R D 0 1 0 0 0 2 B 02 52H 44H 30H 31H 30H 30H 30H 32 O3H 42H 43H H L H 14101 1 0 D H L 4 gt Sum check is performed in this range 52H 44 30H 31H 30H 30H 30H 32H 03H 1 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 61 2 5 Message Formats lt 12 2 E 2 2 E 2 a Message format 1 Batch read 0 command w out station No batch read A command w station No a When reading a word device The following shows an example of reading four bytes of virtual devices R100 to R101 from the GOT at station No 15 Assuming R100 3D21H R101 3604H are stored 3D21H 4 3604 4 Item Request message host gt GOT Message format format 14 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection format 1 ij Numb STX Station No Address CR A 1 5 0 0 8 0 4 02 41H 31H 5 30H 30H 43H 38 30H 34 ODH H 0 A 10 11 8 0 format 15 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connect
316. r digit In the format 2 the address notated in hexadecimal is converted to a 2 digit Binary code binary and transmitted from the upper digit Error code This is the response message at faulty communication appended with error contents Error code is transmitted in 1 byte For the error codes refer to the following m Error code list 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 4 Message Formats ll Message Formats 1 Batch read in word units RD command a When reading a word device The following shows an example of reading the two points of the virtual devices D100 and D101 Assuming 0100 0102 D101 0304H are stored 0102 4 0304 Item Message format format 1 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection ASCII Command Address 27 54 52H 44 30H 31H 30H 30H 30H 32H Request message host GOT format 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection Binary Command Address bed format 1 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection ASCII Data 1 D100 Data 2 D101 LE 2 a I E E z E o 2 2 O 14 E 2 O o a 30H 31H 30H 32 30H 33H 30H 34H 0 Response message during normal communication GOT host format 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection Binary Data 1 Data 2
317. r digit two digits When connecting a microcomputer etc that uses the MC protocol of the Q QnA series serial communication module with the GOT When connecting a microcomputer etc that uses the MC protocol of the Q QnA series serial communication module with the GOT correct the commands to be used and the device ranges to match the GOT specifications 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 4 Message Formats Message format The following shows the message format of the dedicated commands for a microcomputer connection of GOT 1 Read clock data 1901 command The following shows an example of reading the clock data of GOT Assuming that the clock data of GOT has been set to 2009 October 1 18 46 49 Thursday Time display 2009 10 01 18 46 49 THU Item Message format format 8 QnA compatible 3E frame ASCII T T T Request Subheader Network PLC No Request destination jestination module ee module No _ _ _ station ___ Following 5 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 35H 30H 30H 30H 30H 31H 31H 30H 30H 30H 0 Character A section gt 1 Request data length CPU monitoring timer Command Sub command 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 9 0 1 0 0 0 0 30H 30H 43 30H 30H 31H 39H 30 31H 30H 30H 30H 30H
318. r higher 400m Built into GOT configuration between user 1 23 the GOT and PLC 2 Shielded twisted pair cable STP refer to each chapter or unshielded twisted pair cable UTP of category 3 or higher 1 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system Connect to the Ethernet module hub transceiver wireless LAN adapter NZ2WL JPA or NZ2WL JPS or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network system Use cables connectors and hubs that meet the IEEE802 3 10BASE T 100BASE TX standard For the controllers that can be connected to the wireless LAN adapters and how to set the wireless LAN adapter refer to the manual of the wireless LAN adapter used 2 Astraight cable is available When connecting the GOT and PC directly with Ethernet cable remember that the by cross cable is available 3 Alength between a hub and a node The maximum distance differs depending on the Ethernet device to be used The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used 10BASE T Max 4 nodes for a cascade connection 500m 100BASE TX Max 2 nodes for a cascade connection 205m When switching hubs are used the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades For the limit contact the switching hub manufacturer 10 2 10 VNC R SERVER CONNECTION 10
319. r pair cable STP or STARDOM unshielded twisted unshielded twisted pair cable UTP pair cable a S 126 GOTs Ethernet 100 2 100 Built into GOT NFCP100 Category 3 4 and m Hub Category 3 4 and Built into for 1 PLC NFJT100 5 5 100BASE TX 100BASE TX Shielded twisted Shielded twisted pair cable STP pair cable STP Category 5 and 5e Category 5 and 5e When connecting STARDOM to MODBUS TCP Modbus Communication Portfolio License is required For details refer to the following manual 3 YOKOGAWA PLC user s Manual 32 When connect a GOT to a PLC connect to the PCL Ethernet port a hub Use cables connectors and hubs that meet the IEEE802 3 10BASE T 100BASE TX standards 3 When connecting GT2000 to an equipment that meets the 10BASE T 2 5 standard use the switching hub and operate an environment where 10Mbps and 100Mbps can be mixed 4 Alength between a hub and a node The maximum distance differs depending on the Ethernet device to be used The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used 10BASE T Max 4 nodes for a cascade connection 500m 100BASE TX Max 2 nodes for a cascade connection 205m When switching hubs are used the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades For the limit contact the switching hub manufacturer 5 Use the straight cable PLC Side Setting Make the communicatio
320. range 0 to 31 The address notated in decimal is converted to a 2 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted from the upper digit The GOT processes only commands whose station No matches the Host Address 0 to 31 set at Communication Detail Settings The message of command whose station No does not match is ignored For setting method of Communication Detail Settings refer to the following 57 2 6 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings Address Specifies the head No of the device data to be read written The address notated in hexadecimal is converted to a 4 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted from the upper digit For details of the device range that can be accessed refer to the following gt 24 Device Data Area Bit pattern Specifies the pattern of the bits to change The address notated in hexadecimal is converted to a 2 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted from the upper digit gt m Message format 3 Multi point write in bit units 3 command w out station No multi point write in bit units D command w station No Write specification Specifies how to change the data of the specified address by bit pattern Setting range 0 to 3 Data notated in decimal is converted to a 1 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted 57 m Message format 3 Multi point write in bit units 3 command w out station No multi point write in bit units D command w station No 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTI
321. ranty details before using this product 1 Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company However if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer s discretion Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves replacement of the failed module Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for thirty six 36 months after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be forty two 42 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The customer shall be responsible for the primary failure diagnosis unless otherwise specified If requested by the customer Mitsubishi Electric Corporation or its representative firm may carry out the primary failure diagnosis at the customer s expence The primary failure diagnosis will however be free of charge should th
322. rd on the multimedia unit For the CF card that can be inserted into the multimedia unit formatting in FAT32 is recommended If the CF card formatted in FAT16 is inserted the following phenomena may occur Reading writing or saving of movie files takes time When a movie file is played the movie momentarily looks like as if it stopped 13 8 13 MULTIMEDIA CONNECTION 13 5 Precautions 14 RFID CONNECTION 14 1 Connectable Model 16 14 2 14 2 System 14 2 14 3 GOT Side 5 05 14 4 rrr 14 6 RFID CONNECTION 14 RFID CONNECTION 14 1 Connectable Model List For connectable RFID controllers and system equipment refer to the following Technical bulletin gt List of valid devices applicable for GOT2000 series GOT D 0064 Visit the Mitsubishi Electric FA Equipment Information Service website MELFANSweb to refer to the Technical News http wwwf2 mitsubishielectric co jp english index html 14 2 System Configuration 14 2 1 Connecting to RFID Extended function OS Communication driver Connection type dependent D Dt T Connection cable J Oooo D Varies according to the connection type RFID controller
323. reading is possible 1 2 Range of coils and input relays that can be monitored The device range of MODBUS equipment differs depending on the type When using types that the device range for coils and input relays are other than hexadecimal monitoring to the device maximum range may not be possible In this case the device range extends to the last number divisible by 16 Example For a type whose coil device range is from 0 to 9999 The range that can be actually monitored is from 0 to 9984 Address conversion example When monitoring the holding register s address 1234H GT Designer3 displays 4 since GT Designer3 processes the internal conversion in decimal format as follows GT Designer3 converts the holding register s address 1234H to 04660 in decimal format Then 1 is added to this decimal address since the holding register s address on GT Designer3 always starts from 1 Therefore the holding register s address 1234 is displayed as 404661 on GT Designer3 Holding register 1234H 4 04660 41 404661 5 MODBUS R TCP CONNECTION 5 5 Device Range that Be Set MODBUS communication control function on the GS device 1 Function overview This function is to prevent the communication response delay that occurs because the devices on the MODBUS network differ from each other in network specification This function is effective for the MODBUS network conditions as desc
324. ribed below When only a part of function codes is supported Example OF is not supported When the maximum transfer size of function code is small Example The maximum number of coil read times is 1000 Communication setting When the MODBUS TCP communication driver is assigned to multiple channel numbers using Ethernet multiple connection the following cases are possible The communication settings are shared between the assigned multiple channel numbers or the individual communication setting is configured for a specific channel number By setting the device 55579 either the GS device used for sharing communication settings 65570 to 65576 or the GS device used for individual communication setting 65590 to GS617 is validated GS device Description Set value Bito 0 Configure the Ch1 communication settings between GS570 to GS576 1 Configure the Ch1 communication settings GS579 Validity of setting channel number Bit 0 Bit2 0 Bit3 0 between GS590 o GS596 Configure the Ch2 communication settings between GS570 o GS576 Configure the Ch2 communication settings between GS590 o GS603 Configure the Ch3 communication settings between GS570 o GS576 Configure the Ch3 communication settings between GS604 o GS610 Configure the Ch4 communication settings between GS570 o GS576 1 Configure the Ch3 communication settings between GS611 to GS617 For details of GS d
325. rk of the GOT Controller Type Computer Default 0 I F Interface to be used Select the communication Driver Computer Format format 1to 15 Interrupt Data Byte Specify the number of bytes of interrupt data Default 1byte 1byte 2byte Abyte Special Interrupt Set whether or not to output the special interrupt code Yes or No Gode Default No Set this item when selecting Control Method the XON XOFF control for the XON XOFF control method No Default No Select the steps to store two 32bit Storage words 32 bit data Fd Default LH Order 2 73 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 6 GOT Side Settings 1 Special Interrupt Code The following shows the compatibility between the special interrupt codes and the event types Special Interrupt Code Event type Hex Base Screen and Overlap Window 1 Output when the screens are switched according to the change in the switching device values assigned to 1 2 1 Base Screen or Overlap Window 1 2 switches 20H independently without being interlocked Example of output When all the switching device values assigned to the Base Screen and Overlap Window1 2 are changed 3 special interrupt codes are output 21H Output when Numerical ASCII Input is completed 22H Output when Recipe data transfer read out write in is completed 23H Output when Bar code RFID data has been imported into GOT 2 Communication detail set
326. rmed in this range 52H 44H 30H 31H 30H 30H 30H 32H 03H 1BCH 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 5 Message Formats ll Message Formats 1 Batch read in word units RD command a When reading a word device The following shows an example of reading the two points of the virtual devices D100 and D101 Assuming 0100 0102 D101 0304H are stored 0102 4 0304 7 l lt 12 o 2 9 Item Message format H o T T T T T T Number of Sum 21 212 points ETX Check _ Request message R D 0 1 0 0 0 2 B e host GOT 02H 52H 44H 30H 31H 30H 30H 30H 32H 03 42H 43H X L 4 gt LE Sum check is performed in this range gt STX Data 1 D100 Data 2 D101 ETX cub Response message 6 455 lt 4 4 4 during normal 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 8 D c communication 02 30H 31H 30H 32 30H 33H 30H 34 03H 38H 44H host o 4 gt Sum check is performed in this range format 1 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection format 1 NAK 15H Response message during faulty format 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection format 2 communication GOT host Error code 15H 06H The above is a case where the sum check
327. rnet 3 2 3 2 System 3 2 3 3 Device Data 3 3 3 4 Message 3 16 an GOT Side Settings d Co ca boe ens oto 3 69 3 6 System Configuration Examples 3 71 3 7 Device Range that Can Be Set 3 72 3 8 PISCAUIONS 3 73 LE 2 a I LE z E o 2 2 O 14 E 2 O o x 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 1 Microcomputer connection Ethernet The microcomputer connection Ethernet is a function by which data can be written or read from a PC microcomputer board PLC etc hereinafter referred to as host to virtual devices of the GOT after connecting the host to the GOT with the Ethernet Interrupt output is also available from the GOT to the host For the flow of the data processing such as reading or writing data and interrupt output refer to the following 25724 Microcomputer Connection Serial 3 2 System Configuration 3 2 1 For the microcomputer connection Ethernet Communication driver Loom Ethernet microcomputer Connection cable Host Connection cable GOT Number of Communication Maximum connectable RUN Cable model segment Option device Model equipment length Twisted pair ca
328. s YDO9 DC24V 2 24V o YDOA 11 B7 YDOA DC24V 1 YDOB 36 A7 YDOB OV 29 e A3 ov YDOC 12 B6 YDOC 28 To B2 ov YDOD 37 A6 YDOD ov 27 2 Empty YDOE 13 B5 YDOE ov 26 B1 Empty YDOF 38 A5 YDOF N C 5 A1 Empty RUN 30 DC24V 4 4 24V DC24V 3 4 24V DC24V 2 B3 24V DC24V 1 COM 29 9 ov COM 28 B2 ov COM 27 A2 Empty COM 26 B1 Empty N C 5 A1 Empty 7 CONNECTION TO EXTERNAL I O DEVICE 7 5 7 3 Connection Diagram Connector specifications 1 2 5 3 4 Y pni B t No Name Model name Manufacturer PCR E50FS GT15 DIO 1 Connector PCS E50FS Honda Tsushin Kogyo GT15 DIOR Co Ltd 2 Connector PCS E50LA cover 3 Sonnentor Mitsubishi 4 with a cover Corporation 5 Connector FCN 361J040 AU FUJITSU 6 Connector FCN 360C040 B COMPONENT LIMITED cover UL 2464 AWG28 7 Cable equivalent Precautions when preparing a cable 1 Cable length Maximum cable length differs depending on the cable used Make the cable length within the range that can satisfy the I O specifications of the external I O unit 2 GOT side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following 27 14 1 connector specifications 7 6 7 CONNECTION TO EXTERNAL DEVICE 7 3 Connection Diagram 7 3 2 Connection diagram between connector terminal block converter module and user create
329. s and connector specifications of the coaxial cable used for connecting the GOT to a video camera Connection diagram 1 Coaxial connection diagram 1 Displaying video image on GOT 750 drohmcoaxial video cameral GOT Ss os y Vision sensor side i 1 i ignal H Signal i BNC connector L H GND BNC connector i Ji 5 Cable specification Specifications Applicable cable 3C 2V 5C 2V JIS C 3501 compliant Connecting the BNC connector to the coaxial cable For connecting the BNC connector and coaxial cable refer to the following 1 4 2 Coaxial cableconnector connection method Precautions when preparing a cable 1 Cable length The cable length differs depending on the specification of the video camera to be used Create a cable under the specification of the video camera 2 GOT side connector Use the following as the multimedia unit connector For the GOT side connector of the coaxial cable use the ones compatible with the GOT connector GOT Connector Connector model type GT16M MMR 227161 4 Tyco International Ltd 3 Video camera side connector Use a connector compatible with the video camera to be used Manufacturer 13 4 13 MULTIMEDIA CONNECTION 13 3 Connection Diagram S ct 8 L When the coaxial cable is long When the coaxial cable is long video signals are att
330. s memory link method the details error code of the error are appended to the response message during faulty communication The following shows error code error contents cause and measures Error code Description Action 108 Command error An unsupported command was used Review the contents of the message to transmit Check the commands in the message Message length error 12H The upper limit of the data length that can be received by 2 2 3 4 2 List of commands the GOT has been exceeded Review the contents of the message to transmit FAH Address error Check whether the non existent data is set e g setting 07 at the day of The start address of the read write device is out of range 9 9 y the week as clock data Review the contents of the message to transmit FBu Exceeded number of points error Check the devices that can be used and the device ranges The read write range exceeded the device range 3 3 Device Data Area Message format error Check the settings of Communication Detail Settings The format of the received message has error Review the contents of the message to transmit Timeout error Check the communication cable and communication module attachment FFH There is no response from the GOT or the station of the Check the settings of Communication Detail Settings specified address does not exist Review the contents of the message to transmit Precau
331. s of the vision sensor PC 2 GOT side connector Use the following as the video RGB input unit RGB input unit and RGB output unit connectors For the GOT side connector and connector cover of the analog RGB cable use the ones applicable to the GOT connector t GOT Connector model connector Manufacturer type GT27 R2 Z D Sub 15 pin DDK Ltd GT27 V4R1 Z 17HE R13150 73MC2 female DDK GT27 ROUT Z 3 Vision sensor PC side connector Use a connector compatible with the vision sensor personal computer to be used 2 E 2 2 a 9 12 a 11 VIDEO RGB CONNECTION 11 7 11 3 Connection Diagram 11 4 Side Settings 11 4 1 Setting communication interface Controller setting Set the channel of the equipment to be connected to the GOT MITSUBISHI MELSEC Q QS Q17nD M NC DR CRnD 700 Standard 85422 485 Q UQnA A CPU QJ71C24 1271624 AD Station No Switch 1 Select Common Controller Setting from the menu 2 The Controller Setting window is displayed Select the channel to be used from the list menu 3 Set Manufacturer Controller Type I F and Driver according to the connected equipment to be used 4 The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer Controller Type I F and Driver are set Make the settings according to the usage environment Click
332. s on the Communicate with GOT dialog box Select the Project data OS radio button of the Write Data 4 Check mark a desired standard monitor OS communication driver option OS extended function OS and Communication Settings and click the GOT Write button 1 10 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 2 Writing the Package Data onto the GOT 1 2 2 Checking the package data writing on GOT Confirm if the package data is properly written onto the GOT by reading from GOT using GT Designer3 For reading from the GOT refer to the following manual 2257 GT Designer3 GOT2000 Help Communicate with GOT cor write 816171 cor Read E C Verfeaton Li GOT GOT Information Get GOT Information Read Data i GOT Type Source Drive C Built in Flash Memory GOT Name Free Space Capacity 1 KB ia PC Destination GT Designer3 a GOT Read Communication Configuration Communication Path PC USB GOT o z E z gt o x 2 a 2 2 5 lt a 1 Select Communication Read from GOT from the menu 2 The Communication configuration dialog box appears Set the communication setting between the GOT and the personal computer Click the button when settings are completed 3 The Read tab appears on the Communicate with
333. s the clock data of the GOT 1 Mixed specification of bit devices and word devices is also possible List of commands for formats 3 to 6 A compatible 1C frame Command ASCII Command name Description Symbol processed code P 7 Reads bit devices in 1 point units 64 points WR 57H 52H Batch read Reads bit devices 16 point units 3 64 words 1024 points QR 51 52 in word units Reads word devices in 1 point units 64 points pu Pu MA Writes to bit devices in 1 point units 64 points WW 57 57 Batch write Writes to bit devices in 16 point units 64 words 1024 points Qw 51H 57H in word units Writes to word devices in 1 point units 64 points p Pa 44 Writes to multiple different bit devices in 1 point units 64 points WT 57 54 Test in word units Writes to multiple different bit devices in 16 point 3 64 words 1024 points QT 51H 54H random write Writes to multiple different word devices in 1 point units 64 points TR 54H 52H Read clock data Reads the clock data of the GOT Ts 54H 53H Set clock data Sets the clock data of the GOT 2 Thisis a dedicated command of GOT for the microcomputer connection 3 Specifies the address of bit devices in 16 point units Example MO M16 M32 and others 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 21 2 5 Message Formats lt D 2 E 2 2
334. sage NAK during faulty communication GOT host 15 3 36 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 4 Message Formats b When writing to a bit device The following shows an example of writing 1 s to virtual devices MO and M31 on the GOT at station No 15 Before execution m 0001H 4 m 8000 4 After execution Item Message format format 3 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection ASCII T N Ab umber com Station No Address of bytes gt B1 5 2 0 0 010 olowig De 42H 31H 35u 32H 30H 30H 30 30H 34 1 H D m a 2 Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 MT 100 M23 fo 16 MST to 24 5 0 1 0 0 0 0 8 0 31 30H 30 30H 30 38H 30H 5 D H D H D B D E 0000000110000000000000000110000000 MMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMM 76543210111111982222111133222222 543210 3210987610987654 gt Request message host GOT format 4 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection Binary o Numb 5 Com
335. ser s Manual Utility 2 The Controller Setting window is displayed Select the 2 Precedence in communication settings channel to be used from the list menu When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 3 Set Manufacturer Controller Type and Driver according to the connected equipment to be used 2 2 E 2 n E 2 a 2 o E 2 E 2 2 o 4 The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer Controller Type I F and Driver are set Make the settings according to the usage environment Click the OK button when settings are completed The settings of connecting equipment can be set and confirmed Communication Setting For details refer to the following 57 1 1 2 I F communication setting 6 CONNECTION TO SOUND OUTPUT UNIT 6 3 6 3 GOT Side Settings 6 4 Precautions Sound output function setting on GT Designer3 Before connecting the sound output unit make the sound output file setting For details refer to the following manual Designer3 GOT2000 Help 6 4 6 CONNECTION TO SOUND OUTPUT UNIT 6 4 Precautions CONNECTION TO EXTERNAL DEVICE 7 1 Connectable 115 7 2 7 2 System 7 3 7 3 Connection Diagram 7 5 7 4 GOT Side 5
336. smit the data converted to a 2 digit ASCII code from the upper digit Transmit the data converted to a 2 digit binary code Request destination module 1 No Ignore GOT Request destination module station No Ignore GOT Request data length Number of bytes from the start of CPU monitoring timer to the last request data Transmit the data converted to a 4 digit ASCII code from the upper digit Transmit the data converted to a 4 digit binary code from the lower two digits Response data length Appended to the response message from the microcomputer side Number of bytes from the start of end code to the last request data Transmit the data converted to a 4 digit ASCII code from the upper digit Transmit the data converted to a 4 digit binary code from the lower two digits CPU monitoring 1 Ignore GOT timer Specifies the access contents from the microcomputer side to GOT For details of the commands that can be used refer to the following Command 3 4 2 List of commands Sub command Transmit the command and sub command converted to a 4 digit ASCII code from the upper digit Transmit the data converted to a 4 digit binary code from the lower two digits Device code Specifies the code by which the device data to be read written is recognized For details of the device range that can be accessed refer to the following 3 3 Device Data Area
337. sponse message z during normal communication GOT host 2 During processing of write commands 2 2 O um 2 a Response message NAK during faulty 1 2777 07 communication host 15H c Output value During interrupt p Zm 7 nm output 1 2 4 bytes 1 Set the number of interrupt data bytes at Detail setting in GT Designer3 For the setting of the number of interrupt data bytes refer to the following x 3 5 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 19 3 4 Message Formats Details of data items in message format Data code during communication Communication of the format 1 is performed in ASCII code excluding interrupt output Communication of the format 2 is performed in Binary code 1 Control codes Symbol ASCII code Description EOT 04H End of Transmission ENQ 05H Enquiry start of enquiry NAK 15 Negative ACK error response ACK Acknowledge write completion response LF OAH Line Feed CL OCH Clear CR Carriage Return Command Specifies the contents to access from the host to GOT The command is converted to a 2 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted from the upper digit For details of the commands that can be used refer to the following gt 3 4 2 List of commands Address Specifies the head No of the device dat
338. station No specification method 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 59 3 4 Message Formats 3 4 7 Formats 8 9 QnA compatible 3E frame Basic format of data communication This is the same message format as when communication is performed using the MC protocol QnA compatible 3E frame of the Q QnA Series serial communication module For details of the basic format of data communication refer to the following manual 2957 MELSEC Q L MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual This section describes items whose settings differ from the MC protocol of the Q QnA Series serial communication module and the dedicated commands for a GOT microcomputer connection Example Request message for the batch read 0401 command in word units Device name 0 Head device 100 Device points i2 Communication setting of side Network 1 PLC 1 Format 8 QnA compatible 3E frame ASCII T Network T T Request destination T Request destinati Request data length EOS Gad E PLC No modulelO No o 92A na Following 5 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 8 51 35H 30H 30H 30H 30H 31 30H 31 30H 30 30H 30H 30H 31H 38H 9 H D 0 D P D L Character A section 2 4
339. stored The user can also store data using the user area List of D devices The following lists the D devices virtual devices inside the GOT Address Description Set side DO to 2 Unused 0 1 Error Communication error status Stores the communication error details of GOT b15 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 50 x Unused D3 SIO framing error SIO parity error SIO overrun error Communication timeout error Unused b4 to 6 turn ON when an SIO error occurs and turn OFF when an request message from the host is received successfully after the error occurrence b7 turns ON about 3 seconds after the host side DTR becomes OFF and turns OFF when transmission is performed successfully to the host after the error occurrence lt n 2 E 2 2 E 2 a D Clock data year b15 b7 50 v vV d System 04 Lower 2 digits of calendar year stored as 2 digit BCD Unused Clock data month b15 58 b7 bO v v 5 Data of months 01 to 12 stored as 2 digit BCD Unused Clock data day b15 58 b7 50 vV vV D6 A A Data of days 01 to 31 store
340. t 3 A compatible 1C frame format 1 ENQ Station PLC No Command Wait Gum Request message MEM e Gel elie ee w host GOT 30H 52H 304 36H 0 4 Sum check is performed in this range Example Format 3 A compatible 1C frame format 1 Character B section gt T ij T STX Station No PLC No ETX Eu 0 0 0 0 Following 1 9 0 02H 30H 30H 30H 30 03H 39H 30H Response message H L H L H L during normal 4 communication Sum check is performed in this range GOT host 1 Minute Second Day of Year data Month data Day data Hour data data data weak 30H 4 30H 36H 30H 31 31H 8 34H 36H 34H 9 30H 32H H D HK 0 0 O D 0 D 0 Example Format 3 A compatible 1C frame format 1 Station No PLC No Error code Response message during faulty 0 0 0 0 0 5 communication 154 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 35H GOT host 5 D The above is the case where an overrun error 05H has occurred 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 5 Message Formats 2 39 lt D n 2 E 2 2 E 2 a t 2 Set clock data TS command Th
341. t 3 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection ASCII T T T T T con Station No Address of A 1 5 2 0 0 0 0 4 41 31H 35 32H 30H 30 30H 30 34 H L 9 H 0 Request massage fi t 4 GOT F900 Seri i t tion Bi host GOT format 4 eries microcomputer connection Binary T Station Number mand No Address of bytes A OFH 20H 00 04H format 3 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection ASCII T T T T Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 7 to 0 M15 to 8 M23 to 16 M 31 to 24 H L H L H D H D 00000001000000000000000010000000 MMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMM 76543210111111982222111133222222 543210 3210987610987654 Response message during normal format 4 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection Binary communication GOT host Data 082 Datad Data4 100 15 08 M23 to 16 M31 to 24 01H 00 00 80H 000000010000000000000000110000000 76543210111111982222111133222222 543210 3210987610987654 Response message NAK during faulty f communication GOT host 15H 3 MICROCOMPUTER CO
342. t the application will not lead to a major accident even if any problem or fault should occur in the graphic operation terminal device and that backup and fail safe functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault 2 The Mitsubishi graphic operation terminal has been designed and manufactured for applications in general industries etc Thus applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and other power plants operated by respective power companies and applications in which a special quality assurance system is required such as for Railway companies or Public service purposes shall be excluded from the graphic operation terminal applications In addition applications in which human life or property that could be greatly affected such as in aircraft medical applications incineration and fuel devices manned transportation equipment for recreation and amusement and safety devices shall also be excluded from the graphic operation terminal range of applications However in certain cases some applications may be possible providing the user consults the local Mitsubishi representative outlining the special requirements of the project and providing that all parties concerned agree to the special circumstances solely at our discretion In some of three cases however Mitsubishi Electric Corporation may consider the possibility of an application provided that the customer notif
343. t to fail or malfunction by static electricity TOUCH PANEL PRECAUTIONS NCAUTION Forthe analog resistive film type touch panels normally the adjustment is not required However the difference between a touched position and the object position may occur as the period of use elapses When any difference between a touched position and the object position occurs execute the touch panel calibration When any difference between a touched position and the object position occurs other object may be activated This may cause an unexpected operation due to incorrect output or malfunction PRECAUTIONS WHEN THE DATA STORAGE IS IN USE NWARNING e SD card mounted on drive A of the GOT is removed while the GOT is accessed processing for the GOT might be interrupted about for 20 seconds The GOT cannot be operated during this period The functions that run in the background including a screen updating alarm logging scripts and others are also interrupted Since this interruption makes an impact to the system operation it might cause failure After checking the light off of SD card access LED remove the SD card NCAUTION If the data storage mounted on the GOT is removed while the GOT is accessed the data storage and files are damaged To remove the data storage from the GOT check that the access to the data storage in SD card access LED the system signal and others is not performed When inserting a SD card i
344. ta of the GOT G 478 Read elok data w station No 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 23 2 5 Message Formats 2 5 3 Formats 1 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection Basic format of data communication Item Message format T T Sum 22121210 cose ETX Check Request message host GOT 02 03 H D H D gt Sum check is performed in this range 1 During processing of read commands T STX Data ED Qu 02H 03H L Response message 4 gt during normal Sum check is performed in this range communication host 2 During processing of write commands ACK 06H format 1 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection format 1 Response message during faulty communication GOT host format 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection format 2 Error NAK Code format 1 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection format 1 Output value During interrupt output 1 2 4 bytes 1 format 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection format 2 STX Output value ETX Sum check 1 2 4 02H bytes 1 03H H D 4 gt Sum check is performed in this rar 1 Set the number of interrupt data bytes at Detail setting GT Designer3 For the setting of the number of interrupt data byt
345. td LSR Format 11 MARS TECHNO SCIENCE Corp ICU 60S Format 12 MARS TECHNO SCIENCE Corp ICU 215 Mifare Nonprocedural protocol Format 15 Format 10 11 12 15 14 RFID CONNECTION 14 5 14 3 Side Settings 14 4 Precautions RFID function setting on GT Designer3 Before connecting the RFID controller set the RFID function and system data For details refer to the following manual gt GT Designer3 GOT2000 Help Controller setting 1 When using the external authentication When using the external authentication on the RFID controller set Channel No 8 using the standard interface When connecting the RFID using Channels No 5 to 7 of the extension interface extension interface cannot be used For details on the external authentication refer to the following manual 257 GT Designer3 GOT2000 Help 2 When requiring the power supply When using the RFID controller which requires the power supply from the GOT set Channel No 8 using the standard interface With Channels No 5 to 7 of the extension interface the power cannot be supplied Communication in multiple RFID readers writers connection When connecting multiple RFID readers writers some controllers may communicate with each RFID reader writer For communicating the RFID controller with the each RFID reader writer set an interlock so that the RFID controller does not communicate with RFID readers writers unt
346. the 4 Communication connection with the Ethernet Select Common Controller Setting from the Except for Port No module 5011 5012 menu Default 5021 49153 The Controller Setting window is displayed Select the channel to be used from the list menu ou mom j the GOT startup until GOT Startup Time starts the communication with to 255sec Set the following items the PLC CPU Manufacturer Others Default 3sec Controller Type Computer Set the delay time for reducing I F Interface to be used Delay Time the load of the network 0 to 10000 Driver Ethernet MICROCOMPUTER destination PEG Default Oms The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer Select the steps to store two Order 32bit Storage words 32 bit data Controller Type I F and Driver are set Default LH Order HL Order Make the settings according to the usage a Select the communication TCP IP environment Protocol protocol pele gt 3 5 2 Communication detail settings Default UDP IP Select the communication Format format 1to9 Click the OK button when settings are completed Default 1 Specify the number of bytes of Interrupt Data Length interrupt data 11214 Default 1 The settings of connecting equipment can be set and Special Interrupt ra oae hs id confirmed in Communication Setting For details Output
347. the GOT and PLC 5 Shielded twisted pair cable STP refer to each chapter or unshielded twisted pair cable UTP of category 3 or higher 1 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system Connect to the Ethernet module hub transceiver wireless LAN adapter NZ2WL JPA or NZ2WL JPS or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network system Use cables connectors and hubs that meet the IEEE802 3 10BASE T 100BASE TX standard For the controllers that can be connected to the wireless LAN adapters and how to set the wireless LAN adapter refer to the manual of the wireless LAN adapter used 2 Astraight cable is available When connecting the GOT and PC directly with Ethernet cable remember that the by cross cable is available 3 A length between a hub and a node The maximum distance differs depending on the Ethernet device to be used The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used 10BASE T Max 4 nodes for a cascade connection 500m 100BASE TX Max 2 nodes for a cascade connection 205m When switching hubs are used the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades For the limit contact the switching hub manufacturer System configuration between the GOT and PLC For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC
348. this range Interrupt output e To disable the interrupt output turn ON 5 52 interrupt code output disable flag 7 gt 2 4 6 SM devices To issue interrupts in format 11 set the data length to 8 bits at Communication Detail Settings gt 2 6 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings When 7 bits is set the MSB 8th bit is ignored Example FFH 7FH 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 57 2 5 Message Formats Error code list In the case of formats 12 and 13 Digital Electronics Corporation s memory link method extended mode the details error code of the error are appended to the response message during faulty communication The following shows error code error contents cause and measures Error code Description Action Sum check error 06H The sum check code created from received data differs Review the contents of the message to transmit from the sum check code in the receive data Command error 10 An unsupported command was used Message length error 12 The upper limit of the data length that can be received by the GOT has been exceeded Review the contents of the message to transmit Check the commands in the message 2 2 2 52 List of commands Clock data setting error Review the contents of the message to transmit 16H Check the data length of th data length of the dat ti The setting value of the clock data has error e
349. tility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual gt GOT2000 Series User s Manual Utility 13 4 3 Installing and setting multimedia interaction tool onto personal computer Install the multimedia interaction tool onto the personal computer and set it For how to install and set multimedia interaction tool refer to the following manual 57 Designer3 GOT2000 Help 0508 When saving a video image and displaying it on the GOT the installation and setting of the multimedia interaction tool onto the personal computer are unnecessary 13 4 4 Setting the multimedia function Set the multimedia function For the multimedia function setting refer to the following manual 57 GT Designer3 GOT2000 Help 13 4 5 Setthe gateway function Set the gateway function for using FTP For the gateway function setting refer to the following 257 GOT1000 Series Gateway Functions Manual for GT Works3 To save a video image and display it on the GOT When saving a video image and displaying it on the GOT the gateway function setting is unnecessary 13 MULTIMEDIA CONNECTION 13 4 GOT Side Settings MULTIMEDIA CONNECTION 13 5 Precautions When the multimedia function is used The multimedia function and the video RGB function are written exclusively Select either of them to use CF ca
350. ting error Review the contents of the message to transmit 15 The setting value of the clock data has error Check whether the non existent data is set e g setting 07 at the day of the week as clock data Address error 1 1 The start address of the read write device is out of range REVIEW the contents orme message to transmits Check the devices that can be used and the device ranges 7Bu Exceeded number of points error 228 3 3 Device Data Area The read write range exceeded the device range Precautions 1 Batch reading writing crossing over different devices When using the batch read RD or batch write WD command do not batch read write crossing over the different devices This will cause an error response 2 Storage order for 32 bit data To use the program of GOT A900 series with 32bit Order setting to GOT1000 series set HL Order to 32bit Order for Communication Detail Settings when 32 bit data is set for GOT A900 series With setting LH Order the order of upper bits and lower bits are reversed when the GOT displays and writes 32 bit data 3 4 Message Formats 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 44 Formats 3 4 GOT F900 series microcomputer connection Basic format of data communication Item Request message host gt Message format 1 w out station No 2 w station No Com Station No Data
351. ting when connecting 3 multiple GOTs For the following items set the same settings to the n 1th GOT interface as the CH No 1 of n th GOT Transmission Speed Data Bit Stop Bit Parity Set each Host Address for the GOT Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual User s Manual of used 4 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 6 GOT Side Settings 2 7 System Configuration Examples The following shows a system configuration example in the case of the microcomputer connection serial System configuration The system configuration example illustrated below is explained in this section IBM PC AT compatible PC Microsoft Visual C Ver 6 0 Communication settings on GOT side and monitor screen settings 1 Transmission settings Set the transmission settings of the GOT The transmission settings in the microcomputer connection serial are made at Detail Setting on GT Designer3 2 6 2 Communication detail settings Setting item Setting details Baud rate 38400bps Data bit bits Stop bit 1bit Parit
352. tion No 15 Assuming R100 3D21H R101 3604H are stored 3D21H 4 3604 4 Item Message format format 3 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection ASCII ig Number Pan 7 Station No Address of bytes 41H 31H 35H 30H 30H 43H 8 30H 34H H L H D H 0 Request message host GOT format 4 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection Binary T Com Station Number mand No Address of bytes A OFH OOH 8 04 format 3 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection ASCII T T T T Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 R100 R100 lower R101 upper R101 lower 33H 44 32H 31H 33H 36H 30H 34H H L D H D D Response message during normal communication host format 4 GOT F900 Series microcomputer connection Binary Data Data2 Data3 Data4 true 3 21 36 04 Response message NAK during communication GOT host 15H 3 34 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 4 Message Formats b Item When reading a bit device The following shows an example of reading four bytes of the virtual devices MO to M31 Assuming 0 1 and 31 1 are stored Message format forma
353. tion OS Extended function OS Communication driver LL PC remote operation Connection type joan Video RGB input dependent Connection cable 1 um Connection cable 2 4 Varies according to the connection type Connection cable 1 GOT Number of z Personal computer Max connectable Cable model Option device Model equipment 2 Built into GOT 5 GT01 C30R2 9S or 15m RS232 connection GT E diagram 1 27 9 GT15 RS2 9P X SSS SSS SSS aS o Connection cable 2 GOT EE kis is in 1 personal To be selected by the configuration between computer for 1 Max user Cable model ne Option device Model the GOT and PLC GOT distance refer to each chapter GT27 R2 Z GT15 C50VG or 1 Analog RGB connection diagram 1 27 GT27 V4R1 Z 1 The cable length differs depending on the specification of the personal computer to be used Use the cable that is compatible with the personal computer to be used 2 connection cable 1 RS 232 cable and the connection cable 2 analog cable should be connected between the personal computer and the GOT System configuration between the GOT and PLC For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC refer to each chapter gt Mitsubishi Products Non Mits
354. tions 1 Batch reading writing crossing over different devices When using the batch read R or batch write W command do not batch read write crossing over the different devices This will cause an error response Storage order for 32 bit data To use the program of Digital Electronics Corporation s memory link method with 32bit Order setting to GOT 1000 series set HL Order 32bit Order for Communication Detail Settings when 32 bit data is set for GOT A900 series With setting LH Order the order of upper bits and lower bits are reversed when the GOT displays and writes 32 bit data 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 49 3 4 Message Formats LE 2 I E u z E o 2 2 O 14 E 2 O o a 3 4 6 Formats 6 7 4E frame Basic format of data communication This is the same message format as when communication is performed using the MC protocol 4E frame of the Q QnA Series serial communication module For details of the basic format of data communication refer to the following manual 257 MELSEC Q L MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual This section describes items whose settings differ from the MC protocol of the Q QnA Series serial communication module and the dedicated commands for a GOT microcomputer connection Example Request message for the batch read 0401 command in word units Device name D Head device 100 Device
355. transfer read out write in is completed 23H Output when Bar code RFID data has been imported into GOT 1 Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual gt GOT2000 Series User s Manual Utility 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective Subnet Mask Default Gateway Transparent Port No Peripheral S W Communication Port 5015 5014 Item Description Range 0 0 0 0 to Set the IP address of the GOT GOT IP Address Default 192 168 0 18 255 255 255 255 Set the subnet mask for the 22 0 0 0 0 to Subnet Mask 255 255 255 If the sub network is not used 255 the default value is set Default 255 255 255 0 Set the router address of the default gateway where the 0 0 0 0 to Default Gateway GOT is connected Only for 255 255 255 connection via router 255 Default 0 0 0 0 1024 to 5010 5014 to Peripheral S W Set the GOT port No for the S 65534 Communication Port W communication Except for No Default 5015 5011 5012 5013 and 49153 1024 to 5010 5014 to Set the GOT port No for the 65534 Transparent Port No transparent function Except f
356. ts or more the switch that is located around the center of the touched point if any may operate Do not touch the display section in two points or more simultaneously Doing so may cause an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction When programs or parameters of the controller such as a PLC that is monitored by the GOT are changed be sure to reset the GOT or turn on the unit again after shutting off the power as soon as possible Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction DESIGN PRECAUTIONS NWARNING communication fault including cable disconnection occurs during monitoring on the GOT communication between the GOT and PLC CPU is suspended and the GOT becomes inoperative For bus connection GT27 Only The CPU becomes faulty and the GOT becomes inoperative For other than bus connection The GOT becomes inoperative A system where the GOT is used should be configured to perform any significant operation to the system by using the switches of a device other than the GOT on the assumption that a GOT communication fault will occur Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction CAUTION Do not bundle the control and communication cables with main circuit power or other wiring Run the above cables separately from such wiring and keep them a minimum of 100mm apart Not doing so noise can cause a malfunction Do not press the GOT display section with a pointed
357. tual devices MO and M31 Before execution After execution Message format Item Sum check is performed in this range Number S 8 3 2 0 0 2 0 0 0 1 8 0 0 0 5 6 Request message 02 57H 44 38H 33H 32H 30 30H 32 30H 30H 31H 38H 30H 30H 30 35H 36H host GOT 0 0Djm 0 jJ0 0 0 0 J0 0 H D 0000000000000001111000000000000000 MMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMM 11111198765432103322222222221111 543210 1098765432109876 ACK Response message during normal communication 06H GOT host format 1 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection format 1 Response message during faulty format 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection format 2 communication Error GOT code 15H 06H The above is a case where the sum check error 06H has occurred 2 30 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 5 Message Formats 3 Random read in word units RR command The following shows an example of reading the two points of the virtual devices D100 and MO to M15 Assuming 0100 0064 0 1 stored
358. turer changed on the Utility s Communication setting Controller Type I F and Driver are set after writing Communication Settings of project Make the settings according to the usage data 9 9 9 For details on the Utility refer to the following environment manual GOT2000 Series User s Manual Utility Click the OK button when settings are completed 3 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective POINT The settings of connecting equipment can be set and confirmed in Communication Setting For details refer to the following 57 1 1 2 I F communication setting 9 PC REMOTE CONNECTION 9 5 9 2 Serial Connection Settings for the remote personal computer operation 2 PC Remote Operation PC Remote Operation Ethernet Setting of the following items are requiret for the use of PC Remote Operation Ethernet Setting of Ethernet driver Descrip Setting of a switch special function License registration in GOT Use PC Remote Operation Ethernet allocated as windo GOT Only PC Remote Operation Serial 1 Select Common Peripheral Setting PC Remote Operation from the menu 2 Setthe interface to which the personal computer is connected for the Connecting of PC Remote Operation serial Click the OK button when
359. ty call key 1 point press on GOT screen upper left corner Utility display Y i 2 Utility call When setting Pressing time to other than 0 second on the setting screen of the utility call key press and hold the utility call key until the buzzer sounds For the setting of the utility call key refer to the following gt GOT2000 Series User s Manual Utility 3 Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual gt GOT2000 Series User s Manual Utility 4 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 9 12 Z gt o 7 a 12 2 lt 12 n 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 21 1 5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment 1 6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 1 6 1 Check on the Check for errors occurring on the GOT Presetting the system alarm to project data allows you to identify errors occurred on the GOT PLC CPU servo amplifier and communications For details on the operation method of the GOT Utility screen refer to the following manual GOT2000 Series User s Manual Utility r Error c
360. ubishi Products 1 Non Mitsubishi Products 2 257 Microcomputer MODBUS Products Peripherals 9 PC REMOTE CONNECTION 9 3 9 2 Serial Connection 9 2 2 Connection Diagram When using a 3m or longer RS 232 cable for connecting a GOT to a personal computer the cable must be prepared by the user The following shows each cable connection diagram RS 232 cable 1 Connection diagram RS232 connection diagram 1 GOT side PC side cp a i 9 1 CD RD i 3 SD SD 2 RD DTR 6 DSR SG GND 5 SG GND DSR 4 DTR RTS 7 RTS CTS 8 CTS 9 Shell FG 2 Precautions when preparing a cable a Cable length The length of the RS 232 cable must be 15m or less b GOT side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following 257 1 4 1 GOT connector specifications c Personal computer side connector Use a connector compatible with the personal computer to be used 9 4 9 PC REMOTE CONNECTION 9 2 Serial Connection Analog RGB cable 1 Connection diagram Analog RGB connection diagram 1 750 drohmcoaxial PC side iy GOT side VICA STR TRITT EMI rere r R R T Ws RGND 6 M 6 RGND G 2 s i 2 GGND 7 E 7 3 ba a B BGND 8 L BGND DGND 10 S GND HSYNC 13 S X 13 H
361. um 3 4 3 3 2 E dOVICOS zm ic do MEO 3 8 PU See eU MEI 3 9 334 uc 3 10 3 9 5 SA deVvIC8S iiiter r ubere e bei te ne dee ted 3 11 3 3 6 SM d6VIC6S ie i c id eh d ed o DeL ees HIER 3 14 Message Forrmats eite teu em 3 16 3 4 1 Data format type and 3 16 342A Histo commarnds ioo et e tia e RE EHE rede 3 17 3 4 3 Formats 1 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer 3 19 3 4 4 Formats 3 4 GOT F900 series microcomputer 3 31 3 4 5 Formats 5 Digital Electronics Corporation s memory link 3 45 3 4 67 Formats 6 7 4E frame oer md er eia 3 50 3 4 7 Formats 8 9 QnA compatible 3 60 GOT Side Settlngs EE Padus abit 3 69 3 5 1 Setting communication interface Communication 3 69 3 5 2 Communication detail nennen 3 69 3 5 8 GOT Ethernet 08 22 2 1 00 1 12 04 1 055 T e 3 70 System Configuration
362. uration 2 2 4 Connection Diagram 2 5 Device Data 2 6 Message 2 19 GOT Side Sells od ax RE SEXE ERES SO 2 73 System Configuration Examples 2 75 Device Range that Be Set 2 78 3 ua od 2 79 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 1 Microcomputer Connection Serial The microcomputer connection Serial is a function by which data can be written or read from a PC microcomputer board PLC etc hereinafter referred to as host to virtual devices of the GOT Interrupt output is also available from the GOT to the host Flow of data processing 1 When reading or writing data GOT Virtual devices inside GOT fo Screen data 00 Screen display i Display D4 to 9 D100 000A Device data area 00 to 4095 2 04 06 01 184649 unn Virtual devices D163 0362 2 020 D4095 1254 4 m m m m Interrupt 3 Response m E 7 Request Write Read Command output message message S E um T RW 0100 000A 0163 0362 T D3 Microcom
363. using the batch read 0 A or batch write 1 B command do not batch read write crossing over different devices This will cause an error response 3 44 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 4 Message Formats 3 4 5 Formats 5 Digital Electronics Corporation s memory link method Basic format of data communication This is the same format as the protocol of the Digital Electronics Corporation s memory link method For details of the basic format of data communication refer to the following manual 257 The connection manual of the device manufactured by Digital Electronics Corporation This section describes items whose settings differ from the protocols of the Digital Electronics Corporation s memory link method and dedicated commands for a microcomputer connection of GOT Example Request message for the batch read in word units R command in format 5 Digital Electronics Corporation s memory link method T T T T T T Number Data length ESC Com Address Jmand of points B R 42H OOH OOH 00 OOH OOH OOH 1 52H 00H 64H OOH 02H Details of data items in message format Data code during communication Communication is performed in ASCII code 1 Command Specifies the contents to access from the host to GOT The command is converted to a 1 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted For details of the commands that can be used refer to the following
364. w the contents of the message to transmit The character section specification error Check the commands in the message The Giethiod of specifying the character section is wrong cS 2 5 2 List of commands specified command has error 06 Check the devices that can be used and the device ranges The number of points of the processing requests exceeds the allowable range gt 2 4 Device Data Area A non existent device has been specified Check whether the non existent data is set e g setting 07 at the day of The setting value of the clock data has error the week as clock data Character error 07H A character other than A to Z 0 to 9 space and control Review the contents of the message to transmit codes has been received 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 41 2 5 Message Formats l lt n 2 E 2 2 E 2 a O 2 5 5 Formats 7 to 10 QnA compatible 3 4 frame Basic format of data communication This is the same message format as when communication is performed using the MC protocol QnA compatible 3C 4C frame of the Q QnA Series serial communication module For details of the basic format of data communication refer to the following manual MELSEC Q L MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual This section describes items whose settings differ from the MC protocol of the Q QnA Series serial
365. wing shows the list of commands available in each data format List of commands for formats 1 2 GOT A900 Series microcomputer connection Command Max ber of points ASCII Command name Description SE MUN RE Symbol processed code Reads bit devices in 16 point units 64 words 1024 points RD saa aga Potent in word units Reads word devices in 1 point units 64 points i Writes to bit devices in 16 point units 64 words 1024 points WD in word units Writes to word devices in 1 point units 64 points Random read Reads multiple different bit devices in 16 point units 64 words 1024 points RR 52 52 word units Reads multiple different word devices in 1 point units 64 points Random write Writes to multiple different word devices in 16 point units 64 words 1024 points RW 52 57 word units Writes to multiple different word devices in 1 point units 64 points TR 54 52H Read clock data Reads the clock data of the GOT TS 54H 53H Set clock data Sets the clock data of the GOT 1 Mixed specification of bit devices and word devices is also possible List of commands for formats 3 4 GOT F900 series microcomputer connection Command Max number of point ASCII Command name Description ebd qus Symbol processed code ah Batch read Reads bit devices in byte units 255bytes 2040 points
366. y Even Interrupt Data Byte 1 byte Host address 0 to 31 0 Format 1 Special Interrupt Code None Control Method None 32bit Storage LH Order 2 Monitor screen settings The following shows the monitor screen settings in this System configuration example a Common settings Set D20 to the screen switching device base Screen GT Designer3 GOT2000 Untitledi Common Figure Object Communication Tools Window Help E Y Ell Type Setting agg ut BROS 2 2 2 corenvironmental setting 6 Screen Switching Windows el Ml ha SOT sew AY Love Stein 1 Select Common GOT Environmental Setting Screen Switching Window to display Environment Setup on GT Designer3 020 Base Screen Overlap Window Screen Switching Device 117 60101 E Use also as a system window 0 2 Set 020 to the screen switching device base screen 2 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION SERIAL 2 75 2 7 System Configuration Examples lt D 2 E 2 2 E 5 a t b Monitor screen image Numerical display Create the following screens by GT Designer3 Basic Settings Base screen 1 No Device Style Format Number Size Signed Decimal Arbitrary Device Data Type Touch switch 1 Digits Sample Screen 1
367. y code binary and transmitted 257 m Message format 3 Multi point write in bit units 3 command w out station No multi point write in bit units D command w station No 3 MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION ETHERNET 3 4 Message Formats Write specification Specifies how to change the data of the specified address by bit pattern Setting range 0 to 3 Data notated in decimal is converted to a 1 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted 57 m Message format 3 Multi point write in bit units 3 command w out station No multi point write in bit units D command w station No Number of bytes Specifies the number of bytes of the device data to be batch read written Setting range 0 to FFH In the format 3 the address notated in hexadecimal is converted to a 2 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted from the upper digit In the format 4 the address notated in hexadecimal is converted to a 1 digit Binary code binary and transmitted Number of points Specifies the number of device data to be written to multiple points in bit units Setting range 0 to 70 In the format 3 the address notated in decimal is converted to a 2 digit ASCII code Hex and transmitted from the upper digit In the format 4 the address notated in decimal is converted to a 1 digit Binary code binary and transmitted Year month day hour minute second and day of the week data Specifies year month day hour minute second and day of th
368. y of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not available after production is discontinued CON ou gt 3 Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ 4 Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation to damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi loss in opportunity lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products replacement by the user maintenance of on site equipment start up test run and other tasks 5 Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice 6 Product application 1 In using the Mitsubishi graphic operation terminal the usage conditions shall be tha
369. y the host address in the Host Address network of the GOT 1 to 247 Default 1 Set this item to adjust the transmission timing of the mel Delay Time communication request from the GOT Default Oms Select the steps to store two words 32bit Storage 32 bit data zh une RE Default LH Order Select the FunctionCode OF FunctionCode OF Default Used Used Unused Select the 10 FunctionCode 10 Default Used Used Unused Cail head times Set the Coil read time 1 to 2000 Default 2000 points Input relay read Set the Input relay read time 1 to 2000 time Default 2000 points Holding register Set the Holding register read times 1 to 125 read times Default 125 points Input register read Set the Input register read times 1 to 125 times Default 125 points Coil write times Set the Coil write times 1 to 1968 Default 800 points Holding register Set the Holding register write times 1 to 123 write times Default 100 points 1 The ensures advance the minimum interval 3 5 characters time for communication frame defined in the MODBUSP RTU Therefore the actual send delay time is as follows A Send delay time set in ctual sen the communication 3 5 character delay time detail setting time Minimum interval for communication frame defined in MODBUS RTU When connecting to MODBUS RTU equipment which requires a delay longer than 3 5 charact
370. ype is valid Operation Type None 9 Data Operation Script V Bit Mask Mask Type OR xXOR MaskPattem 00 HEX Left Right Data Operation None Data Expression Set mask processing to the upper eight bits b8 to b15 of GS230 on Numerical Display 22 a 1 26 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 2 Faulty station information The bit corresponding to the faulty station is set 0 Normal 1 Abnormal The bit is reset after the fault is recovered a Ethernet connection Except for Ethernet multiple connection Ethernet Setting EE Host Net No Station Unit Type Address Port No Communication GS231 bit 0 28 1 2 0171 71 1171 71 192 168 3 39 5001 UDP GS231 bit 1 2 1 3 0171 71 1171 71 192 168 3 40 5001 UDP 65231 bit2 3 1 4 1710 71 192 168 3 41 5001 UDP 231 bit 3 4 1 5 71 71 192 168 3 42 5006 UDP Station number Device b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 50 68231 16 15 4 13 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 7 GS232 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 GS233 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 GS234 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 GS235 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 GS236 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 GS237 112 11

GOT2000 Connection Manual (Microcomputer, MODBUS, Peripherals)

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents